Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

Part ABasic Module

A 1 Introduction

A 1.1 General

In its basic module STATIK-5 is a computer program for the linear-elastic analysis of gen-
eral three dimensional frame structures according to the theories of first and second
order and despite the variety of possibilities in static modelling and in the evaluation
of results it is characterised by very straightforward and uniform operation.
For users whose needs are not so demanding STATIK-5 is also supplied in a less expens-
ive 2D version, which is limited to plane frames and for which all 3D aspects are omitted,
but otherwise it has the full range of possibilities.
Besides the basic module, the following additional modules are also available:
− Module for the calculation of nonlinear supports and truss members
− Module with a number of special features, like nodal constraints, construction
stages, buckling loads and positioning of cross sections by means of axis points
− Prestressing
− Dynamics (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− Long−term effects
− FAGUS-5 analysis module for various analyses like stress and ultimate load verifica-
tions, design, interaction and moment−curvature diagrams, etc. for reinforced and
prestressed concrete and composite cross sections.

The present manual in its standard version deals with the basic module of STATIK-5
including the 3D extension. Further chapters describing the optional modules are sup-
plied when ordered.
For first contact with STATIK-5 we recommend that one starts with Chapter A 3 Working
with STATIK-5" and goes through the first two examples (Sections A 3.4 and A 3.5) step
by step. One should also peruse Chapter A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling".
STATIK−5 is under continuous development by Cubus AG, so that the suggestions and
wishes of practising engineers are always welcome. In the case of major developments
the user will always be informed about the release of a new program version.
The right is reserved to introduce minor deviations in the program from this manual such
as self−explanatory changes in the dialogue.
STATIK-5 can be used to solve complex structural analysis problems. This by the nature
of things can involve a series of error sources, from statical modelling to data input, from
numerical problems, and even in the interpretation of results. There may also be actual
programming errors, which for such extensive software, despite all the care taken in the
development work, cannot unfortunately be completely excluded. Important prerqui-
sites therefore for the use of STATIK-5 are an adequate technical knowledge and the
checking of results by means of rough calculations and plausibility considerations.
We draw attention here to the Cubus licence agreement, which governs user rights
regarding STATIK-5 as well as to the passage Limited Guarantee", printed below in
Chapter A 1.3.

STATIKï5 Aï1
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

A 1.2 Improvements to STATIK-3

The STATIK software has been completely rewritten and STATIK−5 is a genuine 32 bit
Windows program, which in general keeps to the operating conventions of Windows.
Further, STATIK-5 works in conjunction with the CubusAdministrator, the Cubus-
Explorer and the CubusViewer. These are modules which are employed by all Cubus
programs of the 4th generation and this leads therefore to a standard operation of these
programs. We leave aside here a discussion of the individual aspects of the working
area on the screen. In the following, however, the most important innovations are
described, which affect modelling and methods of analysis.

In the basic module:

− In the nodes of automatically subdivided haunched members, if possible, the
geometry of the cross section is interpolated and not the cross section values, which
can substantially reduce the work of inputting the cross section.
− Automatic transfer of surface loads (distributed loads, line and point loads) to the
frame structure (not relevant in the 2D version).
− Automatic load superposition.
− More general concept for the output of stresses on the boundary including realistic
stress envelopes.
− Program capacity is limited, in effect, only by the hardware.

In the optional modules:

− Nonlinear analysis necessitated by nonlinear support components and nonlinear
truss members.
− Substantial simplifications with regard to construction stages.
− A new feature is that cross sections have an axis point, which lies on the axis of the
member. This permits changes to the cross sections, without having continually to
adjust the member axes. Further, this also allows the correct treatment of structures
which change from one construction stage to the next (especially important for pre-
stressed systems).
− New, graphically−interactive prestressing module.

A 1.3 Limited Guarantee (Excerpt for the Cubus License Agreement)

Limited Guarantee − Cubus guarantees for a period of 1 year from the start of the agree-
ment, that the software functions essentially in accordance with the accompanying
manual and that the hardware module delivered with the software is free of material
and workmanship defects. The agreement starts at the date of the first delivery of a
newly purchased program.

Claims of Purchaser − The complete liability of Cubus, according to purchaser’s

choice, consists of either (a) refunding the money paid or (b) in the repair or the replace-
ment of the software or hardware, which do not fulfil the limited guarantee of Cubus
and are returned to the supplier. This limited guarantee does not apply if the malfunc-
tioning of the software or hardware is due to an accident, to misuse or improper applica-
tion.

No Additional Guarantees − Cubus excludes any further guarantees concerning the

software, the accompanying manuals and the accompanying hardware module.

No Liability for Consequential Damage − Neither Cubus nor other suppliers are liable
to pay any compensation for any kind of loss (completely inclusive of any loss of profit,
interruption to operations, loss of business information or data or any other financial
loss), which arises from the use of a Cubus product or the inability to use this product.

Aï2 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

In any case the liability of Cubus is limited to the amount of money the purchaser paid
for the product in question.

STATIKï5 Aï3
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.1 Basic Considerations regarding Structural Modelling

A 2.1.1 General information

STATIK−5 is a tool for the analysis of arbitrary three dimensional structures, consisting
of straight (beam) members with constant or linearly varying cross sections. The basic
module allows linear analysis according to the theories of 1st and 2nd order.
The members are rigidly connected to each other at the nodes (exception: hinges at
the ends of (truss) members). Support conditions are introduced at the nodes. Details
on nodes and members are given in the following sections.
The position of the structure in space is defined by coordinates in a Cartesian system
(X,Y,Z) with the right−hand rule, the so−called global coordinate system. For the sake
of simplicity, directions running parallel or perpendicular to the global Z direction are
often called vertical and horizontal directions, respectively. In the representation of the
structure on the computer screen the global Z direction is also taken to be positive in
the upward vertical direction. Therefore a corresponding choice of the global coordi-
nate system is strongly recommended.
For the plane frame case often encountered in practice STATIK-5 provides a special
input mode, which hides the three dimensional aspects. Likewise, the associated output
files only contain the corresponding components. Such plane frames lie in the (X,Z)
plane of the global coordinate system.

RZ

DZ RY
DY DZ

DX
DX
RX RY

Z Z

Y
X
X The 3D frame node has Y The plane frame node has
6 degrees of freedom 3 degrees of freedom

Fig. Aï1 Nodal degrees of freedom

A 2.1.2 Solution method

The program is based on the generalised displacement approach, which basically

involves the following steps:
1) In each node six unknown displacement parameters are introduced. These are the
three displacements (translations) (DX, DY, DZ) and the three rotations (RX, RY, RZ),
which define the displacement of a body in space. They point, when not otherwise
specified, in the directions of the global coordinate system (X, Y, Z), in which also
the position of the structure is defined. All displacement parameters of the whole
structure form the vector A.

Aï4 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) For each member the relationship is determined between the generalised forces at
the ends of the member q and the generalised displacements at the ends of the
member a, the so−called member stiffness matrix k. q and a are also defined in the
global coordinate system.

q +*k@a

3) Likewise, for each member the generalised forces f are determined, which due to
the loads on the member are transmitted to the end nodes. Thus a member transmits
the following forces to the end of the member:

q +*k@a)f

4) If one now considers the whole structure, the forces of all the members connecting
at a particular node are participatory. Their summation leads to the following rela-
tionship:

Qe + * K @ A ) F

Q e is the vector of forces, which are contributed by the connecting members to each
node. It comprises the part that comes from the displacement A of the structure
and the part F from the loading at the ends of the members.
5) Equilibrium requires that the sum of all forces Q acting at a node is zero. If one also
includes the external nodal forces R, then the equilibrium condition is:

Q +*K@A)F)R+ 0

6) One only has to introduce now the boundary conditions, which allow the above
system of equations to be solved for the unkown displacements A.

A 2.1.3 Unstable systems

In order to be able to solve the above system of equations, the determant of the coeffi-
cient matrix must not vanish. Physically this says that the structure must itself be stable
and have stable supports.

Possible reasons for instability

S not enough supports specified
S too many member hinges defined
S members and/or member ends are not connected, which is visually not always
simple to detect
S instability of single (nodal) degrees of freedom
S exceeding of buckling load in 2nd order analysis
S numerical problems

Instabilities cannot be automatically detected by the program. These occure while solv-
ing the equation system and result in a corresponding error message. Finding the cause
of an instability can sometimes be tricky. In this case the context sensitive online help
will give you hints how to find the cause of the instability.

STATIKï5 Aï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2 Members

A 2.2.1 Members, Member Lines and Member Axis

In the case of a member connecting two nodes in a frame structure, we distinguish

between its member line and its member axis, which do not coincide in the case of
eccentric connections.
A structure is built up by inputting member lines. Where the ends of member lines
touch nodes result; these ends are rigidly connected together.

The member axis, on the other hand, is the straight line coinciding with the centre of
gravity or the axis of the effective member section.

member axis SE
member line rigid connec- S member
A
tion eA from
nodes to start member
PA PE PE line
of member PA

normally connected member eccentrically connected member with

the member end points SA and SE

Fig. Aï2 Normal and eccentrically connected members

Intersecting Member Lines

If two member lines intersect the program assumes (if not otherwise specifically
requested), that the members are connected at the point of intersection. For the struc-
tural model a node is automatically introduced at the point of intersection and the
members cut in this way are divided into corresponding smaller members.

. The analysis module in STATIK-5 works with beam elements, connected at the nodes. How-
ever, the input members can consist of a number of beam elements, whereby the subdivision
of a member into beam elementis is carried out automatically by the program, whether it is
because members intersect, because nodes are introduced in the members or because an auto-
matic subdivision is necessary for special analysis methods.

The following figure illustrates the automatic subdivision into beam elements of input
members:

input members and support nodes member 1

support nodes:

member 3
member 2
automat. subdivided

beam elements 3_2

created by program:
1_1 1_2 1_3 1_4
2_3
3_1
2_2
Fig. Aï3 Members and
beam elements 2_1

Aï6 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.2 Eccentric Member Connections

An eccentric member connection is a rigid connection between the member start node
(i.e. the node to which the start of the member line is connected) and the physical start
of the member, and likewise for the member end point (see H−2). This is a convenient
model for the frequently encountered eccentric member connections. It is much prefer-
able to the introduction of short members with arbitrary cross sections.
. Large eccentricities can lead to extreme conditions of member stiffness and thus to numerical
problems. An exact amount of eccentricity cannot be given here. However, as a rule one should
not exceed values of at most half the member length.
. Eccentric connections should only be introduced where they are of statical relevance, since
they make the comprehension of the model and the interpretation of the results much more
difficult.
Member eccentricities can be specified in two ways:
member end General Specification in Global Coordinates:
member axis The first method involves the input of the vectors of the member end nodes to the
respective member ends in global coordinates. In this way, in principle, every eccentric-
eccentricity vector ity can be defined.
member line
Local Specification:
member end nodes
In cases which can be described in this way, the following type of specification of
member eccentricities is often simpler, especially as well, since with a change of cross
section they do not have to be redone.
We are dealing here with local eccentricities, since these are defined with respect to the
member line. The local x eccentricities along the member line are input explicitly and
those perpendicular to it are given by fixing the position of the member cross section
by means of a anchor point (LEERER MERKER).

z’ z’ z’ y’
Hi y’ Hi y’ E
note: Hi
The automatically gen-
erated anchor points zq S
and their names are S S
identical with the auto- yq zq
matically generated zq yq
result points (see page yq
A−29 )
The automatically generated anchor points Hi are Also in the case of given member
created in the rectangular outline (parallel to cross orientation the selected anchor point
section input system yq,zq) as shown; S is the centre coincides with the member line
of gravity or axis, respectively

z’
y’ member line PE
H

PA
zq
yq
exA
In the cross section of anchor Member placed using anchor point with
point H input by hand local x eccenticity exA at start of member

Fig. Aï4 Local specification of member eccentricities

As already mentioned, the member axis always passes through the centre of gravity or
the cross section or through any defined axis point. If the middle anchor point is
selected, the member axis and the member line coincide (no eccentricities in local y’
and z’ directions). In other cases it will exhibit a corresponding eccentricity.

STATIKï5 Aï7
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

To uniquely define the position of the cross section an x’,y’,z’ coordinate system is intro-
duced; it only has relevance in this connection. It will presently be shown how the local
coordinate system is defined (see Ch. A 2.2.3) with x’ on the member line, whereby no
eccentricities, but any input member orientations have to be considered. The cross sec-
tion is placed as shown in LEERER MERKER, i.e. the yq and zq axis of the cross section
are in the same direction as y’,z’.

If the member axis is positioned in the way described − possibly with different cross
sections at the start and end of the member − and also if any local x eccentricity is taken
into account, the position of the member end point and thus of the member axis is uni-
quely defined. The actual local member coordinate system (see Ch. A 2.2.3) is in this
case also uniquely fixed by the member axis and any specified member orientiation.
Its directions do not necessarily coincide with those of the x’,y’,z’ coordinate system.

With regard to positioning with the anchor point the following points are mentioned:
S Positioning with the aid of anchor points represents in many cases a great simplifica-
tion in the input of the member axis positions.
An example would be members which lie on top of one another, as may be the case
for purlins. When changing the cross section no changes have to be made to the
geometry.
S When preparing the input of the members one should also consider the support
conditions, which can only be formulated in the nodes. These are situated at the
ends of the member lines.
S As for the direct input of eccentricities, there are limits to the automatically generated
eccentricities. For instance, very short members with large eccentricities can lead to
numerical problems.
S One is cautioned, however, because of the simple input possibilities and the realistic
representation not to connect everything eccentrically, if this is not relevant to the
structural model. Understanding the model and interpreting the results is much more
difficult for systems with eccentricities.

Example: Model of a column with an eccentric connection

Column Model

Member Member line

axis (input line)

eccentric con- Member axis

0.25 nection of the = membe line
top member
to the bottom
member Z
ex = −0.25 X

Fig. Aï5 Example of an eccentrically connected member

Aï8 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Subdivision of a Member Line, whose Member is Connected

Eccentrically

member axis SE

eccentric SA eccentric
connection connection

PA
PE
Lm admissible region for Lm
member line subdivision of member line minimum admiss-
ible member length

subdivision
point

the program makes 2 eccentric member

elements out of the subdivided member

Fig. Aï6 Subdivision in the case of eccentric member connection

As a result of the above considerations we have the condition that a member line, whose
member is connected eccentrically, can only be subdivided within the region given in
the above figure and thus may only be cut there as well.
The minimum allowable member length applies for numerical reasons. The value is
predefined by the program. The user, if the necessary care is taken, can make adjust-
ments to the actual conditions in a calculation, but it may never be zero. Thus members
or zero length are excluded.

A 2.2.3 Member Axis and Local Coordinate System

The member axis runs from the member start point SA to the member end point SE.
SE These points are the end points of the member line corrected by any eccentricity vectors.
For quantities related to the member (position and orientation of cross section, hinges,
z
x loads, section forces (alternatively called ’stress−resultant components’ or ’internal
y forces and moments’)...) each member has its own local coordinate system (x,y,z).
Z
SA This has its origin of coordinates at the member start point SA and is conventionally
defined as follows:
Y
x: along member axis, in direction of member end point
X
z: perpendicular to x in a vertical plane through x, pointing towards the positive half
Plane perpendicular
to (X,Y) through SA, space of Zglobal
SE
y: perpendicular to z and x, so that a right hand rule x,y,z system is obtained; thus y
lies in a horizontal plane

These definitions for y and z fail in the case of vertical member axis, for which the local
y axis points in the direction of the global Y and z follows from that.
. The member axis usually coincides with the axis of the centre of gravity of the cross section.
For special cases, however, in the input of the cross section there exists the possibility of defin-
ing an axis point that deviates from the centre of gravity (see Ch. A 2.2.5).
. In the case of symmetrical cross sections the principal axes of the cross section coincide with
the local y,z axes, which does not necessarily have to be the case for general cross sections
(see Ch. A 2.2.5). Therefore hinges, loads and section forces are not defined in every case in
the directions of the principal axes of the cross section .

STATIKï5 Aï9
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.4 Rotated Local System (Member Orientation)

In order to obtain a correct position of the cross section (only for space frames), the local
coordinate system, departing from the standard method described A 2.2.3, can be speci-
fied in a position arbitrarily rotated about the member axis. We are dealing with this case
with a variable member orientation. The specification can be done in two ways:
−) by specifying an angle, about which the system is rotated relative to the standard
position about the local x axis
−) by inputting a vector, which together with x defines the local x,y plane; y points in
the same direction as the projection of this vector onto the y axis

. Rolled steel sections can be introduced rotated by a certain angle. This possibility, which also
serves to position the cross section correctly and likewise finds application in plane frames,
has no influence on the definition of the local coordinate system.

A 2.2.5 Member Cross Section and Local Coordinate System

For every prismatic member there is one cross section, but for every haunched member
h there are two. A cross section is defined by the geometry of its parts as well as its material
properties. The input or choice of the cross section offers the following possibilities:
b
1) An (extendable) series of parametricised standard cross sections, like rectangle, T,
..., is available, which is defined by inputting the corresponding parameters.
2) Selection of cross sections from an extensive library of rolled steel sections.
3) Selection of cross sections, which were defined in the cross section module FA-
GUS−5. FAGUS-5 permits the input of arbitrary polygonal cross sections. These may
consist of several partial cross sections with different materials and arbitrary polygo-
nal holes. More information is given in the FAGUS-5 manual.
member cross sec-
tions: If no special axis point is specified in the definition of the cross section (see later), then
ï parametricised the centre of gravity of the cross section coincides with the local x-axis of a member
ï from section library
ï arbitrary (see LEERER MERKER ).
The zq direction of the cross section always corresponds to the local z direction
of the member. For non−symmetrical cross sections this means in general that the
directions of its principal axes are rotated with respect to the local coordinate system.
The program of course has to formulate the stiffness relationships in the directions of
the principal axes. The user, therefore, always works with the local coordinate system
and the necessary transformations are carried out automatically.
zh z yh
z
yq,zq: Input coordinate system
of cross section with the
ß origin Q0
S y y
S y,z: Local coordinate system
zq zq of member
yh,zh: Principal axes of cross
yq yq section
Q0 Q0

Fig. Aï7 Position of cross section in local coordinate system

The required relationships between strain and section force quantities within a member,
which form the basics for the statical analysis, are all formulated with respect to the
centre of gravity and the directions of the principal axes of its cross section.
To determine these relationships the cross section stiffnesses given in Table A−1 are
needed. These are determined automatically by the program for a given cross section
geometry and the materials selected for the cross sections. For special cases these stif-
fness values can also be overwritten for each member individually.

Aï10 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Stiffness Use Determine*)

sdx vx’ = N/sdx E.Ax Ax: cross sectional area

sdy vy’ = Vy/sdy **) G.Ay Ay: reduced shear area
sdz vz’ = Vz/sdz **) G.Az Az: reduced shear area
srx rx’ = T/srx G.Ix Ix: torsional constant
sry r y’ = − My/sry E.I y Iy: moment of inertia about y
srz rz’ = Mz/srz E.Iz Iz: moment of inertia about z

vx’= dv x , ... rx’= drx , ... v: displacement r: rotation

dx dx
N, V, T, M: section forces; E, G: elastic moduli (material properties)
*) For cross sections with several materials one works with a reference material para-
meter and the corresponding ideal cross section values
**) The influence of shear deformation can be switched on or off for
each member individually

Table Aï1 Cross section stiffnesses

. In contrast to earlier program versions, the materials and thus the characteristic values (E
modulus, G modulus) of importance for STATIK-5 can also be specified in the cross section
and do not appear explicitly in the input for STATIK-5. Above all this is advantageous for com-
posite cross sections, whereby one does not have to work by weighting an E modulus defined
in STATIKï5.

Definition of Position of a Cross Section with an Axis Point

. This possibility requires a special program option
If the cross section has an axis point A, then not the centre of gravity, but this axis point
lies on the member axis. Thus a (perhaps additional) eccentricity arises, which is cor-
rectly handled by the program automatically.
Working with an input axis point, which is independent of the centre of gravity, is of
importance above all if a member exhibits different cross sections in different construc-
tion stages. Since the member axes do not change, the correct position of the centre of
gravity can be defined with only one axis point (see LEERER MERKER).

Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2 Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2

z z z z

S1 y A y A
y y
S2

Q0
Q0 Q0
Q0
Without the axis point the centre of gravity If an axis point PA is defined (in the cross section input sys-
coincides with the unchanging member axis. tem Q0), then the member axis coincides with it.
The position of the cross section changes ! The position of the cross section remains constant !

Fig. Aï8 Cross sections and axis point

As in the case of directly input eccentricities, these automatically generated eccentricities

are also subject to limitations for numerical reasons. In any case one should restrict one-
self to axis points that lie within the convex envelope of a cross section.
Further, one should remember that the section force results are output with respect to
the axis point. If this is situated far from the centre of gravity, a quick interpretation of
the resulting section forces is difficult, should normal forces be present.

STATIKï5 Aï11
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Members with Changing Cross Section (Haunched)

A member can have either a constant cross section or exhibit different cross sections
at its ends. In the case of different cross sections one speaks of a haunched member.
Regarding the variation of the cross section of haunched members one should note the
following points:
1) Within member elements the cross section values are linear.
2) If input haunched members intersect or if subdivisions are specified for haunched
members for the calculation, then the cross sections are linearly interpolated in the
subdivision points, provided the necessary requirements are fulfilled. Otherwise a
linear variation of cross section values is assumed. One should refer to the FAGUS-5
manual regarding the requirements for interpolation of the cross sections. By way
of example, the following figure shows the stiffness variation in the case of linear
interpolation of the cross section geometry

Rectangular cross section with linearly

member varying height h...2h

Variation of bending stiffness:

Without member subdivision (linear)
With subdivision into 4 member elements
(corresponds here approximately to effec-
tive variation)

Fig. Aï9 Variation of cross section / cross section values

A 2.2.6 Hinges at Member Ends

Members are normally rigidly connected at their end nodes. Analogous to the six
degrees of freedom in a node, at the member ends six possible restraints can be
released. These are the three displacements and three rotations in the local coordinate
system. For a bending hinge in a plane frame in the X,Z plane, for example, the rotation
about the local y axis has to be released.
member hinges SE
SA
PA PE
PA PE

Centrally connected member Eccentrically connected member

Fig. Aï10 Member end hinges

Instead of a normal hinge, which releases the corresponding restraint and transmits no
force or moment, between member ends and member end points an elastic spring can
act.

A hinge cannot be introduced within a member. In this case it is necessary to input more
than one member with member ends at the desired hinge positions.

. When inserting hinges one should ensure that no instabilities arise. The following three pitfalls
exist:
1) The member itself becomes unstable (torsional hinges at both ends of a member element
are automatically corrected by the program).

Aï12 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) Nodes can become unstable, if for a displacement degree of freedom none of the connected
members contribute stiffness and the node is not correspondingly supported. Example: all
members are hinged at a node (a special case is given by truss members, which are dealt with
in the next section).
3) Obviously, by introducing too many hinges an instability of a part of the structure or of the
overall system can also be caused.

. Whether a structure is unstable and cannot be analysed according to the selected method
depends on the loading. Instabilities cannot, in principle, be recognised by the program. Only
if the algorithm to solve the system of equations fails is there an indication of a structural or
numerical instability (due to extreme differences in stiffness).

Truss Hinges

A hinge, for which all rotational degrees of freedom and only these are released, is called
here a truss hinge. In STATIK-5 truss hinges are given the following special treatment:

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, then the program recognises it
Basically unstable
nodes are automatically as a truss node and automatically stabilises what are in effect its unstable rotational
stabilised by the pro- degrees of freedom (see also section A 2.3 on nodes). Therefore, such nodes may not
gram be acted upon by moments.

Truss member
Truss Members

Truss members are input as such in STATIK-5. At both ends they have a truss hinge. A
Created member
member, which has the same hinges as a truss member, but is not defined as such, is
elements: not treated as a truss member. If the member line of a truss member is subdivided by
a node or another member, then the member elements that result automatically become
truss member elements. With respect to the hinges these behave as truss members.

G: truss elements

G M G
Fig. Aï11 Instabilityof a part of the structure due to too many hinges?

If the horizontal member in Figure A−11 is input as a truss member, then the system
sketched above is stable, since the member is subdivided into two truss member
elements. Thus in node M only members with truss hinges are connected and its rota-
tional degrees of freedom are eliminated by the program.

If the horizontal member is not input as a truss member, then as a 3D frame the system
is unstable, although the member does not have any additional hinges. Since in the
subdivision of the member no hinges are introduced at M, the rotation of the node is
not stabilised, and the substructure of the horizontal member consisting of two member
elements can freely rotate about its axis.

STATIKï5 Aï13
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3 Nodes

In the analysis model nodes are the points at which the equilibrium conditions are
formulated, leading for the whole structure to the global system of equations. Nodes
are introduced everywhere where member elements connect and in all free member
elements. This is done automatically by the program and in general the nodes are of
no direct interest to the user. Nodes with special attributes, like support conditions,
however, have to be input specifically. The following sections illustrate the cases in
which this is necessary.

A 2.3.1 Nodal Coordinate System

A nodal coordinate system (X’,Y’,Z’) is assigned to every node, whose default direc-
tions correspond to those of the global coordinate system. In this system the displace-
ment degrees of freedom of a node and, thus, also possible nodal loads, support condi-
tions and reactions are defined. In the nodes created by the user the nodal coordinate
system can be rotated arbitrarily. This is meaningful above all in the case of supports
which do not act in global directions.

A 2.3.2 Nodes on a Member Line

If a node is created on a member line, the member for the calculation model is
subdivided into member elements. If no specific attributes are given for such a
member (see below), then it only serves the purpose of subdivision of an input
member. This is probably only seldom of interest, since a member subdivision for
the calculation model alone can be achieved using the member attributes more eas-
ily. A frequent application, however, is the creation of support nodes on a continu-
ous beam, which was input only as a single member.

Fig. Aï12 Support nodes on a continuous beam

A 2.3.3 Support Conditions

Z’ X’ Support conditions can be formulated in the nodes created by the user. To each of
k the six displacement parameters of a support node one of the following three condi-
tions is assigned:
1) Free, i.e. corresponding displacement not restrained
Rotated nodal system
at node k 2) Blocked (fixed), i.e. no displacement possible
Z 3) Elastic (spring support), i.e. a stiffness value defined as force quantity / displace-
ment quantity is specified.

Y X
Here one should note that the directions of the displacement parameters correspond
Global system to the nodal coordinate system (see above).

Aï14 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3.4 Truss Nodes

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, the node is designated a truss
node. Its in effect unstable rotational degrees of freedom are eliminated and as a result
it can be acted on by moments.

A 2.3.5 Reference Nodes

There are cases in which an input applies to a specific node. This is the case for example
when scaling the displacements of a load case, if one wants to use them as a predefined
deformation. This is done by assigning a value to a displacement component in a speci-
fied node. For this purpose an input node must be present there, which has an identifier,
to which one can refer.

A 2.3.6 Nodal Constraints

. Requires special program option

The specification of a linear dependency between displacement parameters is called

here a nodal constraint. Typical applications, for example, are rigid connections
between a group of nodes or folding joints.

The constraints are of the form:

S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + factor3 * M3+ ...

(S=slave parameter, i.e. dependent displacement parameter, Mi=master parameter, i.e.

free displacement parameter)

See chapter E 3 for detailed information about nodal constraints.

STATIKï5 Aï15
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4 Loads

Loads are put together in individual load cases, which can be accessed individually or
in combinations in the results output. The following loads are possible:

A 2.4.1 Loads on Nodes and Members

Nodal loads (forces, moments, prescribed displacements and rotations): they act in in
the nodal coordinate directions, i.e. usually in the global coordinate directions.
Member loads (forces, moments, strains, curvatures, accelerations): accelerations are
suitable for determining self-weight or earthquake loads. They act in the global
coordinate directions and the input values are multiplied with the cross section
G masses by the program. The other loads can be concentrated or linearly distributed,
and can also act on a part of a member. Strains and curvatures act in the local coordi-
nate system, but forces and moments can act in the local or in the global coordinate
system.
Influence line loads: Influence lines can be calculated for section, displacement and
support quantities.
Loads due to prestressing are automatically generated at the ends of the tendons by
the prestressing module (not included in the basic module) based on the input pres-
tressing stages.

A 2.4.2 Surface Loads

In the case of 3D structures (space frames), with the exception of the self-weight of the
member, one often has to do with surface loads. Examples are floor loads, roof loads,
facade loads, loads transmitted through a carriageway, pressure loads like wind, water,
etc.. Assigning by hand such loads to the members of the structure is very time−consum-
ing, is a source of errors and is difficult to check. For this purpose STATIK-5 provides
the facility of surface loads, which the program assigns automatically to the desired
members.
In load cases load transmission surfaces (subsequently abbreviated to surfaces) can
be selected and on these arbitrary point loads, line loads and polygonally bounded dis-
tributed loads (designated in STATIK-5 as surface loads) can act. In this connection the
following points should be mentioned:
1) Surfaces are predefined independently of the loads.
2) A surface lies in a plane, is bounded by an arbitrary polygon and can also have
polygonally−shaped openings.
3) Those members must be assigned to a surface, to which the loads are trans-
mitted. In the case of a roof, for instance, this could be the purlins, and in the case
of a grillage all grillage members without any wind bracing, etc. . These members
have to lie in a plane, whereby a small deviation is accepted (tolerance value can
be set).
Important: The members carrying the surface loads are loaded only by forces (no
torsional moments). The transmission of an eccentric load to a single member will
therefor not be possible.
4) Each surface load has a direction (global X,Y,Z or local, i.e. perpendicular to load
surface). In the case of distributed, non−local loads one can specify whether the load
value is projective or effective. By projective one means the load value per unit
length or unit area normal to the direction of loading, and by effective per unit
length or unit area on the loading surface.
5) Line and area loads can be constant or trapezoidally and linearly distributed. For area
loads the plane load distribution is specified by load values at three points.

Aï16 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

6) Parts of a load which overhang the load surface or lie above openings and recesses
are not considered.

The load transfer of surface loads is carried out by means of an automatcally generated
Finite Element plate model, whereby the surface (load transmission surface) forms the
plate with constant thickness and the projection of the load transmission members onto
the surface are the line supports (freely rotating about their axes), on which the plate
is supported. The reactions of this support are in fact the sought member loads, which
are statically equivalent to the input loads. Attention is drawn to the following points:
1) A reduced plate stiffness is assumed over the support lines , so that the influence
of the loads is kept as local as possible − an assumption which one usually makes
in hand calculations.
2) The ratio of plate stiffness to support stiffness has a relatively big influence on the
distribution of the reactions. If it is increased the reactions are more uniformly distrib-
uted (smoother),whereas if it is reduced the reactions vary more strongly and
changes of sign are frequent. This stiffness ratio, designated in the program as the
smoothing factor, can be changed by the user within certain limits.
3) The load distribution is determined on the basis of the vertical components acting
on the plate. For the components in the plane of the plate the same distribution is
assumed. Whether this is permissible in a specific case has to be decided by the user.
For loads which do not deviate by more than 45 degrees from the vector normal to
the loading surface, this assumption is generally adequate.
4) Since no moments are transferred from the surface loads to the load carrying
members, these members must build some grid or stripe system and the surface loads
should lie within such a grid, i.e. the loads should generally be surrounded by load
carrying members. Overhanging loads are possible but the result of the load
transmission should be checked by the user.

A more exact determination of the load transmission would require a very complex
model, which would include the stiffnesses and structural action of the loading surface
(roof sheeting, facade, bridge deck...) as well as that of the overall structure. In this case
this would represent an unjustifiable effort.
The generated member and nodal forces can be inspected both graphically and numeri-
cally. To check the plausibility of the results one should, without fail, look at the
generated loads graphically!
If the automatically generated load transmission does not meet your requirements in
a specific case, then you have no alternative but to input the desired member loads by
hand.

A 2.4.3 Combination Load Cases

Normally one is interested in the design values of results obtained by the superposition
of different load cases with prescribed load factors. These superpositions are performed
by the ’results’ module based, respectively, on the load case or the limit state specifica-
tions and the stored results of the individual load cases.
In cases where the superposition of results is not allowed (analyses based on 2nd order
theory, nonlinear analyses), the analysis has to be carried out using load cases which
incorporate all actions together with the corresponding factors.
For this purpose STATIK-5 provides combination load cases. Here we are dealing with
’normal’ load cases, which are always treated as such, but from the point of view of
input, however, are defined as a combination of other existing load cases (which them-
selves may not be combination load cases).
. Note the difference between combination load cases and load case combinations. The latter
are instructions on how load case results have to be superimposed for the output of results,
provided that the results may be superimposed.

STATIKï5 Aï17
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4.4 Influence Lines

With STATIK-5 influence lines for displacement and reaction quantities can be calcu-
lated in the nodes as well as for member section forces.

Influence lines are determined by Land’s method. For each influence quantity at a par-
ticular position (e.g. moment My at a certain position on the member) a load case has
to be defined.

The calculated displacements of an influence line load case have to be interpreted

according to the type of moving load (e.g. force in the global Z direction, moment in
the local Y direction, etc.). The type of moving load is not chosen till the results are
output. Thus with an influence line load case different influence lines can be output.

Example of inluence lines for the section force My over the 2nd support:
My

Influence line for moving force Z:

Influence line for moving moment Y:

Aï18 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.5 Solution Methods

The solution method for 1st order theory is described in Ch. A 2.1. The basic module
of STATIK-5 also allows analyses according to linear 2nd order theory. For the following
types of analysis optional modules are available:
− linear stability analyses (buckling loads)
− dynamic analyses (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− long−term analyses (creep, shrinkage)
− nonlinear analyses for nonlinear characteristics of support components and truss
members

These methods are described in chapters additional to this manual.

A 2.5.1 Analyses according to 2nd Order Theory

The influence of deviation forces due to normal forces in the structure are considered
in analyses according to 2nd order theory. Beforehand, of course, the normal forces
have to be known (from an analysis according to 1st order theory, which is automati-
cally carried out by the program).

The solution is based on the equation:

Q = −( K + KG (N) ) A
Q : vector of the structure’s nodal forces
K : linear−elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
A : sought nodal displacements of the structure
i.e. the stiffness matrix for 1st order theory is extended by the "geometrical stiffness
matrix", which depends on the normal forces and the geometry.
The 2nd order theory is also valid for only small displacements. It can only be applied
if the actual normal forces in the structure do not differ appreciably from those obtained
from 1st order analysis.

Suitable for 2nd order theory: Unsuitable for 2nd order theory:

Supports mainly due to normal

forces induced by deforma-
tions
(Normal forces of 1st order=0)

Fig. Aï13 Suitable and unsuitable structures for analy-

ses according to 2nd order theory

. The superposition of load case results for 2nd order theory is not permissible!
To simplify dealing with practical cases, however, in STATIK-5 load cases can be defined,
which are a combination (with arbitrary factors) of other load cases. Such combination load
cases correspond to normal load cases and can also be solved therefore according to 2nd order
theory.
Whereas for analysis according to 1st order theory exact formulas can be used, the
determination of the geometrical stiffness matrix is based on discretised assumptions
regarding member deformation (cubic parabolas). The accuracy of an analysis depends

STATIKï5 Aï19
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

on how well the deflected shape due to bending can be approximated by such parab-
olas. This is improved if the members are subdivided by intermediate nodes.

As a basis for a subdivision, which gives sufficient accuracy in practical cases, the follow-
ing suggestion may be adopted:

Prismatic members should be subdivided such that between two points of inflec-
tion of the expected additional deformation due to the effects of 2nd order
theory there are about three members.

Some examples are given below. The multi−storey frame requires no additional subdivi-
sion.

dx

Z
Zfix
X tanZX = dx/h

Fig. Aï14 Member subdivision for analysis Fig. Aï15 Initial deformation due to skew position
according to 2nd order theory

Initial Deformations

For analyses according to 2nd order theory one often has to assume prescribed
imperfections in the structure. This is supported in STATIK-5 by creating and applying
initial deformations, as the imperfections are called here, in different ways.

Initial deformations are coordinate differences, which are added to the ’ideal coordi-
nates of the structure’s nodes, in order to obtain the imperfect structure. The same effect
could be achieved for the analysis and the results, if one defined the structure directly
in the imperfect configuration.

Initial deformations can be generated automatically in two ways:

1) The displacements of a load case or a natural deformation (from a buckling load
analysis) can, if scaled appropriately, be used as an initial deformation. The scaling
is carried out by defining the value of a displacement component in a particular
node.
2) Certain codes require as an imperfection a skew position of the structure. This way
of creating an initial deformation is also supported in STATIK-5. The Z coordinate
of the fixed base plane and the two angles of inclination tanZX and tanZY must be
input (see LEERER MERKER).

. To allow comparison of results of analyses with 1st and 2nd order theories, one can also work
with 1st order theory analysis with initial deformations.

Aï20 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.6 Actions and Limit State Specifications

A 2.6.1 Basic Considerations

The aim of all structural analysis is ultimately the dimensioning of a structure. This is
based on limit states, which requires among other things the selection of design situa-
tions with the associated load cases.

Each load case is characterised by a leading action and a simultaneously acting accom-
panying action and thus consists of a weighted combination of actions.

An experienced engineer can − at least for preliminary dimensioning − often limit the
consideration to a few points and also without much effort can recognize the critical
load cases for the investigated design situations.

The strength of a program however lies in the systematic treatment of numerous sections
or points. For many dimensioning tasks it is best to work with limit values of section
forces, reactions or displacements. These are determined by the Cubus programs on the
basis of limit state specifications, which uniquely describe the combination rules for the
individual loading. How these limit state specifications are arrived at is described below.

A 2.6.2 Overview of the Limit State Specifications

A simple limit state specification at the highest level looks as follows in the programs:

The considered actions are dealt with in the left half of the dialogue, and in the right
half the investigated combinations of these actions with the corresponding combination
factors. How these combinations were obtained is clearly seen here: the permanent ac-
tions ’Dead Load’ and ’Surcharge/Live Loads’ are investigated with the factors Jsup (here
1.35) und Jinf (0.8). In addition there are the variable actions, of which on the one hand
the snow loads as leading action (JQ=1.5) and the wind load as accompanying action
(\0=0.6) and on the other hand the wind loads as leading (JQ=1.5) and the snow loads
as accompanying (\0=0.88) actions are considered. The load and accompanying action
factors depend on
S the code
S the actions
S the design situation
S the limit state under consideration

STATIKï5 Aï21
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The design situation and the limit state are specified on creating a new limit state specifi-
cation by the user .

The list of actions in the left part of the dialogue is created automatically on the basis
of the input loads, each of which is assigned to an action. The right part of the action
combinations can be automatically generated, but also be arbitrarily defined by adding
to, deleting or modifying columns. Regarding automatic generation see Chapter A 2.6.6.

The programs CEDRUS-5 and STATIK-5 automatically create a limit state specification
for the limit state (Type 2) of the ultimate limit state (structural safety) for the standard
design situation.

The actions, which have not yet been discussed in detail, will be treated in the next
chapter.

A 2.6.3 Actions

Each individual load is strictly speaking an action. But as is evident from the previous
chapter, the term ’Action’ is defined more narrowly here. Before it is defined precisely,
the following terms are clearly defined once again:
Loads: As loads all elementary load elements are meant, which are available in a pro-
gram as actions on a structure (see also above in A 2.6.1).
Examples: concentrated loads, line loads, etc.
Loads are always summed up together in loadings (see below).
Loadings are a type of container for individual loads. On the load side they represent
the basic unit for which results can be calculated, and also from which actions are
formed.

Definition of the term ’Action’

Actions are loadings summed to form the individual categories like dead loads, live
loads, wind loads, snow loads, etc., which then finally are combined to form action
combinations in the limit state specification.

How actions are formed

During input new loadings are always assigned to an action category. Thereby the most
important categories available in the codes for the chosen structural type can be selec-
ted, whereby the user can also define his/her own categories.

All loadings assigned to an action category comprise together an action. One is still free
to choose how the loadings interact to form an action, i.e. whether e.g. they can act
together or are mutually exclusive. The corresponding specification is called an action
specification and is treated in detail later.

Aï22 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Dialogue with the List of Actions

In order that on the one hand one has an overview of the actions that can arise in an
analysis with their properties and on the other hand to be able to define ones own ac-
tions, the programs have been provided with a special dialogue:
Load factors and
combination factors

Code prescribed
action categories
(cannot be chan-
ged)

Actions created
by user

The Properties of an Action

Action type
For an action type there are the following selection possibilities: ’permanent’, ’variable’,
’prestressing’, ’accidental’ or ’undefined. The type influences the way in which action
combinations are formed in the limit state specification.

Load Factors and Combination Factors

To each action category there belong load factors and, depending on the type, combina-
tion factors. In the case of the categories prescribed in the codes these values cannot
be modified in the dialogue. If this is necessary a user−defined action must be defined.

Action Sets and Action Groups

Several actions can together form an action set (e.g. several load models for a bridge).
Such actions are not considered separately in forming the action combination, but the
set appears as a whole in an action combination (e.g. as leading or accompanying ac-
tion).
The codes speak in this connection of action groups. This term is also supported in
a general sense in the Cubus programs. By it is understood the combinations, in which
the actions of a set have to be differentiated.
Example: The vertical and the horizontal live loads of a road bridge should be able to
occur as follows:
1) vertical loads full, without horizontal loads,
2) vertical loads * 0.75, horizontal loads full.
Solution: The loads are defined by two actions, which together form a set. The set ap-
pears in two so called action groups with the following combination factors,: (1,0) and
(0.75,1).
Which combinations should together form a set is specified in the above action dialo-
gue. All actions which have the same names in the Set column form together an action
set.

The Action Specification

To the full definition of an action there belongs the combination specification for the
participating loadings. Whereas permanent actions often consist of just one loading, for

STATIKï5 Aï23
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

variable actions a complicated superposition may be necessaray. Take for example as

an action the live loads acting on a multispan beam, for which loads have to be conside-
red in an unfavourable position in the individual spans and in addition with a vehicle
load in different positions.

One can imagine as a simple combination scheme − denoted here by E1 − the compari-
son of all possible loading combinations. This may be represented in a loading scheme
sequence as follows:
Action = Loading combination
( E1 )
or

where
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )
( E1 )

Example: Spans with unfavourably applied live load for a three span beam

A B C

3 loadings A, B and C are introduced for the individual spans.

The specification of the action Live Load according to the scheme E1is:

A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC

In the case of a five span beam one would already have 31 load case combinations to
compare one with another. If two spans and perhaps a vehicle load in n possible posi-
tions were added, then the user would find it rather challenging in terms of combinato-
rial analysis and soon lose track of the number of loading combinations.

According on the other hand to the extended superposition scheme − denoted here
by E2 − a compact and clear definition of all possible loadings is possible. This is best
illustrated in a loading scheme sequence:

Action = permanent Loading step ( E2 )

optional

wobei: plus

Loading step = Loading combination

or
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )

The scheme is based on an unconditional (permanent) or optional superposition of loa-

ding steps. In contrast to the scheme E1, no complete loading combinations are descri-
bed, but instead there is an instruction on how the results have to be superimposed in
forming the limit values and how the limit values are formed.

From optional loading steps the value of the result for an extreme value in a point is
only considered if it is decisive, that is the extreme value is increasedby the correspon-
ding amount. Thus a positive value increases a maximum value and a negative one de-
creases a minimum value.

A loading step consists in the simple case of a single loading or of a loading combina-
tion. It can however also consist of a series of loadings or loading combinations, of
which only one can occur at any one time (e.g. different vehicle positions). In this case,
in the evaluation of the loading step there is in each point a minimum and a maximum
value of the considered result quantity.

The specification for the above example for scheme E2 is:

Aï24 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A plus B plus C
In the case of a five span beam with loading in the spans A,B,C,D,E and an additional
vehicle in 9 positions (a,b,c,..,i) the specification is:
A plus B plus C plus D plus E plus a or b or c or d or e
or f or g or h or i

The user can specify an arbitrary number of actions following the superposition scheme
E2.

. The scheme E1 is contained in E2 as a special case (without ’PERMANENT’ and ’PLUS’).

Automaticallyïgenerated Action Specifications

The programs automatically create for each action (exception: prestressing actions) an
action specification according to the folowing rules:

Permanent actions: all associated loadings are added up. Such an action consists the-
refore of a fixed loading combination.

Variable actions: Each loading that is assigned to a variable action is also given during
input the superposition attribute, ’additive’ or ’exclusive’. Additive loadings (a1,a2,...)
can occur simultaneously, exclusive (e1,e2,...) are mutually exclusive (e.g. vehicle in
different positions). These actions are formed corresponding to the superposition
scheme E2 described above as follows:

a1 plus a2 plus a3 plus . . . plus e1 or e2 or e3 or ...

In cases, which are not covered by this simple rule, the specification must be done ma-
nually.
In the programs these specifications are performed in a dialogue, which looks as follows
and is self−explanatory:

A 2.6.4 Limit Values of nonlinearlyïdetermined Results

When using loading combinations or the specification ’plus’ in the above schemes the
programs superimpose results that were obtained for the participating loadings. Such

STATIKï5 Aï25
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

superpositions however are not permitted in nonlinear analyses as well as those obtai-
ned by second order theory.
In order nevertheless to obtain useful limit values for such cases, one has to consider
the following points:
S One has to limit oneself to a single action, so that in the limit state specification no
action combinations result,
S In the specification of the single action one may only use the superposition scheme
E1, that is only B1 OR B2 OR B3 ... , whereby the B1 may only be single loadings.
In order nevertheless to be able to work with the input loadings, the programs pro-
vide the combination loadings. Here the loadings are combined before the analysis
with the necessary factors to form a new loading, which is then equivalent to a nor-
mal loading (see Ch. A 2.4.3).

A 2.6.5 Limit State Specifications with Action Sets

Working with action sets is necessary or recommendable when all loading configura-
tions of an action cannot be obtained or only with a lot of effort using the superposition
scheme described above for action specifications. This case is certainly necessary for
the following example:

Excerpt from the dialo-

gue ’Actions’

The automatically generated action combina-

tions each consider the action set with the
two defined groups (lower dialogue)

In the case of a multi−span bridge, the action Road Traffic Loading with the condition
that it must be considered in the two above groups, could scarcely be specified without
dividing it into two separate sub−actions. This way of handling the problem also gives
a better overview, as one can follow more easily what has actually been done.

A 2.6.6 Automatic Generation of Action Combinations

Depending on the design situation and the limit state, for which a limit state specifica-
tion is foreseen, the action combinations can be automatically generated.

Aï26 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

They are formed according to the following scheme (code−dependent), whereby it is

assumed that an action is always defined in the same way as a leading action, as also
an accompanying action. The correctness of the hazard scenarios formed in this way
has always to be checked in each case by the engineer and if necessary adapted to the
actual requirements.

Eurocode/E-DIN:

Basic combination (without accidental loading):

Sd + ȍg G,j ƪ
@ G k,j ) gQ,1 Q k,1 ) ȍy
iu1
0,i ƫ
@ Qk,i () g p @ Pk)

Accidental action combination:

S d,A + ȍG k,j ) Ad ) y1,1 @ Q k,1 ) ȍy 2,i @ Q k,i() g p @ P k)

iu1

Gk : char. values of the permanent loads (actions dead load, surcharges)

Qk,1 ,Qk,i : char. value of the first or further varaiable actions
Pk : prestressing
Ad : design value of the accidental action
g G : partial factors for permanent actions (1.35 and 1.0)
g Q : partial factors for varaible actions
g P : partial factors for actions due to prestressing
y 0, y1, y 2 : combinationvalues for occasional, frequent and quasi−perm. actions.

SIA 260:

Standard design situation

E d + E(gGG k, gPP k , g Q1 Q kl , y0i Qki) (4.4.3.4)

g G : load factor for permanent actions

Gk : characteristic value of the permanent action
g P : load factor for prestressing actions
Pk : characteristic value of the prestressing action
g Q : load factors for variable actions
Qk : characteristic value of a variable action
y 0 : reduction factors for variable actions

Note: For a variable accompanying action y 0i Qki (the decisive one) is considered.

Accidental design situation

E d + E(G k, P k , A d, y2i Q ki) (4.4.3.5)

Ad : design value of the accidental action

y 2i : load factor for the accompanying action i

STATIKï5 Aï27
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7 Results

A 2.7.1 Load Case Results

For individual load cases or fixed combinations of load cases support reactions can
be obtained in the nodes together with displacements, section forces and section
results (e.g. edge stresses) in arbitrary member sections.

Reactions
In the case of completely fixed nodes for space frames there are 6 reaction quantities,
3 reaction forces and 3 fixed−end moments. In the case of plane frames there are 2 reac-
tion forces and 1 fixed−end moment. These are always defined in the nodal coordinate
system (see page A−14), which without any explicit specification corresponds to the
global coordinate system.
For the output of the sums of the reaction forces the forces are transformed into the
global system.

Displacements
For load cases and load case combinations two types of displacement results can be
requested. These are the displacements of the nodes, which are only produced in a
numerical form and member displacements, which can be output in any member sec-
tions and also presented graphically.
Nodal displacements: In the case of space frames for completely fixed nodes there
are 6 displacement quantities, 3 displacement components and 3 rotation components.
In the case of plane frames there are 2 displacement components and 1 rotation. These
are always defined in the nodal coordinate system (see page A−14), which without any
explicit specification corresponds to the global coordinate system. If one wishes to have
nodal displacement results in particular directions, then the nodal coordinate system
can be selected accordingly during the input of the structure. Normally, especially
because of graphical output, one would prefer to request member displacements.
Member displacements: These have the same components as the nodal displace-
ments, but in contrast to them, however, they are always output in the global coordinate
system and can be requested for any member section. In contrast to earlier program ver-
sions it is therefore no longer necessary to introduce a node everywhere where one
wants to have displacement results (say in the mid−point of a member). This also allows
the creation of correct displacement figures.

Section Forces
z
centre of gravity
Mz or axis point of
cross section
member start y
Vy
N
My T
Fig. Aï16 Section force definition Vz x

Section forces in space frames have the 6 components shown in LEERER MERKER. As
shown, they act positively on the section boundary. In the case of plane frames there
are 3 section forces, namely N, Vz, My.

Aï28 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Section forces are always defined in the member’s own local coordinate system (see page
A−9 ).

. In order to be able in each case to interpret the section forces correctly the user is reminded
that the member axis, i.e. the local x axis, can differ from the centre of gravity of the member
(if the cross section was provided with an axis point) and that the local y and z axes can differ
from the direction of the principal axes of the cross section (for unsymmetrical cross sections).

Cross Section Results / Edge Stresses

For a homogeneous cross section the following calculated strain and stress results can
be obtained:
S Strains and stresses at arbitrary points in the cross section. Besides the auto-
matically prescribed points shown in the figure below, arbitrary points can be
defined in the cross section. Results in points of the same name have their own col-
umn in the tabular output and can be presented graphically as well. Comparable
result points in different cross sections should therefore have the same names.

TL TA TR
Automatically generated
RP2 result points with their pre-
AL A AR scribed names
(A=Axis, T=Top, B=Bottom,
L=Left, R=Right )
RP1
BL BA BR Individually input result
points
Bounding rectangle Centre of gravity or axis
parallel to cross sec- point, respectively, of the
tion input axes cross section

. The automatically generated result points are always defined in the standard variant of a cross
section and therefore independent of the variant.
S Extreme strains or stresses in the cross section, provided it consists of just one
material, otherwise in the parts of the cross section with a particular material

Extreme stresses are output

for each partial section con-
concrete sisting of a particular material.

All possible polygon corner

points are investigated. The
steel decisive point can change
from section to section and is
not output.

A 2.7.2 Influence Lines

Influence lines are results of influence line load cases (see Ch. A 2.4.4).

To output an influence line the type of moving load still has to be input. One can select
local or global forces or moments in a desired coordinate direction.

STATIKï5 Aï29
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7.3 Construction Stages

STATIK-5 permits the combination of results, which were calculated in different con-
struction stages of a structure, i.e. each load case can be applied for a specific construc-
tion stage and its results can be combined at the end with those of any other load cases.
The structures of the individual construction stages can differ in the following prop-
erties:
S Support conditions
S Nodal connections
S Hinges
S Cross section variants
S Members can be active or passive, but have to be designed accordingly at the begin-
ning

. To work with construction stages a special program option is required.

Aï30 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.1 Introduction
After two short sections dealing with starting the program and opening a new analysis
some examples are provided, which introduce you to the main aspects of the use of
the program. The examples are ordered according to increasing complexity or according
to specially treated topics and are partly developed one from another. Since all users
do not have the 3D option, firstly the examples for plane frames are dealt with and then
those for 3D structures.
It is absolutely necessary that you work through these examples which are intended
as an introduction, before you attempt real projects. You will then be familiar with the
logic of the program and for further details on the use of the program you can always
consult the Help System of STATIK-5, whose frequent use we highly recommend. It
can be called in different ways:
S By clicking on the menu Help" in the menu bar of the program. A list of all available
help documents appears, which one can go into directly. One of these is called Use
of Help". It provides instructions on the use of the help system.
S By pressing the key <F1> you can get specific help on the current action (e.g. input-
ting a point) or on the input element to which the mouse pointer currently points.
S Many of the dialogue windows that appear during the input have their own help
button for information on the corresponding dialogue.

It is assumed that the user has some basic knowledge of the use of the Windows operat-
ing system. This includes the use of the mouse, windows (move, zoom in and out), the
Start" menu, task bar, the clipboard and the Windows-Explorer.
. As in Windows, in general one always works with the left mouse button. Clicking or selecting
a symbol on the screen means: move the mouse pointer onto the symbol and then press briefly
the left mouse button. The right mouse button is only to bring up a context menu to the screen
(see later) in a particular situation.
A detailed description of the Graphics Editor as well as of the CubusViewer is given in
Parts D and C of this manual.

A 3.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples

For all application examples the following presentation conventions hold:

S All actions to be carried out are indented and marked as follows:
" Description of action
S All bold print in the description of an action has to be typed exactly with the follow-
ing exceptions.
S Special keys enclosed in <..> (e.g. <Enter>=<o>, <Esc>, <F1>, etc.)
S The mouse buttons are abbreviated with <LMB> and <RMB> (left and right)
S Buttons on the screen are shown in square brackets (e.g. [Cancel])
S Words in italics like Click, Select, ... are clearly predefined user actions
S An entry to be chosen in a menu is given within apostrophes, separated for multi−
selection by ’>’ (e.g. ’Options’ > ’Language’ > ’German’)

A 3.1.2 Load Examples

The examples described below are stored in your program installation and can be
viewed and loaded using the help system. This applies especially also to examples that

STATIKï5 Aï31
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

are not developed again from scratch, but serve as an initial situation for modifications
and extensions.

When editing a loaded example not the original, but an automatically created copy in
the TEMP folder of Windows is used. The original data therefore cannot be lost and you
can load an example as often as you like.

Loading an example is done as follows:

" Start STATIK-5 directly, as decribed under 1) in the next

chapter and from the menu bar of the program select:
’Help’ > ’Load Examples’ > Name of an example

A 3.2 Starting Program

STATIK−5 can be started in two ways:

1) Starting STATIK-5 2) Starting the Cubus-Explorer

STATIK-5 Cubus-Explorer
In the File" menu: If required introduce a new STA-
choose a recent analysis or call TIK-5-analysis.Open it or an
the Cubus-Explorer existing analysis for editing.

Fig. Aï1 Starting Program

1) By direct execution of the program file STATIK4.EXE, e.g. via the ’Start’ menu of Win-
dows (for standard installation: [Start] > Programs > Cubus > STATIK-5). STATIK-5
responds with an empty window and the following menu-
bar:

Starting in this way is recommended above all if you want to continue editing one
of the recent analyses (these are listed in the ’File’ menu).
2) Using the CubusExplorer. The CubusExplorer is an independent program to manage
analysis with different Cubus programs and is also called via the start menu of Win-
dows. Procedure 2) is described in the next chapter.

Aï32 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.3 Opening an Analysis

Start the CubusExplorer using the Windows start menu. If you are doing this for the first
time, then it will respond as shown left. Click on the ’+’ beside ’My Computer’ and the
response will be as shown on the right.

The CubusExplorer is very similar to the Windows Explorer. The difference is, above
all, that in the left window only those directories are shown that you want and these
are normally those which contain analysis data of Cubus programs. For a detailed
description of the CubusExplorer refer to its ’Help’ menu.
For our examples we want to create a folder called ST4Data"on a harddisk (here D:),
in which we can save our analyses. Basically, you have complete freedom in storing a
folder structure to manage your project and at any time you can reorganise and rename
or move folders.
Click first on the symbol of the desired harddisk and then on the symbol to create folders
and make them visible.
The window that appears shows the direc-
tory structure of the selected harddisk.
You can now select one of the shown
folders or subfolders and using the button
[Select] cause this to be shown in the
CubusExplorer.
However, we want to create a new folder
and select for this purpose the object
(harddisk or folder), where the new folder
should reside - in our case the harddisk
symbol D:. To create a new folder we click

on top right.

A new folder appears at the desired level, which we rename as ST4Data" and then with
the button [Select] we place it in the CubusExplorer.
Back in the CubusExplorer in the display filter you should activate the button for STA-
TIK−5. With the filter setting shown below in the middle window of the CubusExplorer
only STATIK-5 analyses are shown.

STATIKï5 Aï33
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now select the newly created folder and then click

on the button shown on the left to create a new
analysis. Directly below the button there appears
a row of buttons for all installed Cubus-Programs.
Select the symbol for STATIK-5, wherupon in the
middle window of the CubusExplorer a new analy-
sis entry with the standard name ST4-analysis"
appears. Since the name of the new analysis is
already highlighted, you can rename it directly by
typing in an appropriate and descriptive name.
Thus you have now created the analysis folder, and
you can start STATIK-5 with the button [Edit] bot-
tom right in the CubusExplorer.

After opeining a new analysis the dialogue window Analysis Settings", appears which
allows one to set some analysis−specific parameters, above all the text parts, which
appear in the page headers of the printed output as well as the choice of code and the
material types used for concrete and reinforcing steel. Regarding details the help system
provides the necessary information.

Further, after opening a new analysis there is the possibility of importing input data from
a STATIK-3 analysis or a DXF file. For this purpose use Import" in the ’File’ menu.

Aï34 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4 Example1: Portal frame

A 3.4.1 Task

2 8
HEA280
steel
5 kN/m (specified
class)

uprights (col-
umns):
4.6 rectangular cross
section
b x h=0.2 x 0.35
concrete (speci-
fied class)
16 m

Results: - section forces, reactions, bending deflections

edge stresses

Aim: To become acquainted with the general procedure in an analysis. This is

basically the same for more complex analyses.

" Start the program (according to Ch. A 3.2) and open

(according to Ch. A 3.3) a new analysis with the name Ex.

First comes a small dialogue (abbreviation for dialogue window) to describe the analy-
sis. The contents appear partly in the page header of the printed output. The descriptive
text is for the purpose of archiving.

" Fill in the dialogue according to the figure and then click
on [OK].

STATIKï5 Aï35
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now the STATIK-5 window looks as follows:

buttons for tab sheet ’Structure’ as menu bar

printing part of the tab control
print entry
CubusViewer
buttons for
individual Layers

buttons for
graphical edi- layer groups
tor commands

working surface

Undo / Redo

coordinate fields status line

A 3.4.2 Member Input

Now we input the frame structure according to the given task and begin with the left
column.

" Click on the button for the ’Member’ dialogue in the tab
sheet ’Structure’.

The ’Member’ dialogue shown below now appears, in which all properties of the
member to be input have been set. For the sake of clarity these properties have been
spread over several tab sheets, whereby the cross section (CS) as the most important
property (specification always required!) is found on the first tab sheet. Additional prop-
erties can be specified in the other tab sheets.

Aï36 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

tab sheets for special

properties
close dialogue

material selection
specification of (with rolled steel
cross section sections)

selected cross sec- to select cross sec-

tion tions that have already
either been defined or
used in the current
analysis

diagram of selected
cross section

search for members

with specific properties

to create a member
with the set properties gives help on dialogue

In this example we now set the properties only for the cross sections. We leave everyth-
ing else as shown.

With the above combo box a cross section can be selected out of all perviously defined
cross sections. For the definition of a new cross section use the button to the left.
Since we have not defined any cross sections so far, we begin with the CS for the col-
umns:
" Click on this button for the definition of a new cross sec-
tion. Now the dialogue ’Choice of cross section’ appears.
" Change to the register ’cross section library’ which is
used to input user-defined cross sections.

create new parametrized CS

create new FAGUS-CS
edit selected CS
print entry for selected CS
delete selected CS
import CS from other calculations
start the program FAGUS (cross section
editor)

In STATIK-5 there are two different types of user-defined CS: Parametrized CS and
FAGUS-CS. For the most often used regular geometries (e.g. rectangular, T,I and O
shapes) there are predefined parametrized CS avaiable. For irregular shapes or compos-

STATIKï5 Aï37
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

ite sections you can graphically input general CS with the program FAGUS-5. The later
cross sections are called FAGUS−CS.

For the cross section of the column we choose the paramatrized rectangle:

" Click on the button to the left in oder to defined a new

parametrized CS.

" Choose the tab sheet ’Solid’ in the appearing dialog, click
on the icon with the rectangular CS, specify the appro-
preate parameters (see below) and press [OK].

The dialogue ’choice of cross section’ now present the CS list with the newly defined
cross section selected:

" Click on [OK] and the name of the selected CS is assigned to

the CS combo box in the member dialogue:

Aï38 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue, in order to

input the left column member.
The mouse pointer now takes on the form shown on the left and indicates that a point
has to be input. One of the point input methods is to type in its coordinates. We take
the bottom left of the frame as the origin of the X,Z coordinate system, in which X points
to the right and Z upwards.
" Type 0 <o> 0 <o> for the start point
" and 0 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
We input immediately afterwards the second column, which has the same cross section:
" Click again on [Create] and type
16 <o> 0 <o> for the start point and
16 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
For the horizontal member specify a different cross section:
" Click on this button to open the ’choice of CS’ dialog and
change to the tab sheet ’hotrolled profiles’. Here select
the profile ’HEA200’:

Below the tree of the profiles you find (depending on its type) buttons for the rotation
of the profile. Try it out and watch! In contrast to the member orientation specified in
the member dialog, the local coordinate system of the member is not affected by these
rotations (see also context help for the dialog) i.e. the local z−axis remains horizontal.
The selected steel section is shown on the right. The labelled points ’TL’, TA’, ... are
places in which cross section results (e.g. edge stresses) can be obtained.
" Click on [OK], to confirm the selection and to close the
dialog.
" [Create] in the still active ’Member’ dialogue.
To input the member we now grab the existing points of the tops of the columns. The
procedure is explained in the following box.

Box: Point input by snapping

" Select for the start point of the member the top of the left
column and for the end point the corresponding one on
the right

STATIKï5 Aï39
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Point input by snapping (= Select) is done by moving the mouse pointer near to the point to
be snapped until on the upper left of the mouse pointer a small circle is shown; by clicking on
the nearest point to the cross it is snapped.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue ([x] upper right)

The input of member as a geometrical structure is now completed.

A 3.4.3 Userïdefined Cross Sections

In order in the input to assign the members to the given cross sections, they have to
be defined beforehand if they are not taken from the library of rolled steel sections. For
our example we need a rectangular cross section for the columns.
" Click on the button for the input and edit user−defined
cross sections (left in the ’Structure’ tab sheet );the fol-
lowing dialogue appears:
general cross sections parametricised cross sections

buttons to create cross

sections

list of the defined cross sections

" Select the button for a rectangular cross section; call it

RColumn and set the parameter fields for width and
height as required (0.20 x 0.35 m)
" Since no further cross sections have to be defined, click
on [Close] in the dialogue and confirm the change in
cross section

A 3.4.4 Node Input

. Nodes only have to be input if they have special properties like supports, rotated coordinates,
etc..
For the complete structure it only remains to specify the supports. For the most common
support types there are buttons in the ’Structure’ tab sheet, with whose help nodes can
be introduced directly having the corresponding support conditions. For arbitrary sup-
ports (e.g. with springs) and other nodal properties use the ’Node’ dialogue (button
directly beside that for members).
" Click on the button shown for a freely rotational, fixed
displacement (i.e. pin−joint or hinged) support
" Select the bottom of the left column
" Click on the button for a fixed support
" Select the bottom of the right column
If the now completely input structure is not properly centred in the STATIK-5 window

Aï40 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the button shown (Graphics Editor tool on the

left edge of the screen)

Box: Selection of figure detail

Note the button group shown to select the figure detail

draw new filling on/off
zoom out Move figure detail:
zoom in
Hold the <Ctrl>-key depressed and drag the detail with
detail with win- previous detail the left mouse buttonto the desired position.
dow
centre and fill-
ing . Further information on context help (<F1> using one of
the buttons shown)

Box: Undo/Redo

If you have made an incorrect input or several in succession, this is no problem:

With the Undo function (on left edge of window) you can undo stepwise as many changes to graphics objects as
you like (provided the button is active) . Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Z>
With the Redo function changes made using the Undo function can be reversed. Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Y>

STATIKï5 Aï41
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.5 Load Input

" In the tab control change to ’Loads’

If you enter the tabsheet ’Loads’ with no load cases defined yet, a load case for the dead
loads of the whole member structure is generated automatically. If you don’t need this
load case you may delete it as we will do for our example.
" Click on the button shown in order to delete the prede-
fined load case ’EG’
5 kN/m " Click on the button to create a new load case
" Leave unchanged the dialogue that appears and close it
with [OK]

The Load Case Identifier identifies the load case (corresponds to the load case number
in earlier program versions). The Title is purely for descriptive purposes. The correct
Assignment to an Action permits, for simple cases, an automatic creation of design
load specifications.
" Click on the button for constant line loads, and set the
dialogue as shown:

. Since the Z axis points upwards, loads usually have to be input with a negative sign.

Aï42 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create]

The program expects the input of the start and end points of the line load.

" Type 2 <o> 4.6 <o> for the start point and

. It is suggested to input the end point of the load not in absolute coordinates but relative to the
start point. For this purpose we have Relative Input, which you can activate with the key <R>.
Thus the following pair of coordinates is with reference to the start point.

" R8 <o> 0 <o> for the end point

" Close the dialogue

" Click on this button in the ’Loads’ tab sheet, to obtain a

reasonable scale factor for the load display

The input is now complete. The structure should now appear on your screen as shown
below:

How to document a structure with text and figures you will find out in the next example.

STATIKï5 Aï43
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.6 Results

The linear solution of the given load cases is performed automatically. You can begin
viewing the results immediately.

" In the tab control change to ’Results’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Results can be called in portions in any order, whereby the settings in the ’Results’ tab
sheet are worked through sequentially from left to right (Points 1..6) and then the button
(7) for the creation of the required results is pressed:

1 By clicking on the arrow key beside this combo box a hierarchical list with all load cases
appears, with all existing load case combinations, limit state specifications and any addi-
tional specified special analyses. In our example there is nothing to select, since we have
only input one load case.

2 Depending on the setting in (1) here the available output quantities can be selected.
Here, besides the displacements, there are the reactions, section forces and cross section
results.

3 Select here the type of output. Normally the two buttons shown for graphical and
numerical output can be selected.

4 If the output quantity consists of several components (e.g. in the case of section forces),
and if these are not all output together, here the possible components to be selected
are available.

5 For results that are output in member sections a section specification is required. There
is a quick specification valid for all members (left button), by which either the number
of steps per member or a maximum section spacing is specified and an individual sec-
tion specification for design purposes (middle button). By clicking on the right button
the settings for the selected specification type are executed.

. The section specification is used both for the tabular and for the graphical output. For better
quality graphics a specification with a finer section distribution has to be selected.

. For the quick specification, depending on the output quantity, additional sections are auto-
matically created appropriate to the existing loads. For a concentrated load for instance a
discontinuity in the shear force occurs exactly where the load acts.

6 Depending on the settings in the areas (1)..(5) there are other presentation parameters
(e.g. amount of labelling or scale factor for graphics), which can be set in the dialogue
for this button.

With this button the creation and display of the results is started according to the settings
in the areas (1)..(6).

" Try to output all possible results by varying the settings

for the one load case.

Aï44 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Here is a selection of results. The printing of results is discussed in the next example.

My

Vz

extremal stress

STATIKï5 Aï45
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5 Example 2: Framed Lattice Girder

A 3.5.1 Task

1.6

1.2

RHS120/80/6 HEB160
4.6

HEB300

16 m

Load cases: [kN/m]

dead load weight of roof snow left wind left
snow right wind right
dead load
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

oder

Results: - Results for user−defined load case combinations

- Limit state values of different quantities for structural safety verification

Aims: − Basic knowledge of Graphics Editor

− Load input, load case combinations
− Documentation/printing
− Subsystems, limit value results
Special: The frame input in Example 1 serves as a starting point

" Start STATIK-5 directly and open the stored Example 1

with the help command in the menu bar: ’Help’ > ’Load
Examples’ > ’Example 1 (A 3.4)’
In contrast to Example 1, in which only new objects were input, here we also want to
modify existing objects. This is accomplished for all objects following the same so−
called object−orientated procedure:

Box: Object−orientied working procedure

You select the desired object(s), then press the right mouse button to get the context menu showing the functions
that are possible with all the selected objects.
. If you can’t find a function in the context menu, then it may be that you
have also selected objects that don’t go with this function!
Selecting objects is important. Besides clicking with the mouse or opening a window there are some other very useful
selection methods and information to select, which are essential to know about. Therefore read now Chapter B5.2.

This button top left in the STATIK-5 window also makes available more advanced member selection methods.
More about these later in the example.

Aï46 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.2 Modification and Extension of the Member

First we want to adapt the cross sections of the existing members to the new task.
" Select the two column members.

. In order to select by clicking several objects one after another, you have to keep the <Shift>
key pressed, as otherwise with every mouse click previous selections are lost. The quickest
method to use here is opening a window from right to left over the two columns.
" Press the right mouse button (<RMB>)

" Select from the context menu ’Properties’ (top line):

. If another menu appears, you have not selected any object. If ’Properties’ disappears, i.e. is
not available, you have (probably when opening the window) also selected other alien objects.
Click in this case in any empty space, to deselect everything, and begin the selection from
scratch again.

The ’Member’ dialogue appears now, in which the cross section of Example 1 is still set
to HEA280.

" Click on the button to open the CS definition dialog. In

the hotrolled profile tress select ’HEB300’ and press
[OK].
" Click on ’Apply’ (bottom of the ’Member’ dialogue)

. The button [Apply] becomes active, as soon as you change anything in the dialogue. The
number in brackets following ’Apply’ is very helpful. It shows how many objects are selected
(even before the button is active), i.e. to how many objects the changes apply.

Box: Changing the properties of objects

− select an object or several similar objects,

− press the right mouse button
− select from the context menu the line ’Properties’
− in the dialogue that appears change the desired property(-ies)
− click on the button [Apply]

" Change in the same way the cross section name of the
horizontal member to ’HEB160’

Now the new members have to be added. First we input the bottom chord. In order to
learn a new possibility of the Graphics Editor we want to create it by duplicating the
top chord.
" Select the top chord

" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’

The ’Duplicate’ dialogue offers several possibilities for the single or multiple duplication
of objects. For a complete explanation click on the help button [?] of the dialogue.
" Set the dialogue as shown

. With the arrow button in the dialogue one can pick up distances with the mouse, which how-
ever is not yet possible here.

STATIKï5 Aï47
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Preview], and you can see beforehand, how the
program duplicates using you settings.

" If the preview shows what you want select [OK]

Now come the lattice members. We input the first diagonal member, then the neighbour-
ing diagonal. The others can then be generated by duplicating and mirroring (creating
a mirror image).

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select the cross section ’RHS120/80/6’

" [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select as start point of the diagonal member the upper

left end of the column

" Type in (relative input) R1.6<o> −1.2<o>

Box: Relative input of coordinates

Often it is easier to work with relative rather than absolute coordinates. Type in<R> before typing the coordinates
of a point, so that the values do not refer to the origin of the coodinate system, but to the so−called relative point.
The relative point is shown by a small red triangle.Before typing in the coordinate values it can be moved to any exist-
ing point by clicking on it. As default value the program always chooses the last point to be input.

" Once more [Create] for the neighbouring vertical

member with the same cross section.

" As start point select the bottom end point of the diagonal
member.
To construct the the end point their are various possibilities which are shown by the
context menu:

" <RMB> brings up the context menu

The available methods are self−explanatory from the name. For details query the help
system, by moving to the line to be queried and then pressing <F1>. Go quickly through
the list so that you know more or less what possibilities are available. In our case we

Aï48 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

use ’Move mouse in Z direction’. As soon as you gain experience with the Graphics Edi-
tor you will not need the context menu every time but use the short cut directly (key
<Z> ). Such a short cut you know already from the relative input method.
" Select ’Move mouse in Z direction’
You can still move the mouse pointer over the whole working surface. Next to it there
is a fixed mouse pointer, shown as a small black triangle, which can only move in the
Z direction. It shows the position at which a point is introduced by clicking.
symbol for snapping " Move towards the top chord until on the mouse pointer
line
the symbol for snapping to a line is shown (figure), and
then click.
fixedmouse
pointer mouse pointer (cross−
hair)

The left half of the lattice we can now generate by duplicating the first two members
four times:
A B " Select the two members just input (open window from
right to left, as shown).
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’
" Click on this button in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue and grab
the ’Displacement Vector ’ by clicking on the points A and
B.
" Set the number of duplicates to 4
" If the [Preview] is as wanted select [OK]
Since the lattice girder is symmetrical, we can generate the remaining members by mir-
roring:
A " Select all lattice members except that on the axis of sym-
metry, which we will still have to create (open window
B
from right to left within horizontal members)
" <RMB>
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and select from the con-
text menu ’Mirror’ (with <Shift>, so that the original is
not lost when mirroring)
" Click on the points A and B in order to define the axis of
symmetry.
. If no member exists on the desired axis of symmetry, one can be introduced beforehand for this
purpose and deleted afterwards. Any line, even an auxiliary line (see later) can be used as an
axis of symmetry.

STATIKï5 Aï49
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.3 Modification of the Right Support

Whereas the support at the bottom of the column in the first example was fully fixed,
now we want to change it to a pinned support. We could simply delete it (Select,
<Delete>) and create a new one, but we also want to practise the procedure for chang-
ing an object property for a node:

" Select the right support

" <RMB> > ’Attributes’

" Click on the button with the corresponding support type;

then on [Apply] and close the dialogue

With this the input of the structure is finished. Although the program saves data in select-
able intervals, we want now explicitly to make a save, not to lose what has been input.

" Click on the button to save the current state (safety

measure, not absolutely necessary)

We then want to make a complete documentation of the structure, but firstly however
show a very important box on inputting nodes and members:

Aï50 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Box: On inputting nodes and members

Crossing or touching members , if not otherwise specifically required in their attributes, are merged in the points
at which they cross or touch.
There is, mainly for numerical reasons, a minimum member length lmin. This minimum length also applies to elements
of members,which arise as a result of intersection or any other subdivision of the input members. The length lmin can
be adjusted in the menu ’Options >Settings>Tolerances’ if necessary. In view of numerical problems, however, care
should be exercised in this. Even the default settings of the program cannot guarantee numerical stability for all poss-
ible structures. If there are numerical problems the solution module issues a corresponding warning.

Points which lie on top of one another due to rounding errors in the different types of input are not necessarily identical
with respect to their coordinates. There is a tolerance value dtol for the distance between two points, which specifies
whether the points should be regarded as coinciding. This tolerance value too can be changed in the menu ’Options
> Settings’ if one exercises the necessary care.
The same tolerance value dtol also holds for points (nodes or member end points) on members. If the distance of the
point from a member is smaller than dtol,the point lies on the member.
Finally, in the case of space frames dtol is also used by the program to establish if two members intersect in space. For
this to be the case their spacing has to be less than dtol.

A 3.5.4 Documentation of the Structure

An important part of a statical analysis is the complete documentation of the input data.
For our example we want to carry out here the following steps to document the struc-
ture’s data:
S Augment the view of the structure by introducing dimensions as in the task descrip-
tion
S Set the desired content of the figure with the help of the layer button
S Include in the printing list a figure of the structure
S Create a text legend with all structural data and enter it in the printing list
S Call the CubusViewer to have a print preview, to set possible presentation para-
meters and print

Structure Dimensions

On the right edge of the STATIK-5 window is the layer bar. Structural objects of the same
type are drawn in layers, which is also a well known feature of CAD systems. By clicking
on the layer buttons the corresponding layers can be made visible or invisible. Further
details are given below.
If for printing purposes you want to augment the figure with information like dimension
lines or additional labelling, one can use the layer group User", in which the button
for the first user layer is already provided. You can also distribute the additions to the
drawing over different layers, by creating any number of additional user layers using
the context menu of the group header User".
Sometimes it happens that points which one wants to input have to be constructed using
auxiliary Help Points and Help Lines. Such constructions are also carried out in user
layers. Here constructed points can be grabbed during the input of structure objects.
To be able to draw in a user layer, it first has to be made the active layer (do not confuse
this with making a layer visible):
" <RMB> on the button of the existing user layer and then
in the context menu on the line ’active’
Now all drawing tools of the Graphics Editor are active.

STATIKï5 Aï51
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the dimensioning tool

" Fix the direction of the dimension line by selecting the
top or bottom chords

" Click on a position through which the dimension line

should pass (a little distance below the support)

" Click now in sequence on the points that you want to

include in this dimension line, i.e. here on both support
points

" Close the dimension line with <Esc>

" Proceed in the same manner for the three remaining

dimensioning lines in the task description

Try here also the other drawing tools and delete the corresponding ’creations’ using
Undo.

Select Figure Contents with Layer Buttons

As mentioned above, the figure contents can be specified as desired by making the
corresponding layer buttons visible or invisible. Try out the settings and
" Select at the end the settings shown on the left.

Note also the context menus both for the group buttons (structure, surfaces, ...) and
for the layer button buttons (<RMB> click). If you want to know more about the individ-
ual menu items then make use of the help system (<F1> on the corresponding line).

. The program takes care of storing in the corresponding layer for the non-user objects (nodes,
members, loads, results, etc.). Only in the user layers does the user explicitly need to make
the layer active, in which he wants to draw. This is done in the context menu of the correspon-
ding layer. Only one layer can be active at any one time. As soon as one begins to work again
with structural objects, any active user layers are automatically deactivated.
The creation of further user layers is done in the context menu of the group button ’User’.

Enter Figure in Print List

The contents of the graphics area can be sent directly to the printer at any time (left but-
ton) or using the right button entered in the output list for later printing. If one clicks
one of these buttons a dialogue appears, which among other things gives the option,
whether a figure should be created with the complete contents of the graphics area or
with only a part of it. For details on the ’Print entry’ dialogue use its help button.
Here we want to enter a figure of the whole structure:

" Click on the button for a print entry and then on [OK] in
the unchanged ’Print entry’ dialogue

" Turn off the visibility of the dimensioning layers again

Aï52 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Creation of a Structure Legend with Print Entry

" Click on the button for checking the structure (is pre-
requisite for creating a structure legend)

" Click on the button to create a structure legend (top right

in the ’Structure’ tab sheet )

The structure legend, as all text output, is created in a separate window, which looks
as follows:
Buttons for
− printing directely
− craeting a print entry
− copying all tables to
the clipboard
− copying selection
to theclipboard
− searching
− print preview mode
− table attributes
(1) combo box of leg-
ends (here only one)

(2) List of the tables in

the legends selected
under (1) (only those
checked are printed/
entered)

Table selected under

(2)

One can only navigate in this document, as described in the legend of the figure. In the
normal case it contains a legend with one or more tables, as is also the case here.

" Click on the button for the print entry

" Close the text window([x]-button top right)

STATIKï5 Aï53
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Print Preview and Printing with the CubusViewer

Up to now we have only created two print entries, one with the structure figure and
one with the structure legend and now we want to call the CubusViewer, to see how
printing is prepared and how one prints.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
The CubusViewer appears in a separate window and should look approximately as in
the following figure, in which you can also see its most important functions. A detailed
description of the CubusViewer can be found in its ’Help’ menu as well as in Part C of
this manual.
In the menu ’File’ amongst
other things the printer can
be selected
Printing the active entries

Activate / deactivate entries

(presentation and printing)

Page set−up (size, page

header, ...)

Zoom functions for preview

For quick editing of a long

entry list or large files:
− deactivate filling
− deactivate preview
− show figures with reduced
contents

Window with list of print

entries (supports the mov-
ing of lines with the <LMB>
(drag & drop)

Window with preview of

current print entries

Editing the entries in the window with the list is done using the menu ’Entries’ in the
menu bar or using the context menu for the entries shown below. Select one or more
entries and with the <RMB> then call the context menu:
Context menu of the entries:

The menu ’Entries’ still has in addition

(or exclusively, if no entry is selected):

Note the possibility of changing the scale of figures.

" Print the two entries and then close the CubusViewer

Aï54 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.5 Load Input

According to the task description the following 5 load cases have to be input:

Dead load Roof load Snow left Wind left

Snow right Wind right
Dead load of
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

or

Load values in[kN/

m]

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" First we want to delete any existing load cases. Click on

the delete button shown (several times if necessary).

Dead load of Load Case ’Dead Load’

frame structure
" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Fill in the dialogue as follows, then [OK]:

In contrast to Example 1 we set the option field ’For action’ correspondingly for each
load case, which will allow the program to create automatically a limit state specification
(see later).

" Select the button for acceleration loads

. For the automatic generation of body forces, like dead load or statically equivalent earth-
quake loads, accelerations are input. On the basis of the mass/length unit of the member, which
is known for each cross section (also for composite cross sections), STATIK-5 can generate
the corresponding loads.
For the most frequent case of dead load there is a special option field in the dialogue for
acceleration loads, for which an acceleration of +10m/s 2 is given by default. If you would prefer
to use 9.81 or another value, you can change the value accordingly and then save the dialogue
as default for further projects (in the menu bar: ’Options’ > ’Dialogue Settings’ > ’Save as
Default’).
This type of storing functions with most dialogues and can also be carried out directly with
<Ctrl><F9>.

STATIKï5 Aï55
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue for acceleration loads according to the

following graphics

" [Create]

The presentation of the load thus created is in the form of a circular labelling box.

20 Load Case ’Roof Load’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input RL as identifier and Roof Load as title and assign

the load case to the action ’Superimposed DL’ (DL=dead
load).

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −20

" Select the top chord and then click in the dialogue on the
button [Create in Selected]

" Close the dialogue and adjust the scale factor with the
dialogue field shown

16 16
Load Cases ’Snow Load Left and Right’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input SnowL as identifier and Snow Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Snow’

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −16

" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting its starting point at the
left end of the top chord and its end point at the top of
the middle vertical member

" Input the load case ’Snow Load Right’ in the same way

Aï56 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

4..10 4..10 Load Cases ’Wind Load Left and Right’

oder
The most important difference to the snow loads is that the wind load cases are exclus-
ive, i.e. that they cannot occur simultaneously. This is taken into account in that in the
’Load case’ dialogue the control field ’Load case exclusive’ is set.

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input WindL as identifier and Wind Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Wind’. Activate
the control field ’Load case exclusive’:

" Select the button for trapezoidal loads

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’X’ and the load
values to 4 and 10
" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting the bottom and top end
points of the left column

" Input the load case ’Wind Load Right’ in the same way

Box: General hints on inputting loads

Point and line loads are stand−alone objects, which have no direct connection to nodes and members and there-
fore− at least during the input − can also" hang" freely in space. The connection of loads to the structure is carried
out by the program purely geometrically when a load case is checked ( automatically carried out during the
solution). For loads which on checking do not lie exactly" on members or nodes an error message is issued.

Line load Point load

representation

d
start point input load end input of load
of load line line point of point
load line

The load line has to lie exactly on a member axis (or several axes in series), to be accepted when checking is carried
out.
The decisive load line for the point of load application as well as its end points are only visible when the load is
selected.
The spacing for the load representation can be set in the load attributes.
In the same way the load point of a point load has to lie on the member axis or a node, to be accepted when checking
is carried out.

STATIKï5 Aï57
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Documentation of the Load Input

We also want to document the load input using figures and text.
" Select in the list box ’Load Case’ a number of load cases
one after another and make for each one a print entry
" Click on this button in the Load Case tabsheet, to open
the dialogue with the load case list:

This list shows all input load cases with their most important attributes. It also contains
buttons for creating a new load case, for modifying the properties of an existing load
case, for deleting selected load cases, for selecting all empty load cases and for creating
a legend of all existing load cases.
With this button you create a print entry with the list of all load cases (what you see
in the dialogue shown above)
" Select all load cases with <Ctrl>A
" With this button you can create a legend for all selected
load cases
" Examine the result and then make a print entry
" Close the legend window and also the dialogue with the
load case list
We now want to reduce the scale of the load figures in the CubusViewer, since otherwise
these, based on the size of their content, would be much too big when printed.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
" Select an entry with a load case figure, with <RMB> call
the context menu and select there ’Scale’

The pre−setting is on ’Full Page’, which for this figure would give a scale of 1:112. We
want to print the figures with only about half this size.
" Close the ’Scale’ dialogue,
select all load case figures in the list and
with <RMB> call the context menu

Aï58 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set to ’Preset Value’ and in the input field type the value
200, then [OK]

You can see now in the preview that the figures have been drawn correspondingly
smaller.

If we now want to print all entries which concern the load case documentation, then
we have to deactivate the first two entries in the documentation of the structure. Nor-
mally one would print everything together at the end.

" Deactivate the first two entries in the structure docu-

mentation

" Print the active entries

Box: Extended member selection

Besides the general method of selection of the Graphics Editor in STATIK-5 there are also specific selection aids for
members.
With this button (top left in STATIK-5 window) a menu appears with a number of special selection possibilities
for members.
Move the mouse over it and press <F1> for a description.

A 3.5.6 Subsystems

Subsystems (abbreviated in the following to SS) allow one to limit the visibility of the
members and nodes to selected structural parts. As many SS can be defined as desired,
whereby a structure element can belong to several SS. SS do not have any effect on the
statical system, which always comprises the whole structure.

With large systems having hundreds of members, working without the aid of SS is
unthinkable. But also with small systems, as in our example, SS can be very useful for
the output of results.

The definition of the SS can be done at any time and can also be extended and modified
at any time. Normally the SS are defined during the input of the structure, since they
can be very useful there and especially in the input of the load.

We want to introduce the following SS here:

S Columns
S Upper chord
S Lower chord
S Verticals
S Diagonals

STATIKï5 Aï59
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Go into the ’Structure’ tab sheet and click on the button
to define subsystems (top left in the STATIK-5 window)

An SS with all nodes and members not yet assigned to an SS is defined and maintained
by the program automatically. We introduce the partial system ’Columns’:
" Select the button for a new SS

" Fill in the dialogue as shown and then select the two col-
umns
" Click on [+]
The objects belonging to this SS are shown in blue. By selecting new members/nodes
and then clicking on [+] or [−] any objects can be added or removed. In this way existing
SS can also be modified (select desired SS in the dialogue ’Management of Subsystems’
and then [Edit]).
" [OK] to close the SS definition
" Define in the same way the subsystems ’Top Chord’ and
’Bottom Chord’
To define the strut SS we want to become familiar with a new type of member selection.
We begin with the verticals:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Vertical
Members’
" Click on the button for special member selection
" and then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a vertical member
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and click on both col-
umns to deselect them
" Click on [+] and then on [OK]
For the diagonals we proceed in a similar way:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Diagonal
Members’

Aï60 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction

" Click on the first diagonal on the left, to select all

members with this direction and then on [+].

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a diagonal with the other direction, then on [+]
and [OK]

Now the SS has been defined. We want to see a partial view with the top chord and the
columns:

" Activate both SS in the ’SS management’ dialogue and

then [OK]

With this button one can switch at any time between the overall view and the SS view.
In order to change the SS settings, call the ’SS management’ dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï61
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.7 Standard Results

As in Example 1 you can now change to the tab sheet ’Results’ and view all possible
results for all load cases. Besides the load cases you will also find limit value results.
Before asking how this has come about, we want to try out the procedure to view the
results.
" Select the ’Results’ tab sheet and set the combo box
’Results for’ to ’!Ultimate (ULS)’

" Set the rest in the tab sheet, as shown:

" Let the result be calculated and shown

Because of overlapping figures the graphical presentation of results for all members is
sometimes not very helpful. How to overcome this problem is discussed below.
For a calculated envelope result (i.e. design limit state) there are comprehensive inter-
mediate results and, depending on the result type, alo associated components. All of
these values are grouped together in a separate result dialogue, which is opened by
clicking on the button to the left:

E.g. here’s how to check the contribution of the dead load for a calculated envelope
of normal forces:
" Click this button to open the Envelope Value dialogue.
" Open ’Actions’ in the tree and choose the entry ’!T_Dead-
Load N’
" Start the figure generation for the chosen result (i.e. nor-
mal forces due to dead load)
. The Envelope Value dialogue remains open as long as you don’t close it or don’t change set-
tings for the result calculation, which are incompatible to the results in the dialogue. E.g. if
you change the envelope type, the dialogue will automatically be closed and the correspon-
ding button disabled until the new envelope result has been calculated.

Aï62 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Choose ’Envelope values N’ on the top line and let the
program display these results again.
The displayed figure showing the normal force limit values is rather useless, since
everything is drawn one on top of the other. STATIK-5 offers two possibilities of limiting
the results diagram to only some of the members:
S If members or nodes are selected, the results are only displayed for these objects.
This method is suitable for having a quick look at a result anywhere. For a properly
planned output of results it is better to use the next method.
S For a partial system view the results are only drawn for the objects of this view.
Therefore, for a comprehensive graphical output of results for a complex structure
you need a series of subsystems specially prepared for this purpose.
S For 3D structures there is an additional tool to customize the presentation of results:
the working plane. For detailed information see example 3 (A 3.6) of this chapter.
We want to view here once again the above normal force limit values in a partial view
with the columns and the top chord:
" Call the partial system management and activate the SS
’Columns’ and ’Top Chord’, followed by [OK]
" Let the results be displayed once again

Even if the limit value results window is open you can change to the partial system views
and let the results be displayed correspondingly.
The following figure detail shows how the last results figure to be requested should
look approximately:

" Close the limit value results window if it is still open

A 3.5.8 Influencing the Labelling of Results

In the dialogue ’Settings Results Output’ (called using button on left) you can choose

between the three available label types.

The labelling of a figure already produced can still be influenced afterwards. With a
double click on a results diagram (at present a moment line) the following dialogue

STATIKï5 Aï63
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

appears, with which you can extend or reduce the content of labels as desired: Click

on [?] for more detailed information.

An existing label of a results figure (created automatically or by hand) can also be

switched on and off at any time. Click with the <RMB> on the button of the corrrespond-
ing results layer (see Ch. A 3.5.11) and select in the menu ’Labelling Visible’:

Buttons for results layer

A 3.5.9 The Tab Sheet ’Analysis’

Special analyses Limit state specifications

Definition of load case combinations

As you will have already noticed several times before, the functions of the ’Analysis’ tab
sheet are not needed to produce standard results. The three buttons which are available
here serve the following purposes:
With this button one can define a series of special analyses, including analysis according
to 2nd order theory in the basic module of STATIK-5. We will not discuss this further
in this example.
With this button load case combinations with arbitrary factors can be defined, which
then appear in the ’Results’ tab sheet under ’Results for’, and for which the same results
as for individual load cases can be obtained. In contrast to the limit values subsequently
described we are dealing here with fixed load combinations.
This button is used to define the limit state specifications, which permit the determina-
tion of design limit state values, as described in Ch. A2.3.2. If the load cases were
assigned to certain actions when input, e.g. live loads, STATIK-5 automatically creates
a limit state specification called ’!Serviceability (SLS)’ and another called ’!Ultimate
(ULS)’.

Since the code requirements for the loads and load factors to be investigated depend
on many factors, the limit state specifications created by the program can only be used
directly in this way in simple standard cases. In the normal case you have to create your
own specifications, whereby those automatically created can be used as default values.

Load Case Combinations

We want to determine the bending deflections of our structure under all dead loads and
the full snow load. Since these loads only exist as individual load cases, we want now

Aï64 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

to define a corresponding load case combination, for which we can then obtain the
bending deflections as for an individual load case.
" Change to the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and click on the button
for load case combinations

combo box with the

defined load case com-
binations

Adopt-button

Load case window

Input field for load factor

Defined combination

" Click on the button to create a new load case combina-

tion
" The dialogue field ’New Load Combination’ appears; call
the combination ’Full_Load’ and close the dialogue with
[OK]
" Click in the load case window on the load case ’L1’
" Check if there is ’1’ in the input field for the load factor
" Click on the adopt button (with which the selected load
case with the set factor in the combination in the right
window is adopted)
" Proceed in the same way with the other load cases until
the desired combination is obtained
" Document the load case combination by making a print
entry and then close the dialogue
" Change to the ’Results’ tab sheet
" Click on the arrow key in the first combo box

You can now see that in the new additional branch ’Load combinations’ the combina-
tion is also possible:

The maximum bending deflection for this combination should be DZ=−39.50 mm.

Limit State Specifications

We do not want to generate here our own limit state specification, but look in more
detail at the automatically generated specification ’!Ultimate (ULS)’.

STATIKï5 Aï65
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select again the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and here the button
for limit state specifications

combo box with the defined

limit state specifications

List of actions
List of generated haz-
ard scenarios

Inspect or modify the

selected action

As described in Chapter A2.3.2, the design limit state values are determined as the
extreme values of the results of a number of hazard scenarios (analogous terms: design
situations, hazard combinations).
A hazard scenario is the combination of different actions with the corresponding load
factors.
An action, after all, is the simplest case of a load case. However, several load cases
involving unfavourable superposition may participate, as is the case in our example with
the actions ’Snow’ and ’Wind’. Here too the four actions were automatically generated
by the program.
We will look at the action ’Wind’:
" Select the corresponding action line by clicking on
’!T_Wind Load’ and then [Modify]

The ’Specificatio nof action’ dialog is very similar to the dialogue described above for
the load case specification. The difference is simply that the load cases are adopted in

Aï66 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

different ways from the left load case list in the action specification, depending on
whether a load case can, e.g., act in addition to the previous one or alternatively to it.
In our case the action ’!T_Wind Load’ consists either of the load case ’WindL’ or of the
load case ’WindR’. Thus both load cases are mutually exclusive, i.e. in each results point
for each extreme value at most one of the two load cases is considered.

For further details please consult the help buttons of the corresponding dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï67
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.10 Output of the effective load for envelope values

In order to fully reconstruct an envelope value, there is a possibilty to output the list
of the effective load cases for every result value.

We recommend to print out first the list of all envelope specifications involved, showing
all the actions and all load cases and their combinations.

As an example let’s document the effective load for the resulting axial force of the spec-
ification ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’:

" Change to the register ’Results’ and set the output spec-
ifications as follows: ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’,’N’, numerical
output.

" Open the attribute dioalog by pressing this button and

activate the check box ’incl. effective load’.

" Calculate the results.

Two tables have been created:

The first table shows the envelope values and the corresponding hazard szenarios
(=GB):

effective hazard scenario of this row:

In this section for Nxmin the scenario 1 and for Nxmax scenario 2 was effective

The effective load case and load case combinations are listed in the second table:

The effective load cases of all individually contributing actions can be shown as well:
Let’s demonstrate it for the action ’Snow’:
" Click on this button in order to open the window of the
envelope value results and choose the action
’!T_Sonw_load_N’

Aï68 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" " Calculate the results (axial force due to action

snow load).

Here two tables are displayes as well, the first showing the resulting values and the sec-
ond table including the effecticve load cases:

A 3.5.11 How to Use the Results Layers

The results figures are also stored in layers. There is a layer group, which includes the
(maximum) 6 last results layers that are identified by monotonically increasing numbers.
Older results figures are deleted. Saving the last pair of results layers serves the following
purposes:
1) You can superimpose" several results figures, by adding the corresponding results
layers. To do this you have to keep the <Shift> key depressed, as otherwise the
already active results layers are deactivated.
2) You can switch back and forth quickly between the last pair of results.
3) Storing graphical results can also be useful for the structure or load input. For the
input of critical vehicle load positions, e.g., you can call up previously calculated
influence lines.

Some relevant comments:

S Limiting to the six last figures was deliberate, since the figures can use up a lot of
memory. This number cannot be changed by the user.
S When saving this results buffer is always deleted. This is also done because of stor-
age economy, and also because loading a new analysis would otherwise take a long
time.
S By making an entry in the output list any number of figures can be stored and looked
at again at any time.

STATIKï5 Aï69
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.6 Example 3: Space Frame

A 3.6.1 Task

HEA200
HEA140
3.86

Intermediate floor:
transverse: HEA160
longitud.: HEA140
4.30

4.34

5.20
4.34
4.34
4.34
4.34 2.50
Y 2.50
Bracing:
all ROR108/5.6
4.34 X 5.00
4.34 5.00
3.50
All columns:
HEA280
Point support

Load Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
cases: only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
[kN/m2] members in Y-direc- members in Y direction) except bracing )
tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

Aims: − 3D aspects
− projection control
− working planes
− surface loads

Prerequisites:
− 3D option of STATIK-5
− basic knowledge of the use of STATIK-5
(i.e. one has already tried out the introductory examples for plane
frames)

" Start STATIK-5 and begin a new analysis

" In the menu ’Options’ > ’Type of structure’ change to

’3D’

Aï70 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

By selecting a 3D structure the program switches automatically to the 3D representation,

in which the buttons for projection control are visible. We do not want to deal here with
projection control.

A 3.6.2 Structure Input

We want to begin with the input of the first cross frame (X,Z plane) and then duplicate
it several times in the Y direction. First we input both outer columns:

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA280 section; as material accept the suggested
structural steel.
Z " [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for large columns),
type in the start and end coordinates:
0 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
X 0 <o> 0 <o> 8.16 <o>
Y [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for small columns),
18.5 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
R0 <o> 0 <o> 5.2 <o> (Relative!)
Close the ’Member’ dialogue

Definition of a Working Plane

In order to better come to grips with a complex structure, there are on the one hand
the subsystems, with which you are already familiar, and in addition with 3D structures
the working planes. In the plane frame mode (of a specific working plane) the visibil-
ity is restricted to this plane and you work two−dimensionally in the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. The view can, as desired, be two or three dimensional.

We want to input the rest of the first transverse frame in the plane frame mode and for
this purpose define the corresponding working plane:

" Click on the button to define the plane (beneath the zoom
tools); the dialogue ’Working Planes’ appears

" Select the button to define a new working plane; the dia-
logue ’New Working Plane’ appears
Z " Assign the name XZ_01
C
B
" Click on the arrow button and select the points A, B and
C (in this order), to define the plane, and then [OK]
X
Y
A " Close the dialogue of the plane definition
With the first point A in the plane definition define the origin of the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. With A,B and C together define the plane and at the same time whether
clockwise or anticlockwise, with which you decide in which direction in the 2D view
you want to view the plane (right hand rule).

After defining the working plane you are in the plane frame mode of this plane. You
2D/3D view
can choose between the 2D and the 3D view. Stay in the 3D view, then only the objects
2D/3D- outside of the plane are invisible and the projection does not change. If you remove
mode
Plane definition
the 3D button, you are in a 2D view and you can only see the objects in the plane.

STATIKï5 Aï71
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Completion of the Frame in the Working Plane

" Switch to the 2D view (click on the active [3D] button)
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
V for the roof beam an HEA200 section
B
A " [Create] the roof beam by selecting the points A and B
" Select the left column
U
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’ ;
In the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the direction vector to (1.0,
0.0) and select ’Spacings’; in the corresponding input
field type the list of spacings
3.5 5 5 2.5;
[OK]
" The four columns should still be selected; <RMB> >
’Trim’; select the roof beam as trim line, to which the col-
umns have to be trimmed
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
for the intermediate floor an HEA160 section
" [Create] (for intermediate floor member);
type the start coordinates:
0 <o> 4.3 <o>
To input the end point press the key U (mouse moved in
U direction) and click on the neighbouring column
" Select as cross section for the bracing an ROR108/5.6 sec-
tion and create the 4 bracing members with [Create] and
select the existing end points
" Select the button for point support
" In order not to have to repeatedly select this button for
the input of several supports, click on the already acti-
>
vated point tool of the Graphics Editor to activate the
repeat mode
" Select all bottom points of the columns and close the
repeat mode with the <Esc> key
" Exit the plane frame mode, whereupon the program
automatically changes to the 3D view

Multiple Copies of the 1st Frame

We now want to duplicate seven times the input frame with its working plane and sup-
ports, but without the bracing, at a uniform spacing of 4.34 m.
" Make sure the working plane layer is visible (i.e. the layer
button shwon is down)
" " Select all objects with <Ctrl>A;
hold the <Shift>-key depressed and click on the bracing
members and on the 3rd column as well as on its support
to delect them
" " <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the vector to 0, 4.34, 0 and
the number of duplicates to 7;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]

Aï72 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

. Don’t forget the Undo function, with which you can go back as many steps as you like, if any-
thing goes wrong.

" Click on the centering button or to be faster on the key

B <F3>, to see the whole figure
C
" Select the bracing crossing points and the 3rd column
with its support in the 1st frame, which are still available
D in the last frame to duplicate
A
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
Grab the vector between the duplicates using the mouse
(e.g. from A to B) and set the number of copies to 1;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]
E

Definition of Further Working Planes

" Duplicate the symbol for the plane XZ_01 (in the point E)
in the Y direction on each column foot
" Call the ’Working plane’ dialogue and define a new plane
called ’Roof’ with the points A (origin), C and B (see
above figure)
" Define in the same way the plane
’YZ_01’ with the points D,C,E
and a plane ’Floor’ for the intermediate floor
" Exit the plane frame mode
" Duplicate the symbol for the plane YZ_01 in the X direc-
tion with the spacings 3.5 5 5 2.5 2.5

Selecting Working Planes

" Open the ’Working plane’ dialogue (if it is no longer
open)

You can see that by duplicating the plane symbols the planes XZ_02, XZ_03, ... and
YZ_02, YZ_03, etc. were generated.
" Click in the dialogue on the plane XZ_01; as a result we
switch to the plane frame mode of this plane;
" Press now the <Arrow Downwards>-key and you will
note that this is an elegant way to go quickly through the
planes in the order of their entry in the dialogue
" Exit the plane frame mode by clicking on the button
shown on the left or by selecting ’No’ in the ’Working
plane’ dialogue
In the ’Working plane’ dialogue therefore one can switch at any time to a specific work-
ing plane. A second possibility is a double−click on a plane frame symbol. The symbols
of course have to be visible to do this, i.e. the corresponding layer button has to be
active.
" Double−click on one of plane symbols, and you get into
in the plane frame mode
" Double−click on the plane symbol in the plane frame
mode, and you are in the 3D mode again

STATIKï5 Aï73
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

The Buttons for Projection Control

In the 3D view, which can be activated at any time with the button shown on the left,
the following buttons to control the projection are always shown. For a more detailed
description look in the context help.

Rotation about a vertical axis Rotation about a vertical axis

Rotation about a horizontal axis Rotation about a horizontal axis

Nearer (point perspective) Further away (point perspective)

Architectonic perspective (point per-
Parallel perspective (axonometry) spective with horizont. viewing direction)
Point perspective Projection direction in X

Projection direction in Y Projection direction in Z

Back to last projection direction for
[X], [Y] or [Z] Projection management

Rendered representation Rendering settings

Step angle when rotating

Completion of the Structure Input

Longitudinal members of the intermediate floor:

" Change to the working plane ’Floor’

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA140

" Create the 2 longitudinal end beams with [Create] and

select the existing end points
C=Mid− B
point A C " Create the middle longitudinal member; to input the
between
A and B starting point use the construction method ’Mid−point
between Two Points’ (key <M>); for the end point use the
<U> and <V> keys, respectively
Longitudinal members in roof plane:

" Change to the working plane ’Roof’ and to the 2D view

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, to make

the member end points of the columns visible, that are
required for the input of the longitudinal members.

. Consult on this occasion the context help for the button for the selection mode.

Aï74 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select in the ’Member’ dialogue the section ’HEA140’

already used

A B
" Create the members after double−clicking on the line tool
C D of the Graphics Editor (A−B, C−D, ...); close with <Esc>;
E Note that the last two members of the 5th frame stop!

F " The missing three members in the middle of the top three
fields (between A−C, C−E and E−F) are best created using
the mid−point construction for the start point and then
with <U> draw a horizontal line to the member on the
extreme right.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue

" Switch off the selection mode for object points again
(point symbols no longer visible).

Trim the last three transverse frames:

" Exit the plane frame mode

" Switch off the layer with the plane symbols

" Set the projection direction to [Z]

" Select all superfluous input columns and supports by

means of a window as shown in the figure

" <RMB> > ’Delete’ or <Delete> key

" Draw the same window again in the opposite direction

(from right to left), to select the three last roof beams
" To select the end points of the members that have to be
moved, draw the window again as shown

. In order to be able to select the end points directly, you could have changed the selection mode
to ’Enable/disbale sSelectability of points of objects’. Then drawing a window according to
the figure would have sufficed. In the present case however the suggested method is quicker.

" Set the projection direction back to the previous inclined

setting

B A " <RMB> > ’Move’

" Select the point A as the point to be moved and place it

on point B by clicking

Comment: If you had done this in the previous projection direc-

tion [Z], the program (unforeseeably) when clicking on B could
also have taken the bottom point of the column. In the projec-
tion it is unambiguous.

STATIKï5 Aï75
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Input of the bracing:

" Switch to the plane ’Roof’ and then to 2D view.

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, so that the
existing points in the plane become visible.
A
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select the cross section
for the braces (ROR108/5.6)

" Double−click on the line tool of the Graphics Editor and

create the brace members in the first field (close with
<Esc>);
Comment: At A there is no point which one could snap to.
For this point to meet the first diagonal, which ends
there, exactly, you have to use the construction method
’Intersection of Two Lines’, which you call using the
B C D <RMB>.

" Select the members of the second cross from below and
duplicate them 6x in the X direction by grabbing the
vector BC

" Select the members of the other 3 crosses and duplicate

them 2x in the X direction by grabbing the vector BD

" Delete the superfluous cross bottom right.

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_01’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_02’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’Floor’ and create the two required
crossed diagonals.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue and switch off the point
selection mode again

" Back to the 3D representation

With this the structure input is completed.

A 3.6.3 Load Input (Surface loads)

Surface loads are created on previously defined surfaces.

" Switch to the tab sheet ’Surfaces’

We first want to create an surface for the roof sheeting and then one for the facade in
the plane YZ .

" Select the button to define a new surface.

Aï76 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue, as shown on the left; as the plane the
already defined plane ’Roof’ in the combo box is selected;

[OK]

" Open the dialogue to define the load−bearing elements

and set them as shown; [OK]

Thereby all members in the U direction in this plane are load−

bearing. For checking purposes they are shown in a different
colour.

" With this button start the input of the surface outline,
which in this case coincides with the structure outline.

Comment: The surface can also jut out over the structure
(overhanging roof) and exhibit polygonal recesses (adjacent
button), which may not touch each other or the outline
" Define a second surface called ’YZ Facade’ and assign it
to the existing plane ’YZ_01’

" Select as load−bearing members all in U and V directions

" Input the outline of the surface (total area without ’Over-
hanging Roof’)

Now follows the input of the three prescribed load cases using surface loads.

[kN/m2] Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
(only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
members in Y direc- members in Y direc- except bracing )
tion) tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" Create the first load case (Identifier: ’WgtRS’); and set to
’Surface Load Case’.

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet now set to surface loads
the surface ’Roof’

STATIKï5 Aï77
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select the button for surface loads and set the dialogue,
as shown

"

" Create the second load case (Identifier: ’Snow’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’Roof’

" Select the button for surface loads and set: ’Projective’,
’Z’, ’uniform’, −2.1

"

" Create the third load case (Identifier: ’Wind’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’YZ Facade’

" Select the button for surface loads and for the linearly
distributed load: deactivate ’Global’, ’X’, ’uniform’ and
3 input load values 1: 0.6, 2: 0.6, 3: 1.2

2 " Click on [Create] and input the load polygon such that it
is suitable for the three load values, i.e. 1−>2−>3−>4 and
4 close polygon

Now the surface loads have been input and everything else is done automatically, i.e.
you can change to the ’Results’ tab sheet and begin inspecting the results.

We want now however to check how STATIK-5 transmits the surface loads to the
members.
" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the button to check all load
cases, whereupon STATIK-5 determines the load transfer.

" Click with <RMB> on the layer symbol of the current

load case and select in the context menu ’Sublayer Vis-
ibility’
" Activate the control field ’Transferred Loads’, whereupon
the created member loads become visible

. You also have the possibility of checking the created line loads numerically with the load case
legend (from the load case list). For these line loads to appear in the legend with the load case
attributes ’Legend including generated loads’ has to be active.
We dispense here with a guided tour" of the results, since this is the same as in Example
2. For the selective inspection of results in the case of 3D systems of course you can
also use working planes. In addition and also in combination with the working planes
there are also the subsystems, which are very useful but whose input is not included
here.

Aï78 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

Part ABasic Module

A 1 Introduction

A 1.1 General

In its basic module STATIK-5 is a computer program for the linear-elastic analysis of gen-
eral three dimensional frame structures according to the theories of first and second
order and despite the variety of possibilities in static modelling and in the evaluation
of results it is characterised by very straightforward and uniform operation.
For users whose needs are not so demanding STATIK-5 is also supplied in a less expens-
ive 2D version, which is limited to plane frames and for which all 3D aspects are omitted,
but otherwise it has the full range of possibilities.
Besides the basic module, the following additional modules are also available:
− Module for the calculation of nonlinear supports and truss members
− Module with a number of special features, like nodal constraints, construction
stages, buckling loads and positioning of cross sections by means of axis points
− Prestressing
− Dynamics (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− Long−term effects
− FAGUS-5 analysis module for various analyses like stress and ultimate load verifica-
tions, design, interaction and moment−curvature diagrams, etc. for reinforced and
prestressed concrete and composite cross sections.

The present manual in its standard version deals with the basic module of STATIK-5
including the 3D extension. Further chapters describing the optional modules are sup-
plied when ordered.
For first contact with STATIK-5 we recommend that one starts with Chapter A 3 Working
with STATIK-5" and goes through the first two examples (Sections A 3.4 and A 3.5) step
by step. One should also peruse Chapter A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling".
STATIK−5 is under continuous development by Cubus AG, so that the suggestions and
wishes of practising engineers are always welcome. In the case of major developments
the user will always be informed about the release of a new program version.
The right is reserved to introduce minor deviations in the program from this manual such
as self−explanatory changes in the dialogue.
STATIK-5 can be used to solve complex structural analysis problems. This by the nature
of things can involve a series of error sources, from statical modelling to data input, from
numerical problems, and even in the interpretation of results. There may also be actual
programming errors, which for such extensive software, despite all the care taken in the
development work, cannot unfortunately be completely excluded. Important prerqui-
sites therefore for the use of STATIK-5 are an adequate technical knowledge and the
checking of results by means of rough calculations and plausibility considerations.
We draw attention here to the Cubus licence agreement, which governs user rights
regarding STATIK-5 as well as to the passage Limited Guarantee", printed below in
Chapter A 1.3.

STATIKï5 Aï1
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

A 1.2 Improvements to STATIK-3

The STATIK software has been completely rewritten and STATIK−5 is a genuine 32 bit
Windows program, which in general keeps to the operating conventions of Windows.
Further, STATIK-5 works in conjunction with the CubusAdministrator, the Cubus-
Explorer and the CubusViewer. These are modules which are employed by all Cubus
programs of the 4th generation and this leads therefore to a standard operation of these
programs. We leave aside here a discussion of the individual aspects of the working
area on the screen. In the following, however, the most important innovations are
described, which affect modelling and methods of analysis.

In the basic module:

− In the nodes of automatically subdivided haunched members, if possible, the
geometry of the cross section is interpolated and not the cross section values, which
can substantially reduce the work of inputting the cross section.
− Automatic transfer of surface loads (distributed loads, line and point loads) to the
frame structure (not relevant in the 2D version).
− Automatic load superposition.
− More general concept for the output of stresses on the boundary including realistic
stress envelopes.
− Program capacity is limited, in effect, only by the hardware.

In the optional modules:

− Nonlinear analysis necessitated by nonlinear support components and nonlinear
truss members.
− Substantial simplifications with regard to construction stages.
− A new feature is that cross sections have an axis point, which lies on the axis of the
member. This permits changes to the cross sections, without having continually to
adjust the member axes. Further, this also allows the correct treatment of structures
which change from one construction stage to the next (especially important for pre-
stressed systems).
− New, graphically−interactive prestressing module.

A 1.3 Limited Guarantee (Excerpt for the Cubus License Agreement)

Limited Guarantee − Cubus guarantees for a period of 1 year from the start of the agree-
ment, that the software functions essentially in accordance with the accompanying
manual and that the hardware module delivered with the software is free of material
and workmanship defects. The agreement starts at the date of the first delivery of a
newly purchased program.

Claims of Purchaser − The complete liability of Cubus, according to purchaser’s

choice, consists of either (a) refunding the money paid or (b) in the repair or the replace-
ment of the software or hardware, which do not fulfil the limited guarantee of Cubus
and are returned to the supplier. This limited guarantee does not apply if the malfunc-
tioning of the software or hardware is due to an accident, to misuse or improper applica-
tion.

No Additional Guarantees − Cubus excludes any further guarantees concerning the

software, the accompanying manuals and the accompanying hardware module.

No Liability for Consequential Damage − Neither Cubus nor other suppliers are liable
to pay any compensation for any kind of loss (completely inclusive of any loss of profit,
interruption to operations, loss of business information or data or any other financial
loss), which arises from the use of a Cubus product or the inability to use this product.

Aï2 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

In any case the liability of Cubus is limited to the amount of money the purchaser paid
for the product in question.

STATIKï5 Aï3
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.1 Basic Considerations regarding Structural Modelling

A 2.1.1 General information

STATIK−5 is a tool for the analysis of arbitrary three dimensional structures, consisting
of straight (beam) members with constant or linearly varying cross sections. The basic
module allows linear analysis according to the theories of 1st and 2nd order.
The members are rigidly connected to each other at the nodes (exception: hinges at
the ends of (truss) members). Support conditions are introduced at the nodes. Details
on nodes and members are given in the following sections.
The position of the structure in space is defined by coordinates in a Cartesian system
(X,Y,Z) with the right−hand rule, the so−called global coordinate system. For the sake
of simplicity, directions running parallel or perpendicular to the global Z direction are
often called vertical and horizontal directions, respectively. In the representation of the
structure on the computer screen the global Z direction is also taken to be positive in
the upward vertical direction. Therefore a corresponding choice of the global coordi-
nate system is strongly recommended.
For the plane frame case often encountered in practice STATIK-5 provides a special
input mode, which hides the three dimensional aspects. Likewise, the associated output
files only contain the corresponding components. Such plane frames lie in the (X,Z)
plane of the global coordinate system.

RZ

DZ RY
DY DZ

DX
DX
RX RY

Z Z

Y
X
X The 3D frame node has Y The plane frame node has
6 degrees of freedom 3 degrees of freedom

Fig. Aï1 Nodal degrees of freedom

A 2.1.2 Solution method

The program is based on the generalised displacement approach, which basically

involves the following steps:
1) In each node six unknown displacement parameters are introduced. These are the
three displacements (translations) (DX, DY, DZ) and the three rotations (RX, RY, RZ),
which define the displacement of a body in space. They point, when not otherwise
specified, in the directions of the global coordinate system (X, Y, Z), in which also
the position of the structure is defined. All displacement parameters of the whole
structure form the vector A.

Aï4 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) For each member the relationship is determined between the generalised forces at
the ends of the member q and the generalised displacements at the ends of the
member a, the so−called member stiffness matrix k. q and a are also defined in the
global coordinate system.

q +*k@a

3) Likewise, for each member the generalised forces f are determined, which due to
the loads on the member are transmitted to the end nodes. Thus a member transmits
the following forces to the end of the member:

q +*k@a)f

4) If one now considers the whole structure, the forces of all the members connecting
at a particular node are participatory. Their summation leads to the following rela-
tionship:

Qe + * K @ A ) F

Q e is the vector of forces, which are contributed by the connecting members to each
node. It comprises the part that comes from the displacement A of the structure
and the part F from the loading at the ends of the members.
5) Equilibrium requires that the sum of all forces Q acting at a node is zero. If one also
includes the external nodal forces R, then the equilibrium condition is:

Q +*K@A)F)R+ 0

6) One only has to introduce now the boundary conditions, which allow the above
system of equations to be solved for the unkown displacements A.

A 2.1.3 Unstable systems

In order to be able to solve the above system of equations, the determant of the coeffi-
cient matrix must not vanish. Physically this says that the structure must itself be stable
and have stable supports.

Possible reasons for instability

S not enough supports specified
S too many member hinges defined
S members and/or member ends are not connected, which is visually not always
simple to detect
S instability of single (nodal) degrees of freedom
S exceeding of buckling load in 2nd order analysis
S numerical problems

Instabilities cannot be automatically detected by the program. These occure while solv-
ing the equation system and result in a corresponding error message. Finding the cause
of an instability can sometimes be tricky. In this case the context sensitive online help
will give you hints how to find the cause of the instability.

STATIKï5 Aï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2 Members

A 2.2.1 Members, Member Lines and Member Axis

In the case of a member connecting two nodes in a frame structure, we distinguish

between its member line and its member axis, which do not coincide in the case of
eccentric connections.
A structure is built up by inputting member lines. Where the ends of member lines
touch nodes result; these ends are rigidly connected together.

The member axis, on the other hand, is the straight line coinciding with the centre of
gravity or the axis of the effective member section.

member axis SE
member line rigid connec- S member
A
tion eA from
nodes to start member
PA PE PE line
of member PA

normally connected member eccentrically connected member with

the member end points SA and SE

Fig. Aï2 Normal and eccentrically connected members

Intersecting Member Lines

If two member lines intersect the program assumes (if not otherwise specifically
requested), that the members are connected at the point of intersection. For the struc-
tural model a node is automatically introduced at the point of intersection and the
members cut in this way are divided into corresponding smaller members.

. The analysis module in STATIK-5 works with beam elements, connected at the nodes. How-
ever, the input members can consist of a number of beam elements, whereby the subdivision
of a member into beam elementis is carried out automatically by the program, whether it is
because members intersect, because nodes are introduced in the members or because an auto-
matic subdivision is necessary for special analysis methods.

The following figure illustrates the automatic subdivision into beam elements of input
members:

input members and support nodes member 1

support nodes:

member 3
member 2
automat. subdivided

beam elements 3_2

created by program:
1_1 1_2 1_3 1_4
2_3
3_1
2_2
Fig. Aï3 Members and
beam elements 2_1

Aï6 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.2 Eccentric Member Connections

An eccentric member connection is a rigid connection between the member start node
(i.e. the node to which the start of the member line is connected) and the physical start
of the member, and likewise for the member end point (see H−2). This is a convenient
model for the frequently encountered eccentric member connections. It is much prefer-
able to the introduction of short members with arbitrary cross sections.
. Large eccentricities can lead to extreme conditions of member stiffness and thus to numerical
problems. An exact amount of eccentricity cannot be given here. However, as a rule one should
not exceed values of at most half the member length.
. Eccentric connections should only be introduced where they are of statical relevance, since
they make the comprehension of the model and the interpretation of the results much more
difficult.
Member eccentricities can be specified in two ways:
member end General Specification in Global Coordinates:
member axis The first method involves the input of the vectors of the member end nodes to the
respective member ends in global coordinates. In this way, in principle, every eccentric-
eccentricity vector ity can be defined.
member line
Local Specification:
member end nodes
In cases which can be described in this way, the following type of specification of
member eccentricities is often simpler, especially as well, since with a change of cross
section they do not have to be redone.
We are dealing here with local eccentricities, since these are defined with respect to the
member line. The local x eccentricities along the member line are input explicitly and
those perpendicular to it are given by fixing the position of the member cross section
by means of a anchor point (LEERER MERKER).

z’ z’ z’ y’
Hi y’ Hi y’ E
note: Hi
The automatically gen-
erated anchor points zq S
and their names are S S
identical with the auto- yq zq
matically generated zq yq
result points (see page yq
A−29 )
The automatically generated anchor points Hi are Also in the case of given member
created in the rectangular outline (parallel to cross orientation the selected anchor point
section input system yq,zq) as shown; S is the centre coincides with the member line
of gravity or axis, respectively

z’
y’ member line PE
H

PA
zq
yq
exA
In the cross section of anchor Member placed using anchor point with
point H input by hand local x eccenticity exA at start of member

Fig. Aï4 Local specification of member eccentricities

As already mentioned, the member axis always passes through the centre of gravity or
the cross section or through any defined axis point. If the middle anchor point is
selected, the member axis and the member line coincide (no eccentricities in local y’
and z’ directions). In other cases it will exhibit a corresponding eccentricity.

STATIKï5 Aï7
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

To uniquely define the position of the cross section an x’,y’,z’ coordinate system is intro-
duced; it only has relevance in this connection. It will presently be shown how the local
coordinate system is defined (see Ch. A 2.2.3) with x’ on the member line, whereby no
eccentricities, but any input member orientations have to be considered. The cross sec-
tion is placed as shown in LEERER MERKER, i.e. the yq and zq axis of the cross section
are in the same direction as y’,z’.

If the member axis is positioned in the way described − possibly with different cross
sections at the start and end of the member − and also if any local x eccentricity is taken
into account, the position of the member end point and thus of the member axis is uni-
quely defined. The actual local member coordinate system (see Ch. A 2.2.3) is in this
case also uniquely fixed by the member axis and any specified member orientiation.
Its directions do not necessarily coincide with those of the x’,y’,z’ coordinate system.

With regard to positioning with the anchor point the following points are mentioned:
S Positioning with the aid of anchor points represents in many cases a great simplifica-
tion in the input of the member axis positions.
An example would be members which lie on top of one another, as may be the case
for purlins. When changing the cross section no changes have to be made to the
geometry.
S When preparing the input of the members one should also consider the support
conditions, which can only be formulated in the nodes. These are situated at the
ends of the member lines.
S As for the direct input of eccentricities, there are limits to the automatically generated
eccentricities. For instance, very short members with large eccentricities can lead to
numerical problems.
S One is cautioned, however, because of the simple input possibilities and the realistic
representation not to connect everything eccentrically, if this is not relevant to the
structural model. Understanding the model and interpreting the results is much more
difficult for systems with eccentricities.

Example: Model of a column with an eccentric connection

Column Model

Member Member line

axis (input line)

eccentric con- Member axis

0.25 nection of the = membe line
top member
to the bottom
member Z
ex = −0.25 X

Fig. Aï5 Example of an eccentrically connected member

Aï8 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Subdivision of a Member Line, whose Member is Connected

Eccentrically

member axis SE

eccentric SA eccentric
connection connection

PA
PE
Lm admissible region for Lm
member line subdivision of member line minimum admiss-
ible member length

subdivision
point

the program makes 2 eccentric member

elements out of the subdivided member

Fig. Aï6 Subdivision in the case of eccentric member connection

As a result of the above considerations we have the condition that a member line, whose
member is connected eccentrically, can only be subdivided within the region given in
the above figure and thus may only be cut there as well.
The minimum allowable member length applies for numerical reasons. The value is
predefined by the program. The user, if the necessary care is taken, can make adjust-
ments to the actual conditions in a calculation, but it may never be zero. Thus members
or zero length are excluded.

A 2.2.3 Member Axis and Local Coordinate System

The member axis runs from the member start point SA to the member end point SE.
SE These points are the end points of the member line corrected by any eccentricity vectors.
For quantities related to the member (position and orientation of cross section, hinges,
z
x loads, section forces (alternatively called ’stress−resultant components’ or ’internal
y forces and moments’)...) each member has its own local coordinate system (x,y,z).
Z
SA This has its origin of coordinates at the member start point SA and is conventionally
defined as follows:
Y
x: along member axis, in direction of member end point
X
z: perpendicular to x in a vertical plane through x, pointing towards the positive half
Plane perpendicular
to (X,Y) through SA, space of Zglobal
SE
y: perpendicular to z and x, so that a right hand rule x,y,z system is obtained; thus y
lies in a horizontal plane

These definitions for y and z fail in the case of vertical member axis, for which the local
y axis points in the direction of the global Y and z follows from that.
. The member axis usually coincides with the axis of the centre of gravity of the cross section.
For special cases, however, in the input of the cross section there exists the possibility of defin-
ing an axis point that deviates from the centre of gravity (see Ch. A 2.2.5).
. In the case of symmetrical cross sections the principal axes of the cross section coincide with
the local y,z axes, which does not necessarily have to be the case for general cross sections
(see Ch. A 2.2.5). Therefore hinges, loads and section forces are not defined in every case in
the directions of the principal axes of the cross section .

STATIKï5 Aï9
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.4 Rotated Local System (Member Orientation)

In order to obtain a correct position of the cross section (only for space frames), the local
coordinate system, departing from the standard method described A 2.2.3, can be speci-
fied in a position arbitrarily rotated about the member axis. We are dealing with this case
with a variable member orientation. The specification can be done in two ways:
−) by specifying an angle, about which the system is rotated relative to the standard
position about the local x axis
−) by inputting a vector, which together with x defines the local x,y plane; y points in
the same direction as the projection of this vector onto the y axis

. Rolled steel sections can be introduced rotated by a certain angle. This possibility, which also
serves to position the cross section correctly and likewise finds application in plane frames,
has no influence on the definition of the local coordinate system.

A 2.2.5 Member Cross Section and Local Coordinate System

For every prismatic member there is one cross section, but for every haunched member
h there are two. A cross section is defined by the geometry of its parts as well as its material
properties. The input or choice of the cross section offers the following possibilities:
b
1) An (extendable) series of parametricised standard cross sections, like rectangle, T,
..., is available, which is defined by inputting the corresponding parameters.
2) Selection of cross sections from an extensive library of rolled steel sections.
3) Selection of cross sections, which were defined in the cross section module FA-
GUS−5. FAGUS-5 permits the input of arbitrary polygonal cross sections. These may
consist of several partial cross sections with different materials and arbitrary polygo-
nal holes. More information is given in the FAGUS-5 manual.
member cross sec-
tions: If no special axis point is specified in the definition of the cross section (see later), then
ï parametricised the centre of gravity of the cross section coincides with the local x-axis of a member
ï from section library
ï arbitrary (see LEERER MERKER ).
The zq direction of the cross section always corresponds to the local z direction
of the member. For non−symmetrical cross sections this means in general that the
directions of its principal axes are rotated with respect to the local coordinate system.
The program of course has to formulate the stiffness relationships in the directions of
the principal axes. The user, therefore, always works with the local coordinate system
and the necessary transformations are carried out automatically.
zh z yh
z
yq,zq: Input coordinate system
of cross section with the
ß origin Q0
S y y
S y,z: Local coordinate system
zq zq of member
yh,zh: Principal axes of cross
yq yq section
Q0 Q0

Fig. Aï7 Position of cross section in local coordinate system

The required relationships between strain and section force quantities within a member,
which form the basics for the statical analysis, are all formulated with respect to the
centre of gravity and the directions of the principal axes of its cross section.
To determine these relationships the cross section stiffnesses given in Table A−1 are
needed. These are determined automatically by the program for a given cross section
geometry and the materials selected for the cross sections. For special cases these stif-
fness values can also be overwritten for each member individually.

Aï10 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Stiffness Use Determine*)

sdx vx’ = N/sdx E.Ax Ax: cross sectional area

sdy vy’ = Vy/sdy **) G.Ay Ay: reduced shear area
sdz vz’ = Vz/sdz **) G.Az Az: reduced shear area
srx rx’ = T/srx G.Ix Ix: torsional constant
sry r y’ = − My/sry E.I y Iy: moment of inertia about y
srz rz’ = Mz/srz E.Iz Iz: moment of inertia about z

vx’= dv x , ... rx’= drx , ... v: displacement r: rotation

dx dx
N, V, T, M: section forces; E, G: elastic moduli (material properties)
*) For cross sections with several materials one works with a reference material para-
meter and the corresponding ideal cross section values
**) The influence of shear deformation can be switched on or off for
each member individually

Table Aï1 Cross section stiffnesses

. In contrast to earlier program versions, the materials and thus the characteristic values (E
modulus, G modulus) of importance for STATIK-5 can also be specified in the cross section
and do not appear explicitly in the input for STATIK-5. Above all this is advantageous for com-
posite cross sections, whereby one does not have to work by weighting an E modulus defined
in STATIKï5.

Definition of Position of a Cross Section with an Axis Point

. This possibility requires a special program option
If the cross section has an axis point A, then not the centre of gravity, but this axis point
lies on the member axis. Thus a (perhaps additional) eccentricity arises, which is cor-
rectly handled by the program automatically.
Working with an input axis point, which is independent of the centre of gravity, is of
importance above all if a member exhibits different cross sections in different construc-
tion stages. Since the member axes do not change, the correct position of the centre of
gravity can be defined with only one axis point (see LEERER MERKER).

Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2 Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2

z z z z

S1 y A y A
y y
S2

Q0
Q0 Q0
Q0
Without the axis point the centre of gravity If an axis point PA is defined (in the cross section input sys-
coincides with the unchanging member axis. tem Q0), then the member axis coincides with it.
The position of the cross section changes ! The position of the cross section remains constant !

Fig. Aï8 Cross sections and axis point

As in the case of directly input eccentricities, these automatically generated eccentricities

are also subject to limitations for numerical reasons. In any case one should restrict one-
self to axis points that lie within the convex envelope of a cross section.
Further, one should remember that the section force results are output with respect to
the axis point. If this is situated far from the centre of gravity, a quick interpretation of
the resulting section forces is difficult, should normal forces be present.

STATIKï5 Aï11
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Members with Changing Cross Section (Haunched)

A member can have either a constant cross section or exhibit different cross sections
at its ends. In the case of different cross sections one speaks of a haunched member.
Regarding the variation of the cross section of haunched members one should note the
following points:
1) Within member elements the cross section values are linear.
2) If input haunched members intersect or if subdivisions are specified for haunched
members for the calculation, then the cross sections are linearly interpolated in the
subdivision points, provided the necessary requirements are fulfilled. Otherwise a
linear variation of cross section values is assumed. One should refer to the FAGUS-5
manual regarding the requirements for interpolation of the cross sections. By way
of example, the following figure shows the stiffness variation in the case of linear
interpolation of the cross section geometry

Rectangular cross section with linearly

member varying height h...2h

Variation of bending stiffness:

Without member subdivision (linear)
With subdivision into 4 member elements
(corresponds here approximately to effec-
tive variation)

Fig. Aï9 Variation of cross section / cross section values

A 2.2.6 Hinges at Member Ends

Members are normally rigidly connected at their end nodes. Analogous to the six
degrees of freedom in a node, at the member ends six possible restraints can be
released. These are the three displacements and three rotations in the local coordinate
system. For a bending hinge in a plane frame in the X,Z plane, for example, the rotation
about the local y axis has to be released.
member hinges SE
SA
PA PE
PA PE

Centrally connected member Eccentrically connected member

Fig. Aï10 Member end hinges

Instead of a normal hinge, which releases the corresponding restraint and transmits no
force or moment, between member ends and member end points an elastic spring can
act.

A hinge cannot be introduced within a member. In this case it is necessary to input more
than one member with member ends at the desired hinge positions.

. When inserting hinges one should ensure that no instabilities arise. The following three pitfalls
exist:
1) The member itself becomes unstable (torsional hinges at both ends of a member element
are automatically corrected by the program).

Aï12 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) Nodes can become unstable, if for a displacement degree of freedom none of the connected
members contribute stiffness and the node is not correspondingly supported. Example: all
members are hinged at a node (a special case is given by truss members, which are dealt with
in the next section).
3) Obviously, by introducing too many hinges an instability of a part of the structure or of the
overall system can also be caused.

. Whether a structure is unstable and cannot be analysed according to the selected method
depends on the loading. Instabilities cannot, in principle, be recognised by the program. Only
if the algorithm to solve the system of equations fails is there an indication of a structural or
numerical instability (due to extreme differences in stiffness).

Truss Hinges

A hinge, for which all rotational degrees of freedom and only these are released, is called
here a truss hinge. In STATIK-5 truss hinges are given the following special treatment:

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, then the program recognises it
Basically unstable
nodes are automatically as a truss node and automatically stabilises what are in effect its unstable rotational
stabilised by the pro- degrees of freedom (see also section A 2.3 on nodes). Therefore, such nodes may not
gram be acted upon by moments.

Truss member
Truss Members

Truss members are input as such in STATIK-5. At both ends they have a truss hinge. A
Created member
member, which has the same hinges as a truss member, but is not defined as such, is
elements: not treated as a truss member. If the member line of a truss member is subdivided by
a node or another member, then the member elements that result automatically become
truss member elements. With respect to the hinges these behave as truss members.

G: truss elements

G M G
Fig. Aï11 Instabilityof a part of the structure due to too many hinges?

If the horizontal member in Figure A−11 is input as a truss member, then the system
sketched above is stable, since the member is subdivided into two truss member
elements. Thus in node M only members with truss hinges are connected and its rota-
tional degrees of freedom are eliminated by the program.

If the horizontal member is not input as a truss member, then as a 3D frame the system
is unstable, although the member does not have any additional hinges. Since in the
subdivision of the member no hinges are introduced at M, the rotation of the node is
not stabilised, and the substructure of the horizontal member consisting of two member
elements can freely rotate about its axis.

STATIKï5 Aï13
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3 Nodes

In the analysis model nodes are the points at which the equilibrium conditions are
formulated, leading for the whole structure to the global system of equations. Nodes
are introduced everywhere where member elements connect and in all free member
elements. This is done automatically by the program and in general the nodes are of
no direct interest to the user. Nodes with special attributes, like support conditions,
however, have to be input specifically. The following sections illustrate the cases in
which this is necessary.

A 2.3.1 Nodal Coordinate System

A nodal coordinate system (X’,Y’,Z’) is assigned to every node, whose default direc-
tions correspond to those of the global coordinate system. In this system the displace-
ment degrees of freedom of a node and, thus, also possible nodal loads, support condi-
tions and reactions are defined. In the nodes created by the user the nodal coordinate
system can be rotated arbitrarily. This is meaningful above all in the case of supports
which do not act in global directions.

A 2.3.2 Nodes on a Member Line

If a node is created on a member line, the member for the calculation model is
subdivided into member elements. If no specific attributes are given for such a
member (see below), then it only serves the purpose of subdivision of an input
member. This is probably only seldom of interest, since a member subdivision for
the calculation model alone can be achieved using the member attributes more eas-
ily. A frequent application, however, is the creation of support nodes on a continu-
ous beam, which was input only as a single member.

Fig. Aï12 Support nodes on a continuous beam

A 2.3.3 Support Conditions

Z’ X’ Support conditions can be formulated in the nodes created by the user. To each of
k the six displacement parameters of a support node one of the following three condi-
tions is assigned:
1) Free, i.e. corresponding displacement not restrained
Rotated nodal system
at node k 2) Blocked (fixed), i.e. no displacement possible
Z 3) Elastic (spring support), i.e. a stiffness value defined as force quantity / displace-
ment quantity is specified.

Y X
Here one should note that the directions of the displacement parameters correspond
Global system to the nodal coordinate system (see above).

Aï14 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3.4 Truss Nodes

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, the node is designated a truss
node. Its in effect unstable rotational degrees of freedom are eliminated and as a result
it can be acted on by moments.

A 2.3.5 Reference Nodes

There are cases in which an input applies to a specific node. This is the case for example
when scaling the displacements of a load case, if one wants to use them as a predefined
deformation. This is done by assigning a value to a displacement component in a speci-
fied node. For this purpose an input node must be present there, which has an identifier,
to which one can refer.

A 2.3.6 Nodal Constraints

. Requires special program option

The specification of a linear dependency between displacement parameters is called

here a nodal constraint. Typical applications, for example, are rigid connections
between a group of nodes or folding joints.

The constraints are of the form:

S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + factor3 * M3+ ...

(S=slave parameter, i.e. dependent displacement parameter, Mi=master parameter, i.e.

free displacement parameter)

See chapter E 3 for detailed information about nodal constraints.

STATIKï5 Aï15
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4 Loads

Loads are put together in individual load cases, which can be accessed individually or
in combinations in the results output. The following loads are possible:

A 2.4.1 Loads on Nodes and Members

Nodal loads (forces, moments, prescribed displacements and rotations): they act in in
the nodal coordinate directions, i.e. usually in the global coordinate directions.
Member loads (forces, moments, strains, curvatures, accelerations): accelerations are
suitable for determining self-weight or earthquake loads. They act in the global
coordinate directions and the input values are multiplied with the cross section
G masses by the program. The other loads can be concentrated or linearly distributed,
and can also act on a part of a member. Strains and curvatures act in the local coordi-
nate system, but forces and moments can act in the local or in the global coordinate
system.
Influence line loads: Influence lines can be calculated for section, displacement and
support quantities.
Loads due to prestressing are automatically generated at the ends of the tendons by
the prestressing module (not included in the basic module) based on the input pres-
tressing stages.

A 2.4.2 Surface Loads

In the case of 3D structures (space frames), with the exception of the self-weight of the
member, one often has to do with surface loads. Examples are floor loads, roof loads,
facade loads, loads transmitted through a carriageway, pressure loads like wind, water,
etc.. Assigning by hand such loads to the members of the structure is very time−consum-
ing, is a source of errors and is difficult to check. For this purpose STATIK-5 provides
the facility of surface loads, which the program assigns automatically to the desired
members.
In load cases load transmission surfaces (subsequently abbreviated to surfaces) can
be selected and on these arbitrary point loads, line loads and polygonally bounded dis-
tributed loads (designated in STATIK-5 as surface loads) can act. In this connection the
following points should be mentioned:
1) Surfaces are predefined independently of the loads.
2) A surface lies in a plane, is bounded by an arbitrary polygon and can also have
polygonally−shaped openings.
3) Those members must be assigned to a surface, to which the loads are trans-
mitted. In the case of a roof, for instance, this could be the purlins, and in the case
of a grillage all grillage members without any wind bracing, etc. . These members
have to lie in a plane, whereby a small deviation is accepted (tolerance value can
be set).
Important: The members carrying the surface loads are loaded only by forces (no
torsional moments). The transmission of an eccentric load to a single member will
therefor not be possible.
4) Each surface load has a direction (global X,Y,Z or local, i.e. perpendicular to load
surface). In the case of distributed, non−local loads one can specify whether the load
value is projective or effective. By projective one means the load value per unit
length or unit area normal to the direction of loading, and by effective per unit
length or unit area on the loading surface.
5) Line and area loads can be constant or trapezoidally and linearly distributed. For area
loads the plane load distribution is specified by load values at three points.

Aï16 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

6) Parts of a load which overhang the load surface or lie above openings and recesses
are not considered.

The load transfer of surface loads is carried out by means of an automatcally generated
Finite Element plate model, whereby the surface (load transmission surface) forms the
plate with constant thickness and the projection of the load transmission members onto
the surface are the line supports (freely rotating about their axes), on which the plate
is supported. The reactions of this support are in fact the sought member loads, which
are statically equivalent to the input loads. Attention is drawn to the following points:
1) A reduced plate stiffness is assumed over the support lines , so that the influence
of the loads is kept as local as possible − an assumption which one usually makes
in hand calculations.
2) The ratio of plate stiffness to support stiffness has a relatively big influence on the
distribution of the reactions. If it is increased the reactions are more uniformly distrib-
uted (smoother),whereas if it is reduced the reactions vary more strongly and
changes of sign are frequent. This stiffness ratio, designated in the program as the
smoothing factor, can be changed by the user within certain limits.
3) The load distribution is determined on the basis of the vertical components acting
on the plate. For the components in the plane of the plate the same distribution is
assumed. Whether this is permissible in a specific case has to be decided by the user.
For loads which do not deviate by more than 45 degrees from the vector normal to
the loading surface, this assumption is generally adequate.
4) Since no moments are transferred from the surface loads to the load carrying
members, these members must build some grid or stripe system and the surface loads
should lie within such a grid, i.e. the loads should generally be surrounded by load
carrying members. Overhanging loads are possible but the result of the load
transmission should be checked by the user.

A more exact determination of the load transmission would require a very complex
model, which would include the stiffnesses and structural action of the loading surface
(roof sheeting, facade, bridge deck...) as well as that of the overall structure. In this case
this would represent an unjustifiable effort.
The generated member and nodal forces can be inspected both graphically and numeri-
cally. To check the plausibility of the results one should, without fail, look at the
generated loads graphically!
If the automatically generated load transmission does not meet your requirements in
a specific case, then you have no alternative but to input the desired member loads by
hand.

A 2.4.3 Combination Load Cases

Normally one is interested in the design values of results obtained by the superposition
of different load cases with prescribed load factors. These superpositions are performed
by the ’results’ module based, respectively, on the load case or the limit state specifica-
tions and the stored results of the individual load cases.
In cases where the superposition of results is not allowed (analyses based on 2nd order
theory, nonlinear analyses), the analysis has to be carried out using load cases which
incorporate all actions together with the corresponding factors.
For this purpose STATIK-5 provides combination load cases. Here we are dealing with
’normal’ load cases, which are always treated as such, but from the point of view of
input, however, are defined as a combination of other existing load cases (which them-
selves may not be combination load cases).
. Note the difference between combination load cases and load case combinations. The latter
are instructions on how load case results have to be superimposed for the output of results,
provided that the results may be superimposed.

STATIKï5 Aï17
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4.4 Influence Lines

With STATIK-5 influence lines for displacement and reaction quantities can be calcu-
lated in the nodes as well as for member section forces.

Influence lines are determined by Land’s method. For each influence quantity at a par-
ticular position (e.g. moment My at a certain position on the member) a load case has
to be defined.

The calculated displacements of an influence line load case have to be interpreted

according to the type of moving load (e.g. force in the global Z direction, moment in
the local Y direction, etc.). The type of moving load is not chosen till the results are
output. Thus with an influence line load case different influence lines can be output.

Example of inluence lines for the section force My over the 2nd support:
My

Influence line for moving force Z:

Influence line for moving moment Y:

Aï18 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.5 Solution Methods

The solution method for 1st order theory is described in Ch. A 2.1. The basic module
of STATIK-5 also allows analyses according to linear 2nd order theory. For the following
types of analysis optional modules are available:
− linear stability analyses (buckling loads)
− dynamic analyses (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− long−term analyses (creep, shrinkage)
− nonlinear analyses for nonlinear characteristics of support components and truss
members

These methods are described in chapters additional to this manual.

A 2.5.1 Analyses according to 2nd Order Theory

The influence of deviation forces due to normal forces in the structure are considered
in analyses according to 2nd order theory. Beforehand, of course, the normal forces
have to be known (from an analysis according to 1st order theory, which is automati-
cally carried out by the program).

The solution is based on the equation:

Q = −( K + KG (N) ) A
Q : vector of the structure’s nodal forces
K : linear−elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
A : sought nodal displacements of the structure
i.e. the stiffness matrix for 1st order theory is extended by the "geometrical stiffness
matrix", which depends on the normal forces and the geometry.
The 2nd order theory is also valid for only small displacements. It can only be applied
if the actual normal forces in the structure do not differ appreciably from those obtained
from 1st order analysis.

Suitable for 2nd order theory: Unsuitable for 2nd order theory:

Supports mainly due to normal

forces induced by deforma-
tions
(Normal forces of 1st order=0)

Fig. Aï13 Suitable and unsuitable structures for analy-

ses according to 2nd order theory

. The superposition of load case results for 2nd order theory is not permissible!
To simplify dealing with practical cases, however, in STATIK-5 load cases can be defined,
which are a combination (with arbitrary factors) of other load cases. Such combination load
cases correspond to normal load cases and can also be solved therefore according to 2nd order
theory.
Whereas for analysis according to 1st order theory exact formulas can be used, the
determination of the geometrical stiffness matrix is based on discretised assumptions
regarding member deformation (cubic parabolas). The accuracy of an analysis depends

STATIKï5 Aï19
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

on how well the deflected shape due to bending can be approximated by such parab-
olas. This is improved if the members are subdivided by intermediate nodes.

As a basis for a subdivision, which gives sufficient accuracy in practical cases, the follow-
ing suggestion may be adopted:

Prismatic members should be subdivided such that between two points of inflec-
tion of the expected additional deformation due to the effects of 2nd order
theory there are about three members.

Some examples are given below. The multi−storey frame requires no additional subdivi-
sion.

dx

Z
Zfix
X tanZX = dx/h

Fig. Aï14 Member subdivision for analysis Fig. Aï15 Initial deformation due to skew position
according to 2nd order theory

Initial Deformations

For analyses according to 2nd order theory one often has to assume prescribed
imperfections in the structure. This is supported in STATIK-5 by creating and applying
initial deformations, as the imperfections are called here, in different ways.

Initial deformations are coordinate differences, which are added to the ’ideal coordi-
nates of the structure’s nodes, in order to obtain the imperfect structure. The same effect
could be achieved for the analysis and the results, if one defined the structure directly
in the imperfect configuration.

Initial deformations can be generated automatically in two ways:

1) The displacements of a load case or a natural deformation (from a buckling load
analysis) can, if scaled appropriately, be used as an initial deformation. The scaling
is carried out by defining the value of a displacement component in a particular
node.
2) Certain codes require as an imperfection a skew position of the structure. This way
of creating an initial deformation is also supported in STATIK-5. The Z coordinate
of the fixed base plane and the two angles of inclination tanZX and tanZY must be
input (see LEERER MERKER).

. To allow comparison of results of analyses with 1st and 2nd order theories, one can also work
with 1st order theory analysis with initial deformations.

Aï20 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.6 Actions and Limit State Specifications

A 2.6.1 Basic Considerations

The aim of all structural analysis is ultimately the dimensioning of a structure. This is
based on limit states, which requires among other things the selection of design situa-
tions with the associated load cases.

Each load case is characterised by a leading action and a simultaneously acting accom-
panying action and thus consists of a weighted combination of actions.

An experienced engineer can − at least for preliminary dimensioning − often limit the
consideration to a few points and also without much effort can recognize the critical
load cases for the investigated design situations.

The strength of a program however lies in the systematic treatment of numerous sections
or points. For many dimensioning tasks it is best to work with limit values of section
forces, reactions or displacements. These are determined by the Cubus programs on the
basis of limit state specifications, which uniquely describe the combination rules for the
individual loading. How these limit state specifications are arrived at is described below.

A 2.6.2 Overview of the Limit State Specifications

A simple limit state specification at the highest level looks as follows in the programs:

The considered actions are dealt with in the left half of the dialogue, and in the right
half the investigated combinations of these actions with the corresponding combination
factors. How these combinations were obtained is clearly seen here: the permanent ac-
tions ’Dead Load’ and ’Surcharge/Live Loads’ are investigated with the factors Jsup (here
1.35) und Jinf (0.8). In addition there are the variable actions, of which on the one hand
the snow loads as leading action (JQ=1.5) and the wind load as accompanying action
(\0=0.6) and on the other hand the wind loads as leading (JQ=1.5) and the snow loads
as accompanying (\0=0.88) actions are considered. The load and accompanying action
factors depend on
S the code
S the actions
S the design situation
S the limit state under consideration

STATIKï5 Aï21
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The design situation and the limit state are specified on creating a new limit state specifi-
cation by the user .

The list of actions in the left part of the dialogue is created automatically on the basis
of the input loads, each of which is assigned to an action. The right part of the action
combinations can be automatically generated, but also be arbitrarily defined by adding
to, deleting or modifying columns. Regarding automatic generation see Chapter A 2.6.6.

The programs CEDRUS-5 and STATIK-5 automatically create a limit state specification
for the limit state (Type 2) of the ultimate limit state (structural safety) for the standard
design situation.

The actions, which have not yet been discussed in detail, will be treated in the next
chapter.

A 2.6.3 Actions

Each individual load is strictly speaking an action. But as is evident from the previous
chapter, the term ’Action’ is defined more narrowly here. Before it is defined precisely,
the following terms are clearly defined once again:
Loads: As loads all elementary load elements are meant, which are available in a pro-
gram as actions on a structure (see also above in A 2.6.1).
Examples: concentrated loads, line loads, etc.
Loads are always summed up together in loadings (see below).
Loadings are a type of container for individual loads. On the load side they represent
the basic unit for which results can be calculated, and also from which actions are
formed.

Definition of the term ’Action’

Actions are loadings summed to form the individual categories like dead loads, live
loads, wind loads, snow loads, etc., which then finally are combined to form action
combinations in the limit state specification.

How actions are formed

During input new loadings are always assigned to an action category. Thereby the most
important categories available in the codes for the chosen structural type can be selec-
ted, whereby the user can also define his/her own categories.

All loadings assigned to an action category comprise together an action. One is still free
to choose how the loadings interact to form an action, i.e. whether e.g. they can act
together or are mutually exclusive. The corresponding specification is called an action
specification and is treated in detail later.

Aï22 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Dialogue with the List of Actions

In order that on the one hand one has an overview of the actions that can arise in an
analysis with their properties and on the other hand to be able to define ones own ac-
tions, the programs have been provided with a special dialogue:
Load factors and
combination factors

Code prescribed
action categories
(cannot be chan-
ged)

Actions created
by user

The Properties of an Action

Action type
For an action type there are the following selection possibilities: ’permanent’, ’variable’,
’prestressing’, ’accidental’ or ’undefined. The type influences the way in which action
combinations are formed in the limit state specification.

Load Factors and Combination Factors

To each action category there belong load factors and, depending on the type, combina-
tion factors. In the case of the categories prescribed in the codes these values cannot
be modified in the dialogue. If this is necessary a user−defined action must be defined.

Action Sets and Action Groups

Several actions can together form an action set (e.g. several load models for a bridge).
Such actions are not considered separately in forming the action combination, but the
set appears as a whole in an action combination (e.g. as leading or accompanying ac-
tion).
The codes speak in this connection of action groups. This term is also supported in
a general sense in the Cubus programs. By it is understood the combinations, in which
the actions of a set have to be differentiated.
Example: The vertical and the horizontal live loads of a road bridge should be able to
occur as follows:
1) vertical loads full, without horizontal loads,
2) vertical loads * 0.75, horizontal loads full.
Solution: The loads are defined by two actions, which together form a set. The set ap-
pears in two so called action groups with the following combination factors,: (1,0) and
(0.75,1).
Which combinations should together form a set is specified in the above action dialo-
gue. All actions which have the same names in the Set column form together an action
set.

The Action Specification

To the full definition of an action there belongs the combination specification for the
participating loadings. Whereas permanent actions often consist of just one loading, for

STATIKï5 Aï23
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

variable actions a complicated superposition may be necessaray. Take for example as

an action the live loads acting on a multispan beam, for which loads have to be conside-
red in an unfavourable position in the individual spans and in addition with a vehicle
load in different positions.

One can imagine as a simple combination scheme − denoted here by E1 − the compari-
son of all possible loading combinations. This may be represented in a loading scheme
sequence as follows:
Action = Loading combination
( E1 )
or

where
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )
( E1 )

Example: Spans with unfavourably applied live load for a three span beam

A B C

3 loadings A, B and C are introduced for the individual spans.

The specification of the action Live Load according to the scheme E1is:

A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC

In the case of a five span beam one would already have 31 load case combinations to
compare one with another. If two spans and perhaps a vehicle load in n possible posi-
tions were added, then the user would find it rather challenging in terms of combinato-
rial analysis and soon lose track of the number of loading combinations.

According on the other hand to the extended superposition scheme − denoted here
by E2 − a compact and clear definition of all possible loadings is possible. This is best
illustrated in a loading scheme sequence:

Action = permanent Loading step ( E2 )

optional

wobei: plus

Loading step = Loading combination

or
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )

The scheme is based on an unconditional (permanent) or optional superposition of loa-

ding steps. In contrast to the scheme E1, no complete loading combinations are descri-
bed, but instead there is an instruction on how the results have to be superimposed in
forming the limit values and how the limit values are formed.

From optional loading steps the value of the result for an extreme value in a point is
only considered if it is decisive, that is the extreme value is increasedby the correspon-
ding amount. Thus a positive value increases a maximum value and a negative one de-
creases a minimum value.

A loading step consists in the simple case of a single loading or of a loading combina-
tion. It can however also consist of a series of loadings or loading combinations, of
which only one can occur at any one time (e.g. different vehicle positions). In this case,
in the evaluation of the loading step there is in each point a minimum and a maximum
value of the considered result quantity.

The specification for the above example for scheme E2 is:

Aï24 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A plus B plus C
In the case of a five span beam with loading in the spans A,B,C,D,E and an additional
vehicle in 9 positions (a,b,c,..,i) the specification is:
A plus B plus C plus D plus E plus a or b or c or d or e
or f or g or h or i

The user can specify an arbitrary number of actions following the superposition scheme
E2.

. The scheme E1 is contained in E2 as a special case (without ’PERMANENT’ and ’PLUS’).

Automaticallyïgenerated Action Specifications

The programs automatically create for each action (exception: prestressing actions) an
action specification according to the folowing rules:

Permanent actions: all associated loadings are added up. Such an action consists the-
refore of a fixed loading combination.

Variable actions: Each loading that is assigned to a variable action is also given during
input the superposition attribute, ’additive’ or ’exclusive’. Additive loadings (a1,a2,...)
can occur simultaneously, exclusive (e1,e2,...) are mutually exclusive (e.g. vehicle in
different positions). These actions are formed corresponding to the superposition
scheme E2 described above as follows:

a1 plus a2 plus a3 plus . . . plus e1 or e2 or e3 or ...

In cases, which are not covered by this simple rule, the specification must be done ma-
nually.
In the programs these specifications are performed in a dialogue, which looks as follows
and is self−explanatory:

A 2.6.4 Limit Values of nonlinearlyïdetermined Results

When using loading combinations or the specification ’plus’ in the above schemes the
programs superimpose results that were obtained for the participating loadings. Such

STATIKï5 Aï25
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

superpositions however are not permitted in nonlinear analyses as well as those obtai-
ned by second order theory.
In order nevertheless to obtain useful limit values for such cases, one has to consider
the following points:
S One has to limit oneself to a single action, so that in the limit state specification no
action combinations result,
S In the specification of the single action one may only use the superposition scheme
E1, that is only B1 OR B2 OR B3 ... , whereby the B1 may only be single loadings.
In order nevertheless to be able to work with the input loadings, the programs pro-
vide the combination loadings. Here the loadings are combined before the analysis
with the necessary factors to form a new loading, which is then equivalent to a nor-
mal loading (see Ch. A 2.4.3).

A 2.6.5 Limit State Specifications with Action Sets

Working with action sets is necessary or recommendable when all loading configura-
tions of an action cannot be obtained or only with a lot of effort using the superposition
scheme described above for action specifications. This case is certainly necessary for
the following example:

Excerpt from the dialo-

gue ’Actions’

The automatically generated action combina-

tions each consider the action set with the
two defined groups (lower dialogue)

In the case of a multi−span bridge, the action Road Traffic Loading with the condition
that it must be considered in the two above groups, could scarcely be specified without
dividing it into two separate sub−actions. This way of handling the problem also gives
a better overview, as one can follow more easily what has actually been done.

A 2.6.6 Automatic Generation of Action Combinations

Depending on the design situation and the limit state, for which a limit state specifica-
tion is foreseen, the action combinations can be automatically generated.

Aï26 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

They are formed according to the following scheme (code−dependent), whereby it is

assumed that an action is always defined in the same way as a leading action, as also
an accompanying action. The correctness of the hazard scenarios formed in this way
has always to be checked in each case by the engineer and if necessary adapted to the
actual requirements.

Eurocode/E-DIN:

Basic combination (without accidental loading):

Sd + ȍg G,j ƪ
@ G k,j ) gQ,1 Q k,1 ) ȍy
iu1
0,i ƫ
@ Qk,i () g p @ Pk)

Accidental action combination:

S d,A + ȍG k,j ) Ad ) y1,1 @ Q k,1 ) ȍy 2,i @ Q k,i() g p @ P k)

iu1

Gk : char. values of the permanent loads (actions dead load, surcharges)

Qk,1 ,Qk,i : char. value of the first or further varaiable actions
Pk : prestressing
Ad : design value of the accidental action
g G : partial factors for permanent actions (1.35 and 1.0)
g Q : partial factors for varaible actions
g P : partial factors for actions due to prestressing
y 0, y1, y 2 : combinationvalues for occasional, frequent and quasi−perm. actions.

SIA 260:

Standard design situation

E d + E(gGG k, gPP k , g Q1 Q kl , y0i Qki) (4.4.3.4)

g G : load factor for permanent actions

Gk : characteristic value of the permanent action
g P : load factor for prestressing actions
Pk : characteristic value of the prestressing action
g Q : load factors for variable actions
Qk : characteristic value of a variable action
y 0 : reduction factors for variable actions

Note: For a variable accompanying action y 0i Qki (the decisive one) is considered.

Accidental design situation

E d + E(G k, P k , A d, y2i Q ki) (4.4.3.5)

Ad : design value of the accidental action

y 2i : load factor for the accompanying action i

STATIKï5 Aï27
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7 Results

A 2.7.1 Load Case Results

For individual load cases or fixed combinations of load cases support reactions can
be obtained in the nodes together with displacements, section forces and section
results (e.g. edge stresses) in arbitrary member sections.

Reactions
In the case of completely fixed nodes for space frames there are 6 reaction quantities,
3 reaction forces and 3 fixed−end moments. In the case of plane frames there are 2 reac-
tion forces and 1 fixed−end moment. These are always defined in the nodal coordinate
system (see page A−14), which without any explicit specification corresponds to the
global coordinate system.
For the output of the sums of the reaction forces the forces are transformed into the
global system.

Displacements
For load cases and load case combinations two types of displacement results can be
requested. These are the displacements of the nodes, which are only produced in a
numerical form and member displacements, which can be output in any member sec-
tions and also presented graphically.
Nodal displacements: In the case of space frames for completely fixed nodes there
are 6 displacement quantities, 3 displacement components and 3 rotation components.
In the case of plane frames there are 2 displacement components and 1 rotation. These
are always defined in the nodal coordinate system (see page A−14), which without any
explicit specification corresponds to the global coordinate system. If one wishes to have
nodal displacement results in particular directions, then the nodal coordinate system
can be selected accordingly during the input of the structure. Normally, especially
because of graphical output, one would prefer to request member displacements.
Member displacements: These have the same components as the nodal displace-
ments, but in contrast to them, however, they are always output in the global coordinate
system and can be requested for any member section. In contrast to earlier program ver-
sions it is therefore no longer necessary to introduce a node everywhere where one
wants to have displacement results (say in the mid−point of a member). This also allows
the creation of correct displacement figures.

Section Forces
z
centre of gravity
Mz or axis point of
cross section
member start y
Vy
N
My T
Fig. Aï16 Section force definition Vz x

Section forces in space frames have the 6 components shown in LEERER MERKER. As
shown, they act positively on the section boundary. In the case of plane frames there
are 3 section forces, namely N, Vz, My.

Aï28 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Section forces are always defined in the member’s own local coordinate system (see page
A−9 ).

. In order to be able in each case to interpret the section forces correctly the user is reminded
that the member axis, i.e. the local x axis, can differ from the centre of gravity of the member
(if the cross section was provided with an axis point) and that the local y and z axes can differ
from the direction of the principal axes of the cross section (for unsymmetrical cross sections).

Cross Section Results / Edge Stresses

For a homogeneous cross section the following calculated strain and stress results can
be obtained:
S Strains and stresses at arbitrary points in the cross section. Besides the auto-
matically prescribed points shown in the figure below, arbitrary points can be
defined in the cross section. Results in points of the same name have their own col-
umn in the tabular output and can be presented graphically as well. Comparable
result points in different cross sections should therefore have the same names.

TL TA TR
Automatically generated
RP2 result points with their pre-
AL A AR scribed names
(A=Axis, T=Top, B=Bottom,
L=Left, R=Right )
RP1
BL BA BR Individually input result
points
Bounding rectangle Centre of gravity or axis
parallel to cross sec- point, respectively, of the
tion input axes cross section

. The automatically generated result points are always defined in the standard variant of a cross
section and therefore independent of the variant.
S Extreme strains or stresses in the cross section, provided it consists of just one
material, otherwise in the parts of the cross section with a particular material

Extreme stresses are output

for each partial section con-
concrete sisting of a particular material.

All possible polygon corner

points are investigated. The
steel decisive point can change
from section to section and is
not output.

A 2.7.2 Influence Lines

Influence lines are results of influence line load cases (see Ch. A 2.4.4).

To output an influence line the type of moving load still has to be input. One can select
local or global forces or moments in a desired coordinate direction.

STATIKï5 Aï29
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7.3 Construction Stages

STATIK-5 permits the combination of results, which were calculated in different con-
struction stages of a structure, i.e. each load case can be applied for a specific construc-
tion stage and its results can be combined at the end with those of any other load cases.
The structures of the individual construction stages can differ in the following prop-
erties:
S Support conditions
S Nodal connections
S Hinges
S Cross section variants
S Members can be active or passive, but have to be designed accordingly at the begin-
ning

. To work with construction stages a special program option is required.

Aï30 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.1 Introduction
After two short sections dealing with starting the program and opening a new analysis
some examples are provided, which introduce you to the main aspects of the use of
the program. The examples are ordered according to increasing complexity or according
to specially treated topics and are partly developed one from another. Since all users
do not have the 3D option, firstly the examples for plane frames are dealt with and then
those for 3D structures.
It is absolutely necessary that you work through these examples which are intended
as an introduction, before you attempt real projects. You will then be familiar with the
logic of the program and for further details on the use of the program you can always
consult the Help System of STATIK-5, whose frequent use we highly recommend. It
can be called in different ways:
S By clicking on the menu Help" in the menu bar of the program. A list of all available
help documents appears, which one can go into directly. One of these is called Use
of Help". It provides instructions on the use of the help system.
S By pressing the key <F1> you can get specific help on the current action (e.g. input-
ting a point) or on the input element to which the mouse pointer currently points.
S Many of the dialogue windows that appear during the input have their own help
button for information on the corresponding dialogue.

It is assumed that the user has some basic knowledge of the use of the Windows operat-
ing system. This includes the use of the mouse, windows (move, zoom in and out), the
Start" menu, task bar, the clipboard and the Windows-Explorer.
. As in Windows, in general one always works with the left mouse button. Clicking or selecting
a symbol on the screen means: move the mouse pointer onto the symbol and then press briefly
the left mouse button. The right mouse button is only to bring up a context menu to the screen
(see later) in a particular situation.
A detailed description of the Graphics Editor as well as of the CubusViewer is given in
Parts D and C of this manual.

A 3.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples

For all application examples the following presentation conventions hold:

S All actions to be carried out are indented and marked as follows:
" Description of action
S All bold print in the description of an action has to be typed exactly with the follow-
ing exceptions.
S Special keys enclosed in <..> (e.g. <Enter>=<o>, <Esc>, <F1>, etc.)
S The mouse buttons are abbreviated with <LMB> and <RMB> (left and right)
S Buttons on the screen are shown in square brackets (e.g. [Cancel])
S Words in italics like Click, Select, ... are clearly predefined user actions
S An entry to be chosen in a menu is given within apostrophes, separated for multi−
selection by ’>’ (e.g. ’Options’ > ’Language’ > ’German’)

A 3.1.2 Load Examples

The examples described below are stored in your program installation and can be
viewed and loaded using the help system. This applies especially also to examples that

STATIKï5 Aï31
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

are not developed again from scratch, but serve as an initial situation for modifications
and extensions.

When editing a loaded example not the original, but an automatically created copy in
the TEMP folder of Windows is used. The original data therefore cannot be lost and you
can load an example as often as you like.

Loading an example is done as follows:

" Start STATIK-5 directly, as decribed under 1) in the next

chapter and from the menu bar of the program select:
’Help’ > ’Load Examples’ > Name of an example

A 3.2 Starting Program

STATIK−5 can be started in two ways:

1) Starting STATIK-5 2) Starting the Cubus-Explorer

STATIK-5 Cubus-Explorer
In the File" menu: If required introduce a new STA-
choose a recent analysis or call TIK-5-analysis.Open it or an
the Cubus-Explorer existing analysis for editing.

Fig. Aï1 Starting Program

1) By direct execution of the program file STATIK4.EXE, e.g. via the ’Start’ menu of Win-
dows (for standard installation: [Start] > Programs > Cubus > STATIK-5). STATIK-5
responds with an empty window and the following menu-
bar:

Starting in this way is recommended above all if you want to continue editing one
of the recent analyses (these are listed in the ’File’ menu).
2) Using the CubusExplorer. The CubusExplorer is an independent program to manage
analysis with different Cubus programs and is also called via the start menu of Win-
dows. Procedure 2) is described in the next chapter.

Aï32 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.3 Opening an Analysis

Start the CubusExplorer using the Windows start menu. If you are doing this for the first
time, then it will respond as shown left. Click on the ’+’ beside ’My Computer’ and the
response will be as shown on the right.

The CubusExplorer is very similar to the Windows Explorer. The difference is, above
all, that in the left window only those directories are shown that you want and these
are normally those which contain analysis data of Cubus programs. For a detailed
description of the CubusExplorer refer to its ’Help’ menu.
For our examples we want to create a folder called ST4Data"on a harddisk (here D:),
in which we can save our analyses. Basically, you have complete freedom in storing a
folder structure to manage your project and at any time you can reorganise and rename
or move folders.
Click first on the symbol of the desired harddisk and then on the symbol to create folders
and make them visible.
The window that appears shows the direc-
tory structure of the selected harddisk.
You can now select one of the shown
folders or subfolders and using the button
[Select] cause this to be shown in the
CubusExplorer.
However, we want to create a new folder
and select for this purpose the object
(harddisk or folder), where the new folder
should reside - in our case the harddisk
symbol D:. To create a new folder we click

on top right.

A new folder appears at the desired level, which we rename as ST4Data" and then with
the button [Select] we place it in the CubusExplorer.
Back in the CubusExplorer in the display filter you should activate the button for STA-
TIK−5. With the filter setting shown below in the middle window of the CubusExplorer
only STATIK-5 analyses are shown.

STATIKï5 Aï33
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now select the newly created folder and then click

on the button shown on the left to create a new
analysis. Directly below the button there appears
a row of buttons for all installed Cubus-Programs.
Select the symbol for STATIK-5, wherupon in the
middle window of the CubusExplorer a new analy-
sis entry with the standard name ST4-analysis"
appears. Since the name of the new analysis is
already highlighted, you can rename it directly by
typing in an appropriate and descriptive name.
Thus you have now created the analysis folder, and
you can start STATIK-5 with the button [Edit] bot-
tom right in the CubusExplorer.

After opeining a new analysis the dialogue window Analysis Settings", appears which
allows one to set some analysis−specific parameters, above all the text parts, which
appear in the page headers of the printed output as well as the choice of code and the
material types used for concrete and reinforcing steel. Regarding details the help system
provides the necessary information.

Further, after opening a new analysis there is the possibility of importing input data from
a STATIK-3 analysis or a DXF file. For this purpose use Import" in the ’File’ menu.

Aï34 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4 Example1: Portal frame

A 3.4.1 Task

2 8
HEA280
steel
5 kN/m (specified
class)

uprights (col-
umns):
4.6 rectangular cross
section
b x h=0.2 x 0.35
concrete (speci-
fied class)
16 m

Results: - section forces, reactions, bending deflections

edge stresses

Aim: To become acquainted with the general procedure in an analysis. This is

basically the same for more complex analyses.

" Start the program (according to Ch. A 3.2) and open

(according to Ch. A 3.3) a new analysis with the name Ex.

First comes a small dialogue (abbreviation for dialogue window) to describe the analy-
sis. The contents appear partly in the page header of the printed output. The descriptive
text is for the purpose of archiving.

" Fill in the dialogue according to the figure and then click
on [OK].

STATIKï5 Aï35
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now the STATIK-5 window looks as follows:

buttons for tab sheet ’Structure’ as menu bar

printing part of the tab control
print entry
CubusViewer
buttons for
individual Layers

buttons for
graphical edi- layer groups
tor commands

working surface

Undo / Redo

coordinate fields status line

A 3.4.2 Member Input

Now we input the frame structure according to the given task and begin with the left
column.

" Click on the button for the ’Member’ dialogue in the tab
sheet ’Structure’.

The ’Member’ dialogue shown below now appears, in which all properties of the
member to be input have been set. For the sake of clarity these properties have been
spread over several tab sheets, whereby the cross section (CS) as the most important
property (specification always required!) is found on the first tab sheet. Additional prop-
erties can be specified in the other tab sheets.

Aï36 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

tab sheets for special

properties
close dialogue

material selection
specification of (with rolled steel
cross section sections)

selected cross sec- to select cross sec-

tion tions that have already
either been defined or
used in the current
analysis

diagram of selected
cross section

search for members

with specific properties

to create a member
with the set properties gives help on dialogue

In this example we now set the properties only for the cross sections. We leave everyth-
ing else as shown.

With the above combo box a cross section can be selected out of all perviously defined
cross sections. For the definition of a new cross section use the button to the left.
Since we have not defined any cross sections so far, we begin with the CS for the col-
umns:
" Click on this button for the definition of a new cross sec-
tion. Now the dialogue ’Choice of cross section’ appears.
" Change to the register ’cross section library’ which is
used to input user-defined cross sections.

create new parametrized CS

create new FAGUS-CS
edit selected CS
print entry for selected CS
delete selected CS
import CS from other calculations
start the program FAGUS (cross section
editor)

In STATIK-5 there are two different types of user-defined CS: Parametrized CS and
FAGUS-CS. For the most often used regular geometries (e.g. rectangular, T,I and O
shapes) there are predefined parametrized CS avaiable. For irregular shapes or compos-

STATIKï5 Aï37
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

ite sections you can graphically input general CS with the program FAGUS-5. The later
cross sections are called FAGUS−CS.

For the cross section of the column we choose the paramatrized rectangle:

" Click on the button to the left in oder to defined a new

parametrized CS.

" Choose the tab sheet ’Solid’ in the appearing dialog, click
on the icon with the rectangular CS, specify the appro-
preate parameters (see below) and press [OK].

The dialogue ’choice of cross section’ now present the CS list with the newly defined
cross section selected:

" Click on [OK] and the name of the selected CS is assigned to

the CS combo box in the member dialogue:

Aï38 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue, in order to

input the left column member.
The mouse pointer now takes on the form shown on the left and indicates that a point
has to be input. One of the point input methods is to type in its coordinates. We take
the bottom left of the frame as the origin of the X,Z coordinate system, in which X points
to the right and Z upwards.
" Type 0 <o> 0 <o> for the start point
" and 0 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
We input immediately afterwards the second column, which has the same cross section:
" Click again on [Create] and type
16 <o> 0 <o> for the start point and
16 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
For the horizontal member specify a different cross section:
" Click on this button to open the ’choice of CS’ dialog and
change to the tab sheet ’hotrolled profiles’. Here select
the profile ’HEA200’:

Below the tree of the profiles you find (depending on its type) buttons for the rotation
of the profile. Try it out and watch! In contrast to the member orientation specified in
the member dialog, the local coordinate system of the member is not affected by these
rotations (see also context help for the dialog) i.e. the local z−axis remains horizontal.
The selected steel section is shown on the right. The labelled points ’TL’, TA’, ... are
places in which cross section results (e.g. edge stresses) can be obtained.
" Click on [OK], to confirm the selection and to close the
dialog.
" [Create] in the still active ’Member’ dialogue.
To input the member we now grab the existing points of the tops of the columns. The
procedure is explained in the following box.

Box: Point input by snapping

" Select for the start point of the member the top of the left
column and for the end point the corresponding one on
the right

STATIKï5 Aï39
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Point input by snapping (= Select) is done by moving the mouse pointer near to the point to
be snapped until on the upper left of the mouse pointer a small circle is shown; by clicking on
the nearest point to the cross it is snapped.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue ([x] upper right)

The input of member as a geometrical structure is now completed.

A 3.4.3 Userïdefined Cross Sections

In order in the input to assign the members to the given cross sections, they have to
be defined beforehand if they are not taken from the library of rolled steel sections. For
our example we need a rectangular cross section for the columns.
" Click on the button for the input and edit user−defined
cross sections (left in the ’Structure’ tab sheet );the fol-
lowing dialogue appears:
general cross sections parametricised cross sections

buttons to create cross

sections

list of the defined cross sections

" Select the button for a rectangular cross section; call it

RColumn and set the parameter fields for width and
height as required (0.20 x 0.35 m)
" Since no further cross sections have to be defined, click
on [Close] in the dialogue and confirm the change in
cross section

A 3.4.4 Node Input

. Nodes only have to be input if they have special properties like supports, rotated coordinates,
etc..
For the complete structure it only remains to specify the supports. For the most common
support types there are buttons in the ’Structure’ tab sheet, with whose help nodes can
be introduced directly having the corresponding support conditions. For arbitrary sup-
ports (e.g. with springs) and other nodal properties use the ’Node’ dialogue (button
directly beside that for members).
" Click on the button shown for a freely rotational, fixed
displacement (i.e. pin−joint or hinged) support
" Select the bottom of the left column
" Click on the button for a fixed support
" Select the bottom of the right column
If the now completely input structure is not properly centred in the STATIK-5 window

Aï40 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the button shown (Graphics Editor tool on the

left edge of the screen)

Box: Selection of figure detail

Note the button group shown to select the figure detail

draw new filling on/off
zoom out Move figure detail:
zoom in
Hold the <Ctrl>-key depressed and drag the detail with
detail with win- previous detail the left mouse buttonto the desired position.
dow
centre and fill-
ing . Further information on context help (<F1> using one of
the buttons shown)

Box: Undo/Redo

If you have made an incorrect input or several in succession, this is no problem:

With the Undo function (on left edge of window) you can undo stepwise as many changes to graphics objects as
you like (provided the button is active) . Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Z>
With the Redo function changes made using the Undo function can be reversed. Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Y>

STATIKï5 Aï41
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.5 Load Input

" In the tab control change to ’Loads’

If you enter the tabsheet ’Loads’ with no load cases defined yet, a load case for the dead
loads of the whole member structure is generated automatically. If you don’t need this
load case you may delete it as we will do for our example.
" Click on the button shown in order to delete the prede-
fined load case ’EG’
5 kN/m " Click on the button to create a new load case
" Leave unchanged the dialogue that appears and close it
with [OK]

The Load Case Identifier identifies the load case (corresponds to the load case number
in earlier program versions). The Title is purely for descriptive purposes. The correct
Assignment to an Action permits, for simple cases, an automatic creation of design
load specifications.
" Click on the button for constant line loads, and set the
dialogue as shown:

. Since the Z axis points upwards, loads usually have to be input with a negative sign.

Aï42 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create]

The program expects the input of the start and end points of the line load.

" Type 2 <o> 4.6 <o> for the start point and

. It is suggested to input the end point of the load not in absolute coordinates but relative to the
start point. For this purpose we have Relative Input, which you can activate with the key <R>.
Thus the following pair of coordinates is with reference to the start point.

" R8 <o> 0 <o> for the end point

" Close the dialogue

" Click on this button in the ’Loads’ tab sheet, to obtain a

reasonable scale factor for the load display

The input is now complete. The structure should now appear on your screen as shown
below:

How to document a structure with text and figures you will find out in the next example.

STATIKï5 Aï43
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.6 Results

The linear solution of the given load cases is performed automatically. You can begin
viewing the results immediately.

" In the tab control change to ’Results’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Results can be called in portions in any order, whereby the settings in the ’Results’ tab
sheet are worked through sequentially from left to right (Points 1..6) and then the button
(7) for the creation of the required results is pressed:

1 By clicking on the arrow key beside this combo box a hierarchical list with all load cases
appears, with all existing load case combinations, limit state specifications and any addi-
tional specified special analyses. In our example there is nothing to select, since we have
only input one load case.

2 Depending on the setting in (1) here the available output quantities can be selected.
Here, besides the displacements, there are the reactions, section forces and cross section
results.

3 Select here the type of output. Normally the two buttons shown for graphical and
numerical output can be selected.

4 If the output quantity consists of several components (e.g. in the case of section forces),
and if these are not all output together, here the possible components to be selected
are available.

5 For results that are output in member sections a section specification is required. There
is a quick specification valid for all members (left button), by which either the number
of steps per member or a maximum section spacing is specified and an individual sec-
tion specification for design purposes (middle button). By clicking on the right button
the settings for the selected specification type are executed.

. The section specification is used both for the tabular and for the graphical output. For better
quality graphics a specification with a finer section distribution has to be selected.

. For the quick specification, depending on the output quantity, additional sections are auto-
matically created appropriate to the existing loads. For a concentrated load for instance a
discontinuity in the shear force occurs exactly where the load acts.

6 Depending on the settings in the areas (1)..(5) there are other presentation parameters
(e.g. amount of labelling or scale factor for graphics), which can be set in the dialogue
for this button.

With this button the creation and display of the results is started according to the settings
in the areas (1)..(6).

" Try to output all possible results by varying the settings

for the one load case.

Aï44 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Here is a selection of results. The printing of results is discussed in the next example.

My

Vz

extremal stress

STATIKï5 Aï45
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5 Example 2: Framed Lattice Girder

A 3.5.1 Task

1.6

1.2

RHS120/80/6 HEB160
4.6

HEB300

16 m

Load cases: [kN/m]

dead load weight of roof snow left wind left
snow right wind right
dead load
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

oder

Results: - Results for user−defined load case combinations

- Limit state values of different quantities for structural safety verification

Aims: − Basic knowledge of Graphics Editor

− Load input, load case combinations
− Documentation/printing
− Subsystems, limit value results
Special: The frame input in Example 1 serves as a starting point

" Start STATIK-5 directly and open the stored Example 1

with the help command in the menu bar: ’Help’ > ’Load
Examples’ > ’Example 1 (A 3.4)’
In contrast to Example 1, in which only new objects were input, here we also want to
modify existing objects. This is accomplished for all objects following the same so−
called object−orientated procedure:

Box: Object−orientied working procedure

You select the desired object(s), then press the right mouse button to get the context menu showing the functions
that are possible with all the selected objects.
. If you can’t find a function in the context menu, then it may be that you
have also selected objects that don’t go with this function!
Selecting objects is important. Besides clicking with the mouse or opening a window there are some other very useful
selection methods and information to select, which are essential to know about. Therefore read now Chapter B5.2.

This button top left in the STATIK-5 window also makes available more advanced member selection methods.
More about these later in the example.

Aï46 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.2 Modification and Extension of the Member

First we want to adapt the cross sections of the existing members to the new task.
" Select the two column members.

. In order to select by clicking several objects one after another, you have to keep the <Shift>
key pressed, as otherwise with every mouse click previous selections are lost. The quickest
method to use here is opening a window from right to left over the two columns.
" Press the right mouse button (<RMB>)

" Select from the context menu ’Properties’ (top line):

. If another menu appears, you have not selected any object. If ’Properties’ disappears, i.e. is
not available, you have (probably when opening the window) also selected other alien objects.
Click in this case in any empty space, to deselect everything, and begin the selection from
scratch again.

The ’Member’ dialogue appears now, in which the cross section of Example 1 is still set
to HEA280.

" Click on the button to open the CS definition dialog. In

the hotrolled profile tress select ’HEB300’ and press
[OK].
" Click on ’Apply’ (bottom of the ’Member’ dialogue)

. The button [Apply] becomes active, as soon as you change anything in the dialogue. The
number in brackets following ’Apply’ is very helpful. It shows how many objects are selected
(even before the button is active), i.e. to how many objects the changes apply.

Box: Changing the properties of objects

− select an object or several similar objects,

− press the right mouse button
− select from the context menu the line ’Properties’
− in the dialogue that appears change the desired property(-ies)
− click on the button [Apply]

" Change in the same way the cross section name of the
horizontal member to ’HEB160’

Now the new members have to be added. First we input the bottom chord. In order to
learn a new possibility of the Graphics Editor we want to create it by duplicating the
top chord.
" Select the top chord

" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’

The ’Duplicate’ dialogue offers several possibilities for the single or multiple duplication
of objects. For a complete explanation click on the help button [?] of the dialogue.
" Set the dialogue as shown

. With the arrow button in the dialogue one can pick up distances with the mouse, which how-
ever is not yet possible here.

STATIKï5 Aï47
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Preview], and you can see beforehand, how the
program duplicates using you settings.

" If the preview shows what you want select [OK]

Now come the lattice members. We input the first diagonal member, then the neighbour-
ing diagonal. The others can then be generated by duplicating and mirroring (creating
a mirror image).

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select the cross section ’RHS120/80/6’

" [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select as start point of the diagonal member the upper

left end of the column

" Type in (relative input) R1.6<o> −1.2<o>

Box: Relative input of coordinates

Often it is easier to work with relative rather than absolute coordinates. Type in<R> before typing the coordinates
of a point, so that the values do not refer to the origin of the coodinate system, but to the so−called relative point.
The relative point is shown by a small red triangle.Before typing in the coordinate values it can be moved to any exist-
ing point by clicking on it. As default value the program always chooses the last point to be input.

" Once more [Create] for the neighbouring vertical

member with the same cross section.

" As start point select the bottom end point of the diagonal
member.
To construct the the end point their are various possibilities which are shown by the
context menu:

" <RMB> brings up the context menu

The available methods are self−explanatory from the name. For details query the help
system, by moving to the line to be queried and then pressing <F1>. Go quickly through
the list so that you know more or less what possibilities are available. In our case we

Aï48 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

use ’Move mouse in Z direction’. As soon as you gain experience with the Graphics Edi-
tor you will not need the context menu every time but use the short cut directly (key
<Z> ). Such a short cut you know already from the relative input method.
" Select ’Move mouse in Z direction’
You can still move the mouse pointer over the whole working surface. Next to it there
is a fixed mouse pointer, shown as a small black triangle, which can only move in the
Z direction. It shows the position at which a point is introduced by clicking.
symbol for snapping " Move towards the top chord until on the mouse pointer
line
the symbol for snapping to a line is shown (figure), and
then click.
fixedmouse
pointer mouse pointer (cross−
hair)

The left half of the lattice we can now generate by duplicating the first two members
four times:
A B " Select the two members just input (open window from
right to left, as shown).
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’
" Click on this button in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue and grab
the ’Displacement Vector ’ by clicking on the points A and
B.
" Set the number of duplicates to 4
" If the [Preview] is as wanted select [OK]
Since the lattice girder is symmetrical, we can generate the remaining members by mir-
roring:
A " Select all lattice members except that on the axis of sym-
metry, which we will still have to create (open window
B
from right to left within horizontal members)
" <RMB>
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and select from the con-
text menu ’Mirror’ (with <Shift>, so that the original is
not lost when mirroring)
" Click on the points A and B in order to define the axis of
symmetry.
. If no member exists on the desired axis of symmetry, one can be introduced beforehand for this
purpose and deleted afterwards. Any line, even an auxiliary line (see later) can be used as an
axis of symmetry.

STATIKï5 Aï49
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.3 Modification of the Right Support

Whereas the support at the bottom of the column in the first example was fully fixed,
now we want to change it to a pinned support. We could simply delete it (Select,
<Delete>) and create a new one, but we also want to practise the procedure for chang-
ing an object property for a node:

" Select the right support

" <RMB> > ’Attributes’

" Click on the button with the corresponding support type;

then on [Apply] and close the dialogue

With this the input of the structure is finished. Although the program saves data in select-
able intervals, we want now explicitly to make a save, not to lose what has been input.

" Click on the button to save the current state (safety

measure, not absolutely necessary)

We then want to make a complete documentation of the structure, but firstly however
show a very important box on inputting nodes and members:

Aï50 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Box: On inputting nodes and members

Crossing or touching members , if not otherwise specifically required in their attributes, are merged in the points
at which they cross or touch.
There is, mainly for numerical reasons, a minimum member length lmin. This minimum length also applies to elements
of members,which arise as a result of intersection or any other subdivision of the input members. The length lmin can
be adjusted in the menu ’Options >Settings>Tolerances’ if necessary. In view of numerical problems, however, care
should be exercised in this. Even the default settings of the program cannot guarantee numerical stability for all poss-
ible structures. If there are numerical problems the solution module issues a corresponding warning.

Points which lie on top of one another due to rounding errors in the different types of input are not necessarily identical
with respect to their coordinates. There is a tolerance value dtol for the distance between two points, which specifies
whether the points should be regarded as coinciding. This tolerance value too can be changed in the menu ’Options
> Settings’ if one exercises the necessary care.
The same tolerance value dtol also holds for points (nodes or member end points) on members. If the distance of the
point from a member is smaller than dtol,the point lies on the member.
Finally, in the case of space frames dtol is also used by the program to establish if two members intersect in space. For
this to be the case their spacing has to be less than dtol.

A 3.5.4 Documentation of the Structure

An important part of a statical analysis is the complete documentation of the input data.
For our example we want to carry out here the following steps to document the struc-
ture’s data:
S Augment the view of the structure by introducing dimensions as in the task descrip-
tion
S Set the desired content of the figure with the help of the layer button
S Include in the printing list a figure of the structure
S Create a text legend with all structural data and enter it in the printing list
S Call the CubusViewer to have a print preview, to set possible presentation para-
meters and print

Structure Dimensions

On the right edge of the STATIK-5 window is the layer bar. Structural objects of the same
type are drawn in layers, which is also a well known feature of CAD systems. By clicking
on the layer buttons the corresponding layers can be made visible or invisible. Further
details are given below.
If for printing purposes you want to augment the figure with information like dimension
lines or additional labelling, one can use the layer group User", in which the button
for the first user layer is already provided. You can also distribute the additions to the
drawing over different layers, by creating any number of additional user layers using
the context menu of the group header User".
Sometimes it happens that points which one wants to input have to be constructed using
auxiliary Help Points and Help Lines. Such constructions are also carried out in user
layers. Here constructed points can be grabbed during the input of structure objects.
To be able to draw in a user layer, it first has to be made the active layer (do not confuse
this with making a layer visible):
" <RMB> on the button of the existing user layer and then
in the context menu on the line ’active’
Now all drawing tools of the Graphics Editor are active.

STATIKï5 Aï51
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the dimensioning tool

" Fix the direction of the dimension line by selecting the
top or bottom chords

" Click on a position through which the dimension line

should pass (a little distance below the support)

" Click now in sequence on the points that you want to

include in this dimension line, i.e. here on both support
points

" Close the dimension line with <Esc>

" Proceed in the same manner for the three remaining

dimensioning lines in the task description

Try here also the other drawing tools and delete the corresponding ’creations’ using
Undo.

Select Figure Contents with Layer Buttons

As mentioned above, the figure contents can be specified as desired by making the
corresponding layer buttons visible or invisible. Try out the settings and
" Select at the end the settings shown on the left.

Note also the context menus both for the group buttons (structure, surfaces, ...) and
for the layer button buttons (<RMB> click). If you want to know more about the individ-
ual menu items then make use of the help system (<F1> on the corresponding line).

. The program takes care of storing in the corresponding layer for the non-user objects (nodes,
members, loads, results, etc.). Only in the user layers does the user explicitly need to make
the layer active, in which he wants to draw. This is done in the context menu of the correspon-
ding layer. Only one layer can be active at any one time. As soon as one begins to work again
with structural objects, any active user layers are automatically deactivated.
The creation of further user layers is done in the context menu of the group button ’User’.

Enter Figure in Print List

The contents of the graphics area can be sent directly to the printer at any time (left but-
ton) or using the right button entered in the output list for later printing. If one clicks
one of these buttons a dialogue appears, which among other things gives the option,
whether a figure should be created with the complete contents of the graphics area or
with only a part of it. For details on the ’Print entry’ dialogue use its help button.
Here we want to enter a figure of the whole structure:

" Click on the button for a print entry and then on [OK] in
the unchanged ’Print entry’ dialogue

" Turn off the visibility of the dimensioning layers again

Aï52 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Creation of a Structure Legend with Print Entry

" Click on the button for checking the structure (is pre-
requisite for creating a structure legend)

" Click on the button to create a structure legend (top right

in the ’Structure’ tab sheet )

The structure legend, as all text output, is created in a separate window, which looks
as follows:
Buttons for
− printing directely
− craeting a print entry
− copying all tables to
the clipboard
− copying selection
to theclipboard
− searching
− print preview mode
− table attributes
(1) combo box of leg-
ends (here only one)

(2) List of the tables in

the legends selected
under (1) (only those
checked are printed/
entered)

Table selected under

(2)

One can only navigate in this document, as described in the legend of the figure. In the
normal case it contains a legend with one or more tables, as is also the case here.

" Click on the button for the print entry

" Close the text window([x]-button top right)

STATIKï5 Aï53
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Print Preview and Printing with the CubusViewer

Up to now we have only created two print entries, one with the structure figure and
one with the structure legend and now we want to call the CubusViewer, to see how
printing is prepared and how one prints.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
The CubusViewer appears in a separate window and should look approximately as in
the following figure, in which you can also see its most important functions. A detailed
description of the CubusViewer can be found in its ’Help’ menu as well as in Part C of
this manual.
In the menu ’File’ amongst
other things the printer can
be selected
Printing the active entries

Activate / deactivate entries

(presentation and printing)

Page set−up (size, page

header, ...)

Zoom functions for preview

For quick editing of a long

entry list or large files:
− deactivate filling
− deactivate preview
− show figures with reduced
contents

Window with list of print

entries (supports the mov-
ing of lines with the <LMB>
(drag & drop)

Window with preview of

current print entries

Editing the entries in the window with the list is done using the menu ’Entries’ in the
menu bar or using the context menu for the entries shown below. Select one or more
entries and with the <RMB> then call the context menu:
Context menu of the entries:

The menu ’Entries’ still has in addition

(or exclusively, if no entry is selected):

Note the possibility of changing the scale of figures.

" Print the two entries and then close the CubusViewer

Aï54 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.5 Load Input

According to the task description the following 5 load cases have to be input:

Dead load Roof load Snow left Wind left

Snow right Wind right
Dead load of
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

or

Load values in[kN/

m]

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" First we want to delete any existing load cases. Click on

the delete button shown (several times if necessary).

Dead load of Load Case ’Dead Load’

frame structure
" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Fill in the dialogue as follows, then [OK]:

In contrast to Example 1 we set the option field ’For action’ correspondingly for each
load case, which will allow the program to create automatically a limit state specification
(see later).

" Select the button for acceleration loads

. For the automatic generation of body forces, like dead load or statically equivalent earth-
quake loads, accelerations are input. On the basis of the mass/length unit of the member, which
is known for each cross section (also for composite cross sections), STATIK-5 can generate
the corresponding loads.
For the most frequent case of dead load there is a special option field in the dialogue for
acceleration loads, for which an acceleration of +10m/s 2 is given by default. If you would prefer
to use 9.81 or another value, you can change the value accordingly and then save the dialogue
as default for further projects (in the menu bar: ’Options’ > ’Dialogue Settings’ > ’Save as
Default’).
This type of storing functions with most dialogues and can also be carried out directly with
<Ctrl><F9>.

STATIKï5 Aï55
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue for acceleration loads according to the

following graphics

" [Create]

The presentation of the load thus created is in the form of a circular labelling box.

20 Load Case ’Roof Load’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input RL as identifier and Roof Load as title and assign

the load case to the action ’Superimposed DL’ (DL=dead
load).

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −20

" Select the top chord and then click in the dialogue on the
button [Create in Selected]

" Close the dialogue and adjust the scale factor with the
dialogue field shown

16 16
Load Cases ’Snow Load Left and Right’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input SnowL as identifier and Snow Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Snow’

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −16

" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting its starting point at the
left end of the top chord and its end point at the top of
the middle vertical member

" Input the load case ’Snow Load Right’ in the same way

Aï56 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

4..10 4..10 Load Cases ’Wind Load Left and Right’

oder
The most important difference to the snow loads is that the wind load cases are exclus-
ive, i.e. that they cannot occur simultaneously. This is taken into account in that in the
’Load case’ dialogue the control field ’Load case exclusive’ is set.

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input WindL as identifier and Wind Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Wind’. Activate
the control field ’Load case exclusive’:

" Select the button for trapezoidal loads

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’X’ and the load
values to 4 and 10
" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting the bottom and top end
points of the left column

" Input the load case ’Wind Load Right’ in the same way

Box: General hints on inputting loads

Point and line loads are stand−alone objects, which have no direct connection to nodes and members and there-
fore− at least during the input − can also" hang" freely in space. The connection of loads to the structure is carried
out by the program purely geometrically when a load case is checked ( automatically carried out during the
solution). For loads which on checking do not lie exactly" on members or nodes an error message is issued.

Line load Point load

representation

d
start point input load end input of load
of load line line point of point
load line

The load line has to lie exactly on a member axis (or several axes in series), to be accepted when checking is carried
out.
The decisive load line for the point of load application as well as its end points are only visible when the load is
selected.
The spacing for the load representation can be set in the load attributes.
In the same way the load point of a point load has to lie on the member axis or a node, to be accepted when checking
is carried out.

STATIKï5 Aï57
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Documentation of the Load Input

We also want to document the load input using figures and text.
" Select in the list box ’Load Case’ a number of load cases
one after another and make for each one a print entry
" Click on this button in the Load Case tabsheet, to open
the dialogue with the load case list:

This list shows all input load cases with their most important attributes. It also contains
buttons for creating a new load case, for modifying the properties of an existing load
case, for deleting selected load cases, for selecting all empty load cases and for creating
a legend of all existing load cases.
With this button you create a print entry with the list of all load cases (what you see
in the dialogue shown above)
" Select all load cases with <Ctrl>A
" With this button you can create a legend for all selected
load cases
" Examine the result and then make a print entry
" Close the legend window and also the dialogue with the
load case list
We now want to reduce the scale of the load figures in the CubusViewer, since otherwise
these, based on the size of their content, would be much too big when printed.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
" Select an entry with a load case figure, with <RMB> call
the context menu and select there ’Scale’

The pre−setting is on ’Full Page’, which for this figure would give a scale of 1:112. We
want to print the figures with only about half this size.
" Close the ’Scale’ dialogue,
select all load case figures in the list and
with <RMB> call the context menu

Aï58 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set to ’Preset Value’ and in the input field type the value
200, then [OK]

You can see now in the preview that the figures have been drawn correspondingly
smaller.

If we now want to print all entries which concern the load case documentation, then
we have to deactivate the first two entries in the documentation of the structure. Nor-
mally one would print everything together at the end.

" Deactivate the first two entries in the structure docu-

mentation

" Print the active entries

Box: Extended member selection

Besides the general method of selection of the Graphics Editor in STATIK-5 there are also specific selection aids for
members.
With this button (top left in STATIK-5 window) a menu appears with a number of special selection possibilities
for members.
Move the mouse over it and press <F1> for a description.

A 3.5.6 Subsystems

Subsystems (abbreviated in the following to SS) allow one to limit the visibility of the
members and nodes to selected structural parts. As many SS can be defined as desired,
whereby a structure element can belong to several SS. SS do not have any effect on the
statical system, which always comprises the whole structure.

With large systems having hundreds of members, working without the aid of SS is
unthinkable. But also with small systems, as in our example, SS can be very useful for
the output of results.

The definition of the SS can be done at any time and can also be extended and modified
at any time. Normally the SS are defined during the input of the structure, since they
can be very useful there and especially in the input of the load.

We want to introduce the following SS here:

S Columns
S Upper chord
S Lower chord
S Verticals
S Diagonals

STATIKï5 Aï59
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Go into the ’Structure’ tab sheet and click on the button
to define subsystems (top left in the STATIK-5 window)

An SS with all nodes and members not yet assigned to an SS is defined and maintained
by the program automatically. We introduce the partial system ’Columns’:
" Select the button for a new SS

" Fill in the dialogue as shown and then select the two col-
umns
" Click on [+]
The objects belonging to this SS are shown in blue. By selecting new members/nodes
and then clicking on [+] or [−] any objects can be added or removed. In this way existing
SS can also be modified (select desired SS in the dialogue ’Management of Subsystems’
and then [Edit]).
" [OK] to close the SS definition
" Define in the same way the subsystems ’Top Chord’ and
’Bottom Chord’
To define the strut SS we want to become familiar with a new type of member selection.
We begin with the verticals:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Vertical
Members’
" Click on the button for special member selection
" and then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a vertical member
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and click on both col-
umns to deselect them
" Click on [+] and then on [OK]
For the diagonals we proceed in a similar way:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Diagonal
Members’

Aï60 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction

" Click on the first diagonal on the left, to select all

members with this direction and then on [+].

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a diagonal with the other direction, then on [+]
and [OK]

Now the SS has been defined. We want to see a partial view with the top chord and the
columns:

" Activate both SS in the ’SS management’ dialogue and

then [OK]

With this button one can switch at any time between the overall view and the SS view.
In order to change the SS settings, call the ’SS management’ dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï61
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.7 Standard Results

As in Example 1 you can now change to the tab sheet ’Results’ and view all possible
results for all load cases. Besides the load cases you will also find limit value results.
Before asking how this has come about, we want to try out the procedure to view the
results.
" Select the ’Results’ tab sheet and set the combo box
’Results for’ to ’!Ultimate (ULS)’

" Set the rest in the tab sheet, as shown:

" Let the result be calculated and shown

Because of overlapping figures the graphical presentation of results for all members is
sometimes not very helpful. How to overcome this problem is discussed below.
For a calculated envelope result (i.e. design limit state) there are comprehensive inter-
mediate results and, depending on the result type, alo associated components. All of
these values are grouped together in a separate result dialogue, which is opened by
clicking on the button to the left:

E.g. here’s how to check the contribution of the dead load for a calculated envelope
of normal forces:
" Click this button to open the Envelope Value dialogue.
" Open ’Actions’ in the tree and choose the entry ’!T_Dead-
Load N’
" Start the figure generation for the chosen result (i.e. nor-
mal forces due to dead load)
. The Envelope Value dialogue remains open as long as you don’t close it or don’t change set-
tings for the result calculation, which are incompatible to the results in the dialogue. E.g. if
you change the envelope type, the dialogue will automatically be closed and the correspon-
ding button disabled until the new envelope result has been calculated.

Aï62 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Choose ’Envelope values N’ on the top line and let the
program display these results again.
The displayed figure showing the normal force limit values is rather useless, since
everything is drawn one on top of the other. STATIK-5 offers two possibilities of limiting
the results diagram to only some of the members:
S If members or nodes are selected, the results are only displayed for these objects.
This method is suitable for having a quick look at a result anywhere. For a properly
planned output of results it is better to use the next method.
S For a partial system view the results are only drawn for the objects of this view.
Therefore, for a comprehensive graphical output of results for a complex structure
you need a series of subsystems specially prepared for this purpose.
S For 3D structures there is an additional tool to customize the presentation of results:
the working plane. For detailed information see example 3 (A 3.6) of this chapter.
We want to view here once again the above normal force limit values in a partial view
with the columns and the top chord:
" Call the partial system management and activate the SS
’Columns’ and ’Top Chord’, followed by [OK]
" Let the results be displayed once again

Even if the limit value results window is open you can change to the partial system views
and let the results be displayed correspondingly.
The following figure detail shows how the last results figure to be requested should
look approximately:

" Close the limit value results window if it is still open

A 3.5.8 Influencing the Labelling of Results

In the dialogue ’Settings Results Output’ (called using button on left) you can choose

between the three available label types.

The labelling of a figure already produced can still be influenced afterwards. With a
double click on a results diagram (at present a moment line) the following dialogue

STATIKï5 Aï63
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

appears, with which you can extend or reduce the content of labels as desired: Click

on [?] for more detailed information.

An existing label of a results figure (created automatically or by hand) can also be

switched on and off at any time. Click with the <RMB> on the button of the corrrespond-
ing results layer (see Ch. A 3.5.11) and select in the menu ’Labelling Visible’:

Buttons for results layer

A 3.5.9 The Tab Sheet ’Analysis’

Special analyses Limit state specifications

Definition of load case combinations

As you will have already noticed several times before, the functions of the ’Analysis’ tab
sheet are not needed to produce standard results. The three buttons which are available
here serve the following purposes:
With this button one can define a series of special analyses, including analysis according
to 2nd order theory in the basic module of STATIK-5. We will not discuss this further
in this example.
With this button load case combinations with arbitrary factors can be defined, which
then appear in the ’Results’ tab sheet under ’Results for’, and for which the same results
as for individual load cases can be obtained. In contrast to the limit values subsequently
described we are dealing here with fixed load combinations.
This button is used to define the limit state specifications, which permit the determina-
tion of design limit state values, as described in Ch. A2.3.2. If the load cases were
assigned to certain actions when input, e.g. live loads, STATIK-5 automatically creates
a limit state specification called ’!Serviceability (SLS)’ and another called ’!Ultimate
(ULS)’.

Since the code requirements for the loads and load factors to be investigated depend
on many factors, the limit state specifications created by the program can only be used
directly in this way in simple standard cases. In the normal case you have to create your
own specifications, whereby those automatically created can be used as default values.

Load Case Combinations

We want to determine the bending deflections of our structure under all dead loads and
the full snow load. Since these loads only exist as individual load cases, we want now

Aï64 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

to define a corresponding load case combination, for which we can then obtain the
bending deflections as for an individual load case.
" Change to the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and click on the button
for load case combinations

combo box with the

defined load case com-
binations

Adopt-button

Load case window

Input field for load factor

Defined combination

" Click on the button to create a new load case combina-

tion
" The dialogue field ’New Load Combination’ appears; call
the combination ’Full_Load’ and close the dialogue with
[OK]
" Click in the load case window on the load case ’L1’
" Check if there is ’1’ in the input field for the load factor
" Click on the adopt button (with which the selected load
case with the set factor in the combination in the right
window is adopted)
" Proceed in the same way with the other load cases until
the desired combination is obtained
" Document the load case combination by making a print
entry and then close the dialogue
" Change to the ’Results’ tab sheet
" Click on the arrow key in the first combo box

You can now see that in the new additional branch ’Load combinations’ the combina-
tion is also possible:

The maximum bending deflection for this combination should be DZ=−39.50 mm.

Limit State Specifications

We do not want to generate here our own limit state specification, but look in more
detail at the automatically generated specification ’!Ultimate (ULS)’.

STATIKï5 Aï65
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select again the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and here the button
for limit state specifications

combo box with the defined

limit state specifications

List of actions
List of generated haz-
ard scenarios

Inspect or modify the

selected action

As described in Chapter A2.3.2, the design limit state values are determined as the
extreme values of the results of a number of hazard scenarios (analogous terms: design
situations, hazard combinations).
A hazard scenario is the combination of different actions with the corresponding load
factors.
An action, after all, is the simplest case of a load case. However, several load cases
involving unfavourable superposition may participate, as is the case in our example with
the actions ’Snow’ and ’Wind’. Here too the four actions were automatically generated
by the program.
We will look at the action ’Wind’:
" Select the corresponding action line by clicking on
’!T_Wind Load’ and then [Modify]

The ’Specificatio nof action’ dialog is very similar to the dialogue described above for
the load case specification. The difference is simply that the load cases are adopted in

Aï66 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

different ways from the left load case list in the action specification, depending on
whether a load case can, e.g., act in addition to the previous one or alternatively to it.
In our case the action ’!T_Wind Load’ consists either of the load case ’WindL’ or of the
load case ’WindR’. Thus both load cases are mutually exclusive, i.e. in each results point
for each extreme value at most one of the two load cases is considered.

For further details please consult the help buttons of the corresponding dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï67
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.10 Output of the effective load for envelope values

In order to fully reconstruct an envelope value, there is a possibilty to output the list
of the effective load cases for every result value.

We recommend to print out first the list of all envelope specifications involved, showing
all the actions and all load cases and their combinations.

As an example let’s document the effective load for the resulting axial force of the spec-
ification ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’:

" Change to the register ’Results’ and set the output spec-
ifications as follows: ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’,’N’, numerical
output.

" Open the attribute dioalog by pressing this button and

activate the check box ’incl. effective load’.

" Calculate the results.

Two tables have been created:

The first table shows the envelope values and the corresponding hazard szenarios
(=GB):

effective hazard scenario of this row:

In this section for Nxmin the scenario 1 and for Nxmax scenario 2 was effective

The effective load case and load case combinations are listed in the second table:

The effective load cases of all individually contributing actions can be shown as well:
Let’s demonstrate it for the action ’Snow’:
" Click on this button in order to open the window of the
envelope value results and choose the action
’!T_Sonw_load_N’

Aï68 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" " Calculate the results (axial force due to action

snow load).

Here two tables are displayes as well, the first showing the resulting values and the sec-
ond table including the effecticve load cases:

A 3.5.11 How to Use the Results Layers

The results figures are also stored in layers. There is a layer group, which includes the
(maximum) 6 last results layers that are identified by monotonically increasing numbers.
Older results figures are deleted. Saving the last pair of results layers serves the following
purposes:
1) You can superimpose" several results figures, by adding the corresponding results
layers. To do this you have to keep the <Shift> key depressed, as otherwise the
already active results layers are deactivated.
2) You can switch back and forth quickly between the last pair of results.
3) Storing graphical results can also be useful for the structure or load input. For the
input of critical vehicle load positions, e.g., you can call up previously calculated
influence lines.

Some relevant comments:

S Limiting to the six last figures was deliberate, since the figures can use up a lot of
memory. This number cannot be changed by the user.
S When saving this results buffer is always deleted. This is also done because of stor-
age economy, and also because loading a new analysis would otherwise take a long
time.
S By making an entry in the output list any number of figures can be stored and looked
at again at any time.

STATIKï5 Aï69
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.6 Example 3: Space Frame

A 3.6.1 Task

HEA200
HEA140
3.86

Intermediate floor:
transverse: HEA160
longitud.: HEA140
4.30

4.34

5.20
4.34
4.34
4.34
4.34 2.50
Y 2.50
Bracing:
all ROR108/5.6
4.34 X 5.00
4.34 5.00
3.50
All columns:
HEA280
Point support

Load Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
cases: only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
[kN/m2] members in Y-direc- members in Y direction) except bracing )
tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

Aims: − 3D aspects
− projection control
− working planes
− surface loads

Prerequisites:
− 3D option of STATIK-5
− basic knowledge of the use of STATIK-5
(i.e. one has already tried out the introductory examples for plane
frames)

" Start STATIK-5 and begin a new analysis

" In the menu ’Options’ > ’Type of structure’ change to

’3D’

Aï70 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

By selecting a 3D structure the program switches automatically to the 3D representation,

in which the buttons for projection control are visible. We do not want to deal here with
projection control.

A 3.6.2 Structure Input

We want to begin with the input of the first cross frame (X,Z plane) and then duplicate
it several times in the Y direction. First we input both outer columns:

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA280 section; as material accept the suggested
structural steel.
Z " [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for large columns),
type in the start and end coordinates:
0 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
X 0 <o> 0 <o> 8.16 <o>
Y [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for small columns),
18.5 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
R0 <o> 0 <o> 5.2 <o> (Relative!)
Close the ’Member’ dialogue

Definition of a Working Plane

In order to better come to grips with a complex structure, there are on the one hand
the subsystems, with which you are already familiar, and in addition with 3D structures
the working planes. In the plane frame mode (of a specific working plane) the visibil-
ity is restricted to this plane and you work two−dimensionally in the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. The view can, as desired, be two or three dimensional.

We want to input the rest of the first transverse frame in the plane frame mode and for
this purpose define the corresponding working plane:

" Click on the button to define the plane (beneath the zoom
tools); the dialogue ’Working Planes’ appears

" Select the button to define a new working plane; the dia-
logue ’New Working Plane’ appears
Z " Assign the name XZ_01
C
B
" Click on the arrow button and select the points A, B and
C (in this order), to define the plane, and then [OK]
X
Y
A " Close the dialogue of the plane definition
With the first point A in the plane definition define the origin of the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. With A,B and C together define the plane and at the same time whether
clockwise or anticlockwise, with which you decide in which direction in the 2D view
you want to view the plane (right hand rule).

After defining the working plane you are in the plane frame mode of this plane. You
2D/3D view
can choose between the 2D and the 3D view. Stay in the 3D view, then only the objects
2D/3D- outside of the plane are invisible and the projection does not change. If you remove
mode
Plane definition
the 3D button, you are in a 2D view and you can only see the objects in the plane.

STATIKï5 Aï71
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Completion of the Frame in the Working Plane

" Switch to the 2D view (click on the active [3D] button)
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
V for the roof beam an HEA200 section
B
A " [Create] the roof beam by selecting the points A and B
" Select the left column
U
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’ ;
In the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the direction vector to (1.0,
0.0) and select ’Spacings’; in the corresponding input
field type the list of spacings
3.5 5 5 2.5;
[OK]
" The four columns should still be selected; <RMB> >
’Trim’; select the roof beam as trim line, to which the col-
umns have to be trimmed
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
for the intermediate floor an HEA160 section
" [Create] (for intermediate floor member);
type the start coordinates:
0 <o> 4.3 <o>
To input the end point press the key U (mouse moved in
U direction) and click on the neighbouring column
" Select as cross section for the bracing an ROR108/5.6 sec-
tion and create the 4 bracing members with [Create] and
select the existing end points
" Select the button for point support
" In order not to have to repeatedly select this button for
the input of several supports, click on the already acti-
>
vated point tool of the Graphics Editor to activate the
repeat mode
" Select all bottom points of the columns and close the
repeat mode with the <Esc> key
" Exit the plane frame mode, whereupon the program
automatically changes to the 3D view

Multiple Copies of the 1st Frame

We now want to duplicate seven times the input frame with its working plane and sup-
ports, but without the bracing, at a uniform spacing of 4.34 m.
" Make sure the working plane layer is visible (i.e. the layer
button shwon is down)
" " Select all objects with <Ctrl>A;
hold the <Shift>-key depressed and click on the bracing
members and on the 3rd column as well as on its support
to delect them
" " <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the vector to 0, 4.34, 0 and
the number of duplicates to 7;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]

Aï72 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

. Don’t forget the Undo function, with which you can go back as many steps as you like, if any-
thing goes wrong.

" Click on the centering button or to be faster on the key

B <F3>, to see the whole figure
C
" Select the bracing crossing points and the 3rd column
with its support in the 1st frame, which are still available
D in the last frame to duplicate
A
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
Grab the vector between the duplicates using the mouse
(e.g. from A to B) and set the number of copies to 1;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]
E

Definition of Further Working Planes

" Duplicate the symbol for the plane XZ_01 (in the point E)
in the Y direction on each column foot
" Call the ’Working plane’ dialogue and define a new plane
called ’Roof’ with the points A (origin), C and B (see
above figure)
" Define in the same way the plane
’YZ_01’ with the points D,C,E
and a plane ’Floor’ for the intermediate floor
" Exit the plane frame mode
" Duplicate the symbol for the plane YZ_01 in the X direc-
tion with the spacings 3.5 5 5 2.5 2.5

Selecting Working Planes

" Open the ’Working plane’ dialogue (if it is no longer
open)

You can see that by duplicating the plane symbols the planes XZ_02, XZ_03, ... and
YZ_02, YZ_03, etc. were generated.
" Click in the dialogue on the plane XZ_01; as a result we
switch to the plane frame mode of this plane;
" Press now the <Arrow Downwards>-key and you will
note that this is an elegant way to go quickly through the
planes in the order of their entry in the dialogue
" Exit the plane frame mode by clicking on the button
shown on the left or by selecting ’No’ in the ’Working
plane’ dialogue
In the ’Working plane’ dialogue therefore one can switch at any time to a specific work-
ing plane. A second possibility is a double−click on a plane frame symbol. The symbols
of course have to be visible to do this, i.e. the corresponding layer button has to be
active.
" Double−click on one of plane symbols, and you get into
in the plane frame mode
" Double−click on the plane symbol in the plane frame
mode, and you are in the 3D mode again

STATIKï5 Aï73
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

The Buttons for Projection Control

In the 3D view, which can be activated at any time with the button shown on the left,
the following buttons to control the projection are always shown. For a more detailed
description look in the context help.

Rotation about a vertical axis Rotation about a vertical axis

Rotation about a horizontal axis Rotation about a horizontal axis

Nearer (point perspective) Further away (point perspective)

Architectonic perspective (point per-
Parallel perspective (axonometry) spective with horizont. viewing direction)
Point perspective Projection direction in X

Projection direction in Y Projection direction in Z

Back to last projection direction for
[X], [Y] or [Z] Projection management

Rendered representation Rendering settings

Step angle when rotating

Completion of the Structure Input

Longitudinal members of the intermediate floor:

" Change to the working plane ’Floor’

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA140

" Create the 2 longitudinal end beams with [Create] and

select the existing end points
C=Mid− B
point A C " Create the middle longitudinal member; to input the
between
A and B starting point use the construction method ’Mid−point
between Two Points’ (key <M>); for the end point use the
<U> and <V> keys, respectively
Longitudinal members in roof plane:

" Change to the working plane ’Roof’ and to the 2D view

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, to make

the member end points of the columns visible, that are
required for the input of the longitudinal members.

. Consult on this occasion the context help for the button for the selection mode.

Aï74 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select in the ’Member’ dialogue the section ’HEA140’

already used

A B
" Create the members after double−clicking on the line tool
C D of the Graphics Editor (A−B, C−D, ...); close with <Esc>;
E Note that the last two members of the 5th frame stop!

F " The missing three members in the middle of the top three
fields (between A−C, C−E and E−F) are best created using
the mid−point construction for the start point and then
with <U> draw a horizontal line to the member on the
extreme right.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue

" Switch off the selection mode for object points again
(point symbols no longer visible).

Trim the last three transverse frames:

" Exit the plane frame mode

" Switch off the layer with the plane symbols

" Set the projection direction to [Z]

" Select all superfluous input columns and supports by

means of a window as shown in the figure

" <RMB> > ’Delete’ or <Delete> key

" Draw the same window again in the opposite direction

(from right to left), to select the three last roof beams
" To select the end points of the members that have to be
moved, draw the window again as shown

. In order to be able to select the end points directly, you could have changed the selection mode
to ’Enable/disbale sSelectability of points of objects’. Then drawing a window according to
the figure would have sufficed. In the present case however the suggested method is quicker.

" Set the projection direction back to the previous inclined

setting

B A " <RMB> > ’Move’

" Select the point A as the point to be moved and place it

on point B by clicking

Comment: If you had done this in the previous projection direc-

tion [Z], the program (unforeseeably) when clicking on B could
also have taken the bottom point of the column. In the projec-
tion it is unambiguous.

STATIKï5 Aï75
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Input of the bracing:

" Switch to the plane ’Roof’ and then to 2D view.

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, so that the
existing points in the plane become visible.
A
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select the cross section
for the braces (ROR108/5.6)

" Double−click on the line tool of the Graphics Editor and

create the brace members in the first field (close with
<Esc>);
Comment: At A there is no point which one could snap to.
For this point to meet the first diagonal, which ends
there, exactly, you have to use the construction method
’Intersection of Two Lines’, which you call using the
B C D <RMB>.

" Select the members of the second cross from below and
duplicate them 6x in the X direction by grabbing the
vector BC

" Select the members of the other 3 crosses and duplicate

them 2x in the X direction by grabbing the vector BD

" Delete the superfluous cross bottom right.

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_01’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_02’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’Floor’ and create the two required
crossed diagonals.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue and switch off the point
selection mode again

" Back to the 3D representation

With this the structure input is completed.

A 3.6.3 Load Input (Surface loads)

Surface loads are created on previously defined surfaces.

" Switch to the tab sheet ’Surfaces’

We first want to create an surface for the roof sheeting and then one for the facade in
the plane YZ .

" Select the button to define a new surface.

Aï76 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue, as shown on the left; as the plane the
already defined plane ’Roof’ in the combo box is selected;

[OK]

" Open the dialogue to define the load−bearing elements

and set them as shown; [OK]

Thereby all members in the U direction in this plane are load−

bearing. For checking purposes they are shown in a different
colour.

" With this button start the input of the surface outline,
which in this case coincides with the structure outline.

Comment: The surface can also jut out over the structure
(overhanging roof) and exhibit polygonal recesses (adjacent
button), which may not touch each other or the outline
" Define a second surface called ’YZ Facade’ and assign it
to the existing plane ’YZ_01’

" Select as load−bearing members all in U and V directions

" Input the outline of the surface (total area without ’Over-
hanging Roof’)

Now follows the input of the three prescribed load cases using surface loads.

[kN/m2] Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
(only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
members in Y direc- members in Y direc- except bracing )
tion) tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" Create the first load case (Identifier: ’WgtRS’); and set to
’Surface Load Case’.

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet now set to surface loads
the surface ’Roof’

STATIKï5 Aï77
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select the button for surface loads and set the dialogue,
as shown

"

" Create the second load case (Identifier: ’Snow’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’Roof’

" Select the button for surface loads and set: ’Projective’,
’Z’, ’uniform’, −2.1

"

" Create the third load case (Identifier: ’Wind’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’YZ Facade’

" Select the button for surface loads and for the linearly
distributed load: deactivate ’Global’, ’X’, ’uniform’ and
3 input load values 1: 0.6, 2: 0.6, 3: 1.2

2 " Click on [Create] and input the load polygon such that it
is suitable for the three load values, i.e. 1−>2−>3−>4 and
4 close polygon

Now the surface loads have been input and everything else is done automatically, i.e.
you can change to the ’Results’ tab sheet and begin inspecting the results.

We want now however to check how STATIK-5 transmits the surface loads to the
members.
" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the button to check all load
cases, whereupon STATIK-5 determines the load transfer.

" Click with <RMB> on the layer symbol of the current

load case and select in the context menu ’Sublayer Vis-
ibility’
" Activate the control field ’Transferred Loads’, whereupon
the created member loads become visible

. You also have the possibility of checking the created line loads numerically with the load case
legend (from the load case list). For these line loads to appear in the legend with the load case
attributes ’Legend including generated loads’ has to be active.
We dispense here with a guided tour" of the results, since this is the same as in Example
2. For the selective inspection of results in the case of 3D systems of course you can
also use working planes. In addition and also in combination with the working planes
there are also the subsystems, which are very useful but whose input is not included
here.

Aï78 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

Part ABasic Module

A 1 Introduction

A 1.1 General

In its basic module STATIK-5 is a computer program for the linear-elastic analysis of gen-
eral three dimensional frame structures according to the theories of first and second
order and despite the variety of possibilities in static modelling and in the evaluation
of results it is characterised by very straightforward and uniform operation.
For users whose needs are not so demanding STATIK-5 is also supplied in a less expens-
ive 2D version, which is limited to plane frames and for which all 3D aspects are omitted,
but otherwise it has the full range of possibilities.
Besides the basic module, the following additional modules are also available:
− Module for the calculation of nonlinear supports and truss members
− Module with a number of special features, like nodal constraints, construction
stages, buckling loads and positioning of cross sections by means of axis points
− Prestressing
− Dynamics (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− Long−term effects
− FAGUS-5 analysis module for various analyses like stress and ultimate load verifica-
tions, design, interaction and moment−curvature diagrams, etc. for reinforced and
prestressed concrete and composite cross sections.

The present manual in its standard version deals with the basic module of STATIK-5
including the 3D extension. Further chapters describing the optional modules are sup-
plied when ordered.
For first contact with STATIK-5 we recommend that one starts with Chapter A 3 Working
with STATIK-5" and goes through the first two examples (Sections A 3.4 and A 3.5) step
by step. One should also peruse Chapter A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling".
STATIK−5 is under continuous development by Cubus AG, so that the suggestions and
wishes of practising engineers are always welcome. In the case of major developments
the user will always be informed about the release of a new program version.
The right is reserved to introduce minor deviations in the program from this manual such
as self−explanatory changes in the dialogue.
STATIK-5 can be used to solve complex structural analysis problems. This by the nature
of things can involve a series of error sources, from statical modelling to data input, from
numerical problems, and even in the interpretation of results. There may also be actual
programming errors, which for such extensive software, despite all the care taken in the
development work, cannot unfortunately be completely excluded. Important prerqui-
sites therefore for the use of STATIK-5 are an adequate technical knowledge and the
checking of results by means of rough calculations and plausibility considerations.
We draw attention here to the Cubus licence agreement, which governs user rights
regarding STATIK-5 as well as to the passage Limited Guarantee", printed below in
Chapter A 1.3.

STATIKï5 Aï1
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

A 1.2 Improvements to STATIK-3

The STATIK software has been completely rewritten and STATIK−5 is a genuine 32 bit
Windows program, which in general keeps to the operating conventions of Windows.
Further, STATIK-5 works in conjunction with the CubusAdministrator, the Cubus-
Explorer and the CubusViewer. These are modules which are employed by all Cubus
programs of the 4th generation and this leads therefore to a standard operation of these
programs. We leave aside here a discussion of the individual aspects of the working
area on the screen. In the following, however, the most important innovations are
described, which affect modelling and methods of analysis.

In the basic module:

− In the nodes of automatically subdivided haunched members, if possible, the
geometry of the cross section is interpolated and not the cross section values, which
can substantially reduce the work of inputting the cross section.
− Automatic transfer of surface loads (distributed loads, line and point loads) to the
frame structure (not relevant in the 2D version).
− Automatic load superposition.
− More general concept for the output of stresses on the boundary including realistic
stress envelopes.
− Program capacity is limited, in effect, only by the hardware.

In the optional modules:

− Nonlinear analysis necessitated by nonlinear support components and nonlinear
truss members.
− Substantial simplifications with regard to construction stages.
− A new feature is that cross sections have an axis point, which lies on the axis of the
member. This permits changes to the cross sections, without having continually to
adjust the member axes. Further, this also allows the correct treatment of structures
which change from one construction stage to the next (especially important for pre-
stressed systems).
− New, graphically−interactive prestressing module.

A 1.3 Limited Guarantee (Excerpt for the Cubus License Agreement)

Limited Guarantee − Cubus guarantees for a period of 1 year from the start of the agree-
ment, that the software functions essentially in accordance with the accompanying
manual and that the hardware module delivered with the software is free of material
and workmanship defects. The agreement starts at the date of the first delivery of a
newly purchased program.

Claims of Purchaser − The complete liability of Cubus, according to purchaser’s

choice, consists of either (a) refunding the money paid or (b) in the repair or the replace-
ment of the software or hardware, which do not fulfil the limited guarantee of Cubus
and are returned to the supplier. This limited guarantee does not apply if the malfunc-
tioning of the software or hardware is due to an accident, to misuse or improper applica-
tion.

No Additional Guarantees − Cubus excludes any further guarantees concerning the

software, the accompanying manuals and the accompanying hardware module.

No Liability for Consequential Damage − Neither Cubus nor other suppliers are liable
to pay any compensation for any kind of loss (completely inclusive of any loss of profit,
interruption to operations, loss of business information or data or any other financial
loss), which arises from the use of a Cubus product or the inability to use this product.

Aï2 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 1 Introduction

In any case the liability of Cubus is limited to the amount of money the purchaser paid
for the product in question.

STATIKï5 Aï3
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.1 Basic Considerations regarding Structural Modelling

A 2.1.1 General information

STATIK−5 is a tool for the analysis of arbitrary three dimensional structures, consisting
of straight (beam) members with constant or linearly varying cross sections. The basic
module allows linear analysis according to the theories of 1st and 2nd order.
The members are rigidly connected to each other at the nodes (exception: hinges at
the ends of (truss) members). Support conditions are introduced at the nodes. Details
on nodes and members are given in the following sections.
The position of the structure in space is defined by coordinates in a Cartesian system
(X,Y,Z) with the right−hand rule, the so−called global coordinate system. For the sake
of simplicity, directions running parallel or perpendicular to the global Z direction are
often called vertical and horizontal directions, respectively. In the representation of the
structure on the computer screen the global Z direction is also taken to be positive in
the upward vertical direction. Therefore a corresponding choice of the global coordi-
nate system is strongly recommended.
For the plane frame case often encountered in practice STATIK-5 provides a special
input mode, which hides the three dimensional aspects. Likewise, the associated output
files only contain the corresponding components. Such plane frames lie in the (X,Z)
plane of the global coordinate system.

RZ

DZ RY
DY DZ

DX
DX
RX RY

Z Z

Y
X
X The 3D frame node has Y The plane frame node has
6 degrees of freedom 3 degrees of freedom

Fig. Aï1 Nodal degrees of freedom

A 2.1.2 Solution method

The program is based on the generalised displacement approach, which basically

involves the following steps:
1) In each node six unknown displacement parameters are introduced. These are the
three displacements (translations) (DX, DY, DZ) and the three rotations (RX, RY, RZ),
which define the displacement of a body in space. They point, when not otherwise
specified, in the directions of the global coordinate system (X, Y, Z), in which also
the position of the structure is defined. All displacement parameters of the whole
structure form the vector A.

Aï4 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) For each member the relationship is determined between the generalised forces at
the ends of the member q and the generalised displacements at the ends of the
member a, the so−called member stiffness matrix k. q and a are also defined in the
global coordinate system.

q +*k@a

3) Likewise, for each member the generalised forces f are determined, which due to
the loads on the member are transmitted to the end nodes. Thus a member transmits
the following forces to the end of the member:

q +*k@a)f

4) If one now considers the whole structure, the forces of all the members connecting
at a particular node are participatory. Their summation leads to the following rela-
tionship:

Qe + * K @ A ) F

Q e is the vector of forces, which are contributed by the connecting members to each
node. It comprises the part that comes from the displacement A of the structure
and the part F from the loading at the ends of the members.
5) Equilibrium requires that the sum of all forces Q acting at a node is zero. If one also
includes the external nodal forces R, then the equilibrium condition is:

Q +*K@A)F)R+ 0

6) One only has to introduce now the boundary conditions, which allow the above
system of equations to be solved for the unkown displacements A.

A 2.1.3 Unstable systems

In order to be able to solve the above system of equations, the determant of the coeffi-
cient matrix must not vanish. Physically this says that the structure must itself be stable
and have stable supports.

Possible reasons for instability

S not enough supports specified
S too many member hinges defined
S members and/or member ends are not connected, which is visually not always
simple to detect
S instability of single (nodal) degrees of freedom
S exceeding of buckling load in 2nd order analysis
S numerical problems

Instabilities cannot be automatically detected by the program. These occure while solv-
ing the equation system and result in a corresponding error message. Finding the cause
of an instability can sometimes be tricky. In this case the context sensitive online help
will give you hints how to find the cause of the instability.

STATIKï5 Aï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2 Members

A 2.2.1 Members, Member Lines and Member Axis

In the case of a member connecting two nodes in a frame structure, we distinguish

between its member line and its member axis, which do not coincide in the case of
eccentric connections.
A structure is built up by inputting member lines. Where the ends of member lines
touch nodes result; these ends are rigidly connected together.

The member axis, on the other hand, is the straight line coinciding with the centre of
gravity or the axis of the effective member section.

member axis SE
member line rigid connec- S member
A
tion eA from
nodes to start member
PA PE PE line
of member PA

normally connected member eccentrically connected member with

the member end points SA and SE

Fig. Aï2 Normal and eccentrically connected members

Intersecting Member Lines

If two member lines intersect the program assumes (if not otherwise specifically
requested), that the members are connected at the point of intersection. For the struc-
tural model a node is automatically introduced at the point of intersection and the
members cut in this way are divided into corresponding smaller members.

. The analysis module in STATIK-5 works with beam elements, connected at the nodes. How-
ever, the input members can consist of a number of beam elements, whereby the subdivision
of a member into beam elementis is carried out automatically by the program, whether it is
because members intersect, because nodes are introduced in the members or because an auto-
matic subdivision is necessary for special analysis methods.

The following figure illustrates the automatic subdivision into beam elements of input
members:

input members and support nodes member 1

support nodes:

member 3
member 2
automat. subdivided

beam elements 3_2

created by program:
1_1 1_2 1_3 1_4
2_3
3_1
2_2
Fig. Aï3 Members and
beam elements 2_1

Aï6 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.2 Eccentric Member Connections

An eccentric member connection is a rigid connection between the member start node
(i.e. the node to which the start of the member line is connected) and the physical start
of the member, and likewise for the member end point (see H−2). This is a convenient
model for the frequently encountered eccentric member connections. It is much prefer-
able to the introduction of short members with arbitrary cross sections.
. Large eccentricities can lead to extreme conditions of member stiffness and thus to numerical
problems. An exact amount of eccentricity cannot be given here. However, as a rule one should
not exceed values of at most half the member length.
. Eccentric connections should only be introduced where they are of statical relevance, since
they make the comprehension of the model and the interpretation of the results much more
difficult.
Member eccentricities can be specified in two ways:
member end General Specification in Global Coordinates:
member axis The first method involves the input of the vectors of the member end nodes to the
respective member ends in global coordinates. In this way, in principle, every eccentric-
eccentricity vector ity can be defined.
member line
Local Specification:
member end nodes
In cases which can be described in this way, the following type of specification of
member eccentricities is often simpler, especially as well, since with a change of cross
section they do not have to be redone.
We are dealing here with local eccentricities, since these are defined with respect to the
member line. The local x eccentricities along the member line are input explicitly and
those perpendicular to it are given by fixing the position of the member cross section
by means of a anchor point (LEERER MERKER).

z’ z’ z’ y’
Hi y’ Hi y’ E
note: Hi
The automatically gen-
erated anchor points zq S
and their names are S S
identical with the auto- yq zq
matically generated zq yq
result points (see page yq
A−29 )
The automatically generated anchor points Hi are Also in the case of given member
created in the rectangular outline (parallel to cross orientation the selected anchor point
section input system yq,zq) as shown; S is the centre coincides with the member line
of gravity or axis, respectively

z’
y’ member line PE
H

PA
zq
yq
exA
In the cross section of anchor Member placed using anchor point with
point H input by hand local x eccenticity exA at start of member

Fig. Aï4 Local specification of member eccentricities

As already mentioned, the member axis always passes through the centre of gravity or
the cross section or through any defined axis point. If the middle anchor point is
selected, the member axis and the member line coincide (no eccentricities in local y’
and z’ directions). In other cases it will exhibit a corresponding eccentricity.

STATIKï5 Aï7
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

To uniquely define the position of the cross section an x’,y’,z’ coordinate system is intro-
duced; it only has relevance in this connection. It will presently be shown how the local
coordinate system is defined (see Ch. A 2.2.3) with x’ on the member line, whereby no
eccentricities, but any input member orientations have to be considered. The cross sec-
tion is placed as shown in LEERER MERKER, i.e. the yq and zq axis of the cross section
are in the same direction as y’,z’.

If the member axis is positioned in the way described − possibly with different cross
sections at the start and end of the member − and also if any local x eccentricity is taken
into account, the position of the member end point and thus of the member axis is uni-
quely defined. The actual local member coordinate system (see Ch. A 2.2.3) is in this
case also uniquely fixed by the member axis and any specified member orientiation.
Its directions do not necessarily coincide with those of the x’,y’,z’ coordinate system.

With regard to positioning with the anchor point the following points are mentioned:
S Positioning with the aid of anchor points represents in many cases a great simplifica-
tion in the input of the member axis positions.
An example would be members which lie on top of one another, as may be the case
for purlins. When changing the cross section no changes have to be made to the
geometry.
S When preparing the input of the members one should also consider the support
conditions, which can only be formulated in the nodes. These are situated at the
ends of the member lines.
S As for the direct input of eccentricities, there are limits to the automatically generated
eccentricities. For instance, very short members with large eccentricities can lead to
numerical problems.
S One is cautioned, however, because of the simple input possibilities and the realistic
representation not to connect everything eccentrically, if this is not relevant to the
structural model. Understanding the model and interpreting the results is much more
difficult for systems with eccentricities.

Example: Model of a column with an eccentric connection

Column Model

Member Member line

axis (input line)

eccentric con- Member axis

0.25 nection of the = membe line
top member
to the bottom
member Z
ex = −0.25 X

Fig. Aï5 Example of an eccentrically connected member

Aï8 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Subdivision of a Member Line, whose Member is Connected

Eccentrically

member axis SE

eccentric SA eccentric
connection connection

PA
PE
Lm admissible region for Lm
member line subdivision of member line minimum admiss-
ible member length

subdivision
point

the program makes 2 eccentric member

elements out of the subdivided member

Fig. Aï6 Subdivision in the case of eccentric member connection

As a result of the above considerations we have the condition that a member line, whose
member is connected eccentrically, can only be subdivided within the region given in
the above figure and thus may only be cut there as well.
The minimum allowable member length applies for numerical reasons. The value is
predefined by the program. The user, if the necessary care is taken, can make adjust-
ments to the actual conditions in a calculation, but it may never be zero. Thus members
or zero length are excluded.

A 2.2.3 Member Axis and Local Coordinate System

The member axis runs from the member start point SA to the member end point SE.
SE These points are the end points of the member line corrected by any eccentricity vectors.
For quantities related to the member (position and orientation of cross section, hinges,
z
x loads, section forces (alternatively called ’stress−resultant components’ or ’internal
y forces and moments’)...) each member has its own local coordinate system (x,y,z).
Z
SA This has its origin of coordinates at the member start point SA and is conventionally
defined as follows:
Y
x: along member axis, in direction of member end point
X
z: perpendicular to x in a vertical plane through x, pointing towards the positive half
Plane perpendicular
to (X,Y) through SA, space of Zglobal
SE
y: perpendicular to z and x, so that a right hand rule x,y,z system is obtained; thus y
lies in a horizontal plane

These definitions for y and z fail in the case of vertical member axis, for which the local
y axis points in the direction of the global Y and z follows from that.
. The member axis usually coincides with the axis of the centre of gravity of the cross section.
For special cases, however, in the input of the cross section there exists the possibility of defin-
ing an axis point that deviates from the centre of gravity (see Ch. A 2.2.5).
. In the case of symmetrical cross sections the principal axes of the cross section coincide with
the local y,z axes, which does not necessarily have to be the case for general cross sections
(see Ch. A 2.2.5). Therefore hinges, loads and section forces are not defined in every case in
the directions of the principal axes of the cross section .

STATIKï5 Aï9
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.2.4 Rotated Local System (Member Orientation)

In order to obtain a correct position of the cross section (only for space frames), the local
coordinate system, departing from the standard method described A 2.2.3, can be speci-
fied in a position arbitrarily rotated about the member axis. We are dealing with this case
with a variable member orientation. The specification can be done in two ways:
−) by specifying an angle, about which the system is rotated relative to the standard
position about the local x axis
−) by inputting a vector, which together with x defines the local x,y plane; y points in
the same direction as the projection of this vector onto the y axis

. Rolled steel sections can be introduced rotated by a certain angle. This possibility, which also
serves to position the cross section correctly and likewise finds application in plane frames,
has no influence on the definition of the local coordinate system.

A 2.2.5 Member Cross Section and Local Coordinate System

For every prismatic member there is one cross section, but for every haunched member
h there are two. A cross section is defined by the geometry of its parts as well as its material
properties. The input or choice of the cross section offers the following possibilities:
b
1) An (extendable) series of parametricised standard cross sections, like rectangle, T,
..., is available, which is defined by inputting the corresponding parameters.
2) Selection of cross sections from an extensive library of rolled steel sections.
3) Selection of cross sections, which were defined in the cross section module FA-
GUS−5. FAGUS-5 permits the input of arbitrary polygonal cross sections. These may
consist of several partial cross sections with different materials and arbitrary polygo-
nal holes. More information is given in the FAGUS-5 manual.
member cross sec-
tions: If no special axis point is specified in the definition of the cross section (see later), then
ï parametricised the centre of gravity of the cross section coincides with the local x-axis of a member
ï from section library
ï arbitrary (see LEERER MERKER ).
The zq direction of the cross section always corresponds to the local z direction
of the member. For non−symmetrical cross sections this means in general that the
directions of its principal axes are rotated with respect to the local coordinate system.
The program of course has to formulate the stiffness relationships in the directions of
the principal axes. The user, therefore, always works with the local coordinate system
and the necessary transformations are carried out automatically.
zh z yh
z
yq,zq: Input coordinate system
of cross section with the
ß origin Q0
S y y
S y,z: Local coordinate system
zq zq of member
yh,zh: Principal axes of cross
yq yq section
Q0 Q0

Fig. Aï7 Position of cross section in local coordinate system

The required relationships between strain and section force quantities within a member,
which form the basics for the statical analysis, are all formulated with respect to the
centre of gravity and the directions of the principal axes of its cross section.
To determine these relationships the cross section stiffnesses given in Table A−1 are
needed. These are determined automatically by the program for a given cross section
geometry and the materials selected for the cross sections. For special cases these stif-
fness values can also be overwritten for each member individually.

Aï10 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Stiffness Use Determine*)

sdx vx’ = N/sdx E.Ax Ax: cross sectional area

sdy vy’ = Vy/sdy **) G.Ay Ay: reduced shear area
sdz vz’ = Vz/sdz **) G.Az Az: reduced shear area
srx rx’ = T/srx G.Ix Ix: torsional constant
sry r y’ = − My/sry E.I y Iy: moment of inertia about y
srz rz’ = Mz/srz E.Iz Iz: moment of inertia about z

vx’= dv x , ... rx’= drx , ... v: displacement r: rotation

dx dx
N, V, T, M: section forces; E, G: elastic moduli (material properties)
*) For cross sections with several materials one works with a reference material para-
meter and the corresponding ideal cross section values
**) The influence of shear deformation can be switched on or off for
each member individually

Table Aï1 Cross section stiffnesses

. In contrast to earlier program versions, the materials and thus the characteristic values (E
modulus, G modulus) of importance for STATIK-5 can also be specified in the cross section
and do not appear explicitly in the input for STATIK-5. Above all this is advantageous for com-
posite cross sections, whereby one does not have to work by weighting an E modulus defined
in STATIKï5.

Definition of Position of a Cross Section with an Axis Point

. This possibility requires a special program option
If the cross section has an axis point A, then not the centre of gravity, but this axis point
lies on the member axis. Thus a (perhaps additional) eccentricity arises, which is cor-
rectly handled by the program automatically.
Working with an input axis point, which is independent of the centre of gravity, is of
importance above all if a member exhibits different cross sections in different construc-
tion stages. Since the member axes do not change, the correct position of the centre of
gravity can be defined with only one axis point (see LEERER MERKER).

Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2 Constr. stage 1 Constr. stage 2

z z z z

S1 y A y A
y y
S2

Q0
Q0 Q0
Q0
Without the axis point the centre of gravity If an axis point PA is defined (in the cross section input sys-
coincides with the unchanging member axis. tem Q0), then the member axis coincides with it.
The position of the cross section changes ! The position of the cross section remains constant !

Fig. Aï8 Cross sections and axis point

As in the case of directly input eccentricities, these automatically generated eccentricities

are also subject to limitations for numerical reasons. In any case one should restrict one-
self to axis points that lie within the convex envelope of a cross section.
Further, one should remember that the section force results are output with respect to
the axis point. If this is situated far from the centre of gravity, a quick interpretation of
the resulting section forces is difficult, should normal forces be present.

STATIKï5 Aï11
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Members with Changing Cross Section (Haunched)

A member can have either a constant cross section or exhibit different cross sections
at its ends. In the case of different cross sections one speaks of a haunched member.
Regarding the variation of the cross section of haunched members one should note the
following points:
1) Within member elements the cross section values are linear.
2) If input haunched members intersect or if subdivisions are specified for haunched
members for the calculation, then the cross sections are linearly interpolated in the
subdivision points, provided the necessary requirements are fulfilled. Otherwise a
linear variation of cross section values is assumed. One should refer to the FAGUS-5
manual regarding the requirements for interpolation of the cross sections. By way
of example, the following figure shows the stiffness variation in the case of linear
interpolation of the cross section geometry

Rectangular cross section with linearly

member varying height h...2h

Variation of bending stiffness:

Without member subdivision (linear)
With subdivision into 4 member elements
(corresponds here approximately to effec-
tive variation)

Fig. Aï9 Variation of cross section / cross section values

A 2.2.6 Hinges at Member Ends

Members are normally rigidly connected at their end nodes. Analogous to the six
degrees of freedom in a node, at the member ends six possible restraints can be
released. These are the three displacements and three rotations in the local coordinate
system. For a bending hinge in a plane frame in the X,Z plane, for example, the rotation
about the local y axis has to be released.
member hinges SE
SA
PA PE
PA PE

Centrally connected member Eccentrically connected member

Fig. Aï10 Member end hinges

Instead of a normal hinge, which releases the corresponding restraint and transmits no
force or moment, between member ends and member end points an elastic spring can
act.

A hinge cannot be introduced within a member. In this case it is necessary to input more
than one member with member ends at the desired hinge positions.

. When inserting hinges one should ensure that no instabilities arise. The following three pitfalls
exist:
1) The member itself becomes unstable (torsional hinges at both ends of a member element
are automatically corrected by the program).

Aï12 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

2) Nodes can become unstable, if for a displacement degree of freedom none of the connected
members contribute stiffness and the node is not correspondingly supported. Example: all
members are hinged at a node (a special case is given by truss members, which are dealt with
in the next section).
3) Obviously, by introducing too many hinges an instability of a part of the structure or of the
overall system can also be caused.

. Whether a structure is unstable and cannot be analysed according to the selected method
depends on the loading. Instabilities cannot, in principle, be recognised by the program. Only
if the algorithm to solve the system of equations fails is there an indication of a structural or
numerical instability (due to extreme differences in stiffness).

Truss Hinges

A hinge, for which all rotational degrees of freedom and only these are released, is called
here a truss hinge. In STATIK-5 truss hinges are given the following special treatment:

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, then the program recognises it
Basically unstable
nodes are automatically as a truss node and automatically stabilises what are in effect its unstable rotational
stabilised by the pro- degrees of freedom (see also section A 2.3 on nodes). Therefore, such nodes may not
gram be acted upon by moments.

Truss member
Truss Members

Truss members are input as such in STATIK-5. At both ends they have a truss hinge. A
Created member
member, which has the same hinges as a truss member, but is not defined as such, is
elements: not treated as a truss member. If the member line of a truss member is subdivided by
a node or another member, then the member elements that result automatically become
truss member elements. With respect to the hinges these behave as truss members.

G: truss elements

G M G
Fig. Aï11 Instabilityof a part of the structure due to too many hinges?

If the horizontal member in Figure A−11 is input as a truss member, then the system
sketched above is stable, since the member is subdivided into two truss member
elements. Thus in node M only members with truss hinges are connected and its rota-
tional degrees of freedom are eliminated by the program.

If the horizontal member is not input as a truss member, then as a 3D frame the system
is unstable, although the member does not have any additional hinges. Since in the
subdivision of the member no hinges are introduced at M, the rotation of the node is
not stabilised, and the substructure of the horizontal member consisting of two member
elements can freely rotate about its axis.

STATIKï5 Aï13
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3 Nodes

In the analysis model nodes are the points at which the equilibrium conditions are
formulated, leading for the whole structure to the global system of equations. Nodes
are introduced everywhere where member elements connect and in all free member
elements. This is done automatically by the program and in general the nodes are of
no direct interest to the user. Nodes with special attributes, like support conditions,
however, have to be input specifically. The following sections illustrate the cases in
which this is necessary.

A 2.3.1 Nodal Coordinate System

A nodal coordinate system (X’,Y’,Z’) is assigned to every node, whose default direc-
tions correspond to those of the global coordinate system. In this system the displace-
ment degrees of freedom of a node and, thus, also possible nodal loads, support condi-
tions and reactions are defined. In the nodes created by the user the nodal coordinate
system can be rotated arbitrarily. This is meaningful above all in the case of supports
which do not act in global directions.

A 2.3.2 Nodes on a Member Line

If a node is created on a member line, the member for the calculation model is
subdivided into member elements. If no specific attributes are given for such a
member (see below), then it only serves the purpose of subdivision of an input
member. This is probably only seldom of interest, since a member subdivision for
the calculation model alone can be achieved using the member attributes more eas-
ily. A frequent application, however, is the creation of support nodes on a continu-
ous beam, which was input only as a single member.

Fig. Aï12 Support nodes on a continuous beam

A 2.3.3 Support Conditions

Z’ X’ Support conditions can be formulated in the nodes created by the user. To each of
k the six displacement parameters of a support node one of the following three condi-
tions is assigned:
1) Free, i.e. corresponding displacement not restrained
Rotated nodal system
at node k 2) Blocked (fixed), i.e. no displacement possible
Z 3) Elastic (spring support), i.e. a stiffness value defined as force quantity / displace-
ment quantity is specified.

Y X
Here one should note that the directions of the displacement parameters correspond
Global system to the nodal coordinate system (see above).

Aï14 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.3.4 Truss Nodes

If only members with truss hinges connect to a node, the node is designated a truss
node. Its in effect unstable rotational degrees of freedom are eliminated and as a result
it can be acted on by moments.

A 2.3.5 Reference Nodes

There are cases in which an input applies to a specific node. This is the case for example
when scaling the displacements of a load case, if one wants to use them as a predefined
deformation. This is done by assigning a value to a displacement component in a speci-
fied node. For this purpose an input node must be present there, which has an identifier,
to which one can refer.

A 2.3.6 Nodal Constraints

. Requires special program option

The specification of a linear dependency between displacement parameters is called

here a nodal constraint. Typical applications, for example, are rigid connections
between a group of nodes or folding joints.

The constraints are of the form:

S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + factor3 * M3+ ...

(S=slave parameter, i.e. dependent displacement parameter, Mi=master parameter, i.e.

free displacement parameter)

See chapter E 3 for detailed information about nodal constraints.

STATIKï5 Aï15
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4 Loads

Loads are put together in individual load cases, which can be accessed individually or
in combinations in the results output. The following loads are possible:

A 2.4.1 Loads on Nodes and Members

Nodal loads (forces, moments, prescribed displacements and rotations): they act in in
the nodal coordinate directions, i.e. usually in the global coordinate directions.
Member loads (forces, moments, strains, curvatures, accelerations): accelerations are
suitable for determining self-weight or earthquake loads. They act in the global
coordinate directions and the input values are multiplied with the cross section
G masses by the program. The other loads can be concentrated or linearly distributed,
and can also act on a part of a member. Strains and curvatures act in the local coordi-
nate system, but forces and moments can act in the local or in the global coordinate
system.
Influence line loads: Influence lines can be calculated for section, displacement and
support quantities.
Loads due to prestressing are automatically generated at the ends of the tendons by
the prestressing module (not included in the basic module) based on the input pres-
tressing stages.

A 2.4.2 Surface Loads

In the case of 3D structures (space frames), with the exception of the self-weight of the
member, one often has to do with surface loads. Examples are floor loads, roof loads,
facade loads, loads transmitted through a carriageway, pressure loads like wind, water,
etc.. Assigning by hand such loads to the members of the structure is very time−consum-
ing, is a source of errors and is difficult to check. For this purpose STATIK-5 provides
the facility of surface loads, which the program assigns automatically to the desired
members.
In load cases load transmission surfaces (subsequently abbreviated to surfaces) can
be selected and on these arbitrary point loads, line loads and polygonally bounded dis-
tributed loads (designated in STATIK-5 as surface loads) can act. In this connection the
following points should be mentioned:
1) Surfaces are predefined independently of the loads.
2) A surface lies in a plane, is bounded by an arbitrary polygon and can also have
polygonally−shaped openings.
3) Those members must be assigned to a surface, to which the loads are trans-
mitted. In the case of a roof, for instance, this could be the purlins, and in the case
of a grillage all grillage members without any wind bracing, etc. . These members
have to lie in a plane, whereby a small deviation is accepted (tolerance value can
be set).
Important: The members carrying the surface loads are loaded only by forces (no
torsional moments). The transmission of an eccentric load to a single member will
therefor not be possible.
4) Each surface load has a direction (global X,Y,Z or local, i.e. perpendicular to load
surface). In the case of distributed, non−local loads one can specify whether the load
value is projective or effective. By projective one means the load value per unit
length or unit area normal to the direction of loading, and by effective per unit
length or unit area on the loading surface.
5) Line and area loads can be constant or trapezoidally and linearly distributed. For area
loads the plane load distribution is specified by load values at three points.

Aï16 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

6) Parts of a load which overhang the load surface or lie above openings and recesses
are not considered.

The load transfer of surface loads is carried out by means of an automatcally generated
Finite Element plate model, whereby the surface (load transmission surface) forms the
plate with constant thickness and the projection of the load transmission members onto
the surface are the line supports (freely rotating about their axes), on which the plate
is supported. The reactions of this support are in fact the sought member loads, which
are statically equivalent to the input loads. Attention is drawn to the following points:
1) A reduced plate stiffness is assumed over the support lines , so that the influence
of the loads is kept as local as possible − an assumption which one usually makes
in hand calculations.
2) The ratio of plate stiffness to support stiffness has a relatively big influence on the
distribution of the reactions. If it is increased the reactions are more uniformly distrib-
uted (smoother),whereas if it is reduced the reactions vary more strongly and
changes of sign are frequent. This stiffness ratio, designated in the program as the
smoothing factor, can be changed by the user within certain limits.
3) The load distribution is determined on the basis of the vertical components acting
on the plate. For the components in the plane of the plate the same distribution is
assumed. Whether this is permissible in a specific case has to be decided by the user.
For loads which do not deviate by more than 45 degrees from the vector normal to
the loading surface, this assumption is generally adequate.
4) Since no moments are transferred from the surface loads to the load carrying
members, these members must build some grid or stripe system and the surface loads
should lie within such a grid, i.e. the loads should generally be surrounded by load
carrying members. Overhanging loads are possible but the result of the load
transmission should be checked by the user.

A more exact determination of the load transmission would require a very complex
model, which would include the stiffnesses and structural action of the loading surface
(roof sheeting, facade, bridge deck...) as well as that of the overall structure. In this case
this would represent an unjustifiable effort.
The generated member and nodal forces can be inspected both graphically and numeri-
cally. To check the plausibility of the results one should, without fail, look at the
generated loads graphically!
If the automatically generated load transmission does not meet your requirements in
a specific case, then you have no alternative but to input the desired member loads by
hand.

A 2.4.3 Combination Load Cases

Normally one is interested in the design values of results obtained by the superposition
of different load cases with prescribed load factors. These superpositions are performed
by the ’results’ module based, respectively, on the load case or the limit state specifica-
tions and the stored results of the individual load cases.
In cases where the superposition of results is not allowed (analyses based on 2nd order
theory, nonlinear analyses), the analysis has to be carried out using load cases which
incorporate all actions together with the corresponding factors.
For this purpose STATIK-5 provides combination load cases. Here we are dealing with
’normal’ load cases, which are always treated as such, but from the point of view of
input, however, are defined as a combination of other existing load cases (which them-
selves may not be combination load cases).
. Note the difference between combination load cases and load case combinations. The latter
are instructions on how load case results have to be superimposed for the output of results,
provided that the results may be superimposed.

STATIKï5 Aï17
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.4.4 Influence Lines

With STATIK-5 influence lines for displacement and reaction quantities can be calcu-
lated in the nodes as well as for member section forces.

Influence lines are determined by Land’s method. For each influence quantity at a par-
ticular position (e.g. moment My at a certain position on the member) a load case has
to be defined.

The calculated displacements of an influence line load case have to be interpreted

according to the type of moving load (e.g. force in the global Z direction, moment in
the local Y direction, etc.). The type of moving load is not chosen till the results are
output. Thus with an influence line load case different influence lines can be output.

Example of inluence lines for the section force My over the 2nd support:
My

Influence line for moving force Z:

Influence line for moving moment Y:

Aï18 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.5 Solution Methods

The solution method for 1st order theory is described in Ch. A 2.1. The basic module
of STATIK-5 also allows analyses according to linear 2nd order theory. For the following
types of analysis optional modules are available:
− linear stability analyses (buckling loads)
− dynamic analyses (natural vibrations, response spectrum method)
− long−term analyses (creep, shrinkage)
− nonlinear analyses for nonlinear characteristics of support components and truss
members

These methods are described in chapters additional to this manual.

A 2.5.1 Analyses according to 2nd Order Theory

The influence of deviation forces due to normal forces in the structure are considered
in analyses according to 2nd order theory. Beforehand, of course, the normal forces
have to be known (from an analysis according to 1st order theory, which is automati-
cally carried out by the program).

The solution is based on the equation:

Q = −( K + KG (N) ) A
Q : vector of the structure’s nodal forces
K : linear−elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
A : sought nodal displacements of the structure
i.e. the stiffness matrix for 1st order theory is extended by the "geometrical stiffness
matrix", which depends on the normal forces and the geometry.
The 2nd order theory is also valid for only small displacements. It can only be applied
if the actual normal forces in the structure do not differ appreciably from those obtained
from 1st order analysis.

Suitable for 2nd order theory: Unsuitable for 2nd order theory:

Supports mainly due to normal

forces induced by deforma-
tions
(Normal forces of 1st order=0)

Fig. Aï13 Suitable and unsuitable structures for analy-

ses according to 2nd order theory

. The superposition of load case results for 2nd order theory is not permissible!
To simplify dealing with practical cases, however, in STATIK-5 load cases can be defined,
which are a combination (with arbitrary factors) of other load cases. Such combination load
cases correspond to normal load cases and can also be solved therefore according to 2nd order
theory.
Whereas for analysis according to 1st order theory exact formulas can be used, the
determination of the geometrical stiffness matrix is based on discretised assumptions
regarding member deformation (cubic parabolas). The accuracy of an analysis depends

STATIKï5 Aï19
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

on how well the deflected shape due to bending can be approximated by such parab-
olas. This is improved if the members are subdivided by intermediate nodes.

As a basis for a subdivision, which gives sufficient accuracy in practical cases, the follow-
ing suggestion may be adopted:

Prismatic members should be subdivided such that between two points of inflec-
tion of the expected additional deformation due to the effects of 2nd order
theory there are about three members.

Some examples are given below. The multi−storey frame requires no additional subdivi-
sion.

dx

Z
Zfix
X tanZX = dx/h

Fig. Aï14 Member subdivision for analysis Fig. Aï15 Initial deformation due to skew position
according to 2nd order theory

Initial Deformations

For analyses according to 2nd order theory one often has to assume prescribed
imperfections in the structure. This is supported in STATIK-5 by creating and applying
initial deformations, as the imperfections are called here, in different ways.

Initial deformations are coordinate differences, which are added to the ’ideal coordi-
nates of the structure’s nodes, in order to obtain the imperfect structure. The same effect
could be achieved for the analysis and the results, if one defined the structure directly
in the imperfect configuration.

Initial deformations can be generated automatically in two ways:

1) The displacements of a load case or a natural deformation (from a buckling load
analysis) can, if scaled appropriately, be used as an initial deformation. The scaling
is carried out by defining the value of a displacement component in a particular
node.
2) Certain codes require as an imperfection a skew position of the structure. This way
of creating an initial deformation is also supported in STATIK-5. The Z coordinate
of the fixed base plane and the two angles of inclination tanZX and tanZY must be
input (see LEERER MERKER).

. To allow comparison of results of analyses with 1st and 2nd order theories, one can also work
with 1st order theory analysis with initial deformations.

Aï20 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.6 Actions and Limit State Specifications

A 2.6.1 Basic Considerations

The aim of all structural analysis is ultimately the dimensioning of a structure. This is
based on limit states, which requires among other things the selection of design situa-
tions with the associated load cases.

Each load case is characterised by a leading action and a simultaneously acting accom-
panying action and thus consists of a weighted combination of actions.

An experienced engineer can − at least for preliminary dimensioning − often limit the
consideration to a few points and also without much effort can recognize the critical
load cases for the investigated design situations.

The strength of a program however lies in the systematic treatment of numerous sections
or points. For many dimensioning tasks it is best to work with limit values of section
forces, reactions or displacements. These are determined by the Cubus programs on the
basis of limit state specifications, which uniquely describe the combination rules for the
individual loading. How these limit state specifications are arrived at is described below.

A 2.6.2 Overview of the Limit State Specifications

A simple limit state specification at the highest level looks as follows in the programs:

The considered actions are dealt with in the left half of the dialogue, and in the right
half the investigated combinations of these actions with the corresponding combination
factors. How these combinations were obtained is clearly seen here: the permanent ac-
tions ’Dead Load’ and ’Surcharge/Live Loads’ are investigated with the factors Jsup (here
1.35) und Jinf (0.8). In addition there are the variable actions, of which on the one hand
the snow loads as leading action (JQ=1.5) and the wind load as accompanying action
(\0=0.6) and on the other hand the wind loads as leading (JQ=1.5) and the snow loads
as accompanying (\0=0.88) actions are considered. The load and accompanying action
factors depend on
S the code
S the actions
S the design situation
S the limit state under consideration

STATIKï5 Aï21
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The design situation and the limit state are specified on creating a new limit state specifi-
cation by the user .

The list of actions in the left part of the dialogue is created automatically on the basis
of the input loads, each of which is assigned to an action. The right part of the action
combinations can be automatically generated, but also be arbitrarily defined by adding
to, deleting or modifying columns. Regarding automatic generation see Chapter A 2.6.6.

The programs CEDRUS-5 and STATIK-5 automatically create a limit state specification
for the limit state (Type 2) of the ultimate limit state (structural safety) for the standard
design situation.

The actions, which have not yet been discussed in detail, will be treated in the next
chapter.

A 2.6.3 Actions

Each individual load is strictly speaking an action. But as is evident from the previous
chapter, the term ’Action’ is defined more narrowly here. Before it is defined precisely,
the following terms are clearly defined once again:
Loads: As loads all elementary load elements are meant, which are available in a pro-
gram as actions on a structure (see also above in A 2.6.1).
Examples: concentrated loads, line loads, etc.
Loads are always summed up together in loadings (see below).
Loadings are a type of container for individual loads. On the load side they represent
the basic unit for which results can be calculated, and also from which actions are
formed.

Definition of the term ’Action’

Actions are loadings summed to form the individual categories like dead loads, live
loads, wind loads, snow loads, etc., which then finally are combined to form action
combinations in the limit state specification.

How actions are formed

During input new loadings are always assigned to an action category. Thereby the most
important categories available in the codes for the chosen structural type can be selec-
ted, whereby the user can also define his/her own categories.

All loadings assigned to an action category comprise together an action. One is still free
to choose how the loadings interact to form an action, i.e. whether e.g. they can act
together or are mutually exclusive. The corresponding specification is called an action
specification and is treated in detail later.

Aï22 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

The Dialogue with the List of Actions

In order that on the one hand one has an overview of the actions that can arise in an
analysis with their properties and on the other hand to be able to define ones own ac-
tions, the programs have been provided with a special dialogue:
Load factors and
combination factors

Code prescribed
action categories
(cannot be chan-
ged)

Actions created
by user

The Properties of an Action

Action type
For an action type there are the following selection possibilities: ’permanent’, ’variable’,
’prestressing’, ’accidental’ or ’undefined. The type influences the way in which action
combinations are formed in the limit state specification.

Load Factors and Combination Factors

To each action category there belong load factors and, depending on the type, combina-
tion factors. In the case of the categories prescribed in the codes these values cannot
be modified in the dialogue. If this is necessary a user−defined action must be defined.

Action Sets and Action Groups

Several actions can together form an action set (e.g. several load models for a bridge).
Such actions are not considered separately in forming the action combination, but the
set appears as a whole in an action combination (e.g. as leading or accompanying ac-
tion).
The codes speak in this connection of action groups. This term is also supported in
a general sense in the Cubus programs. By it is understood the combinations, in which
the actions of a set have to be differentiated.
Example: The vertical and the horizontal live loads of a road bridge should be able to
occur as follows:
1) vertical loads full, without horizontal loads,
2) vertical loads * 0.75, horizontal loads full.
Solution: The loads are defined by two actions, which together form a set. The set ap-
pears in two so called action groups with the following combination factors,: (1,0) and
(0.75,1).
Which combinations should together form a set is specified in the above action dialo-
gue. All actions which have the same names in the Set column form together an action
set.

The Action Specification

To the full definition of an action there belongs the combination specification for the
participating loadings. Whereas permanent actions often consist of just one loading, for

STATIKï5 Aï23
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

variable actions a complicated superposition may be necessaray. Take for example as

an action the live loads acting on a multispan beam, for which loads have to be conside-
red in an unfavourable position in the individual spans and in addition with a vehicle
load in different positions.

One can imagine as a simple combination scheme − denoted here by E1 − the compari-
son of all possible loading combinations. This may be represented in a loading scheme
sequence as follows:
Action = Loading combination
( E1 )
or

where
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )
( E1 )

Example: Spans with unfavourably applied live load for a three span beam

A B C

3 loadings A, B and C are introduced for the individual spans.

The specification of the action Live Load according to the scheme E1is:

A or B or C or AB or AC or BC or ABC

In the case of a five span beam one would already have 31 load case combinations to
compare one with another. If two spans and perhaps a vehicle load in n possible posi-
tions were added, then the user would find it rather challenging in terms of combinato-
rial analysis and soon lose track of the number of loading combinations.

According on the other hand to the extended superposition scheme − denoted here
by E2 − a compact and clear definition of all possible loadings is possible. This is best
illustrated in a loading scheme sequence:

Action = permanent Loading step ( E2 )

optional

wobei: plus

Loading step = Loading combination

or
Loading combination = Loading ( * factor )

The scheme is based on an unconditional (permanent) or optional superposition of loa-

ding steps. In contrast to the scheme E1, no complete loading combinations are descri-
bed, but instead there is an instruction on how the results have to be superimposed in
forming the limit values and how the limit values are formed.

From optional loading steps the value of the result for an extreme value in a point is
only considered if it is decisive, that is the extreme value is increasedby the correspon-
ding amount. Thus a positive value increases a maximum value and a negative one de-
creases a minimum value.

A loading step consists in the simple case of a single loading or of a loading combina-
tion. It can however also consist of a series of loadings or loading combinations, of
which only one can occur at any one time (e.g. different vehicle positions). In this case,
in the evaluation of the loading step there is in each point a minimum and a maximum
value of the considered result quantity.

The specification for the above example for scheme E2 is:

Aï24 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A plus B plus C
In the case of a five span beam with loading in the spans A,B,C,D,E and an additional
vehicle in 9 positions (a,b,c,..,i) the specification is:
A plus B plus C plus D plus E plus a or b or c or d or e
or f or g or h or i

The user can specify an arbitrary number of actions following the superposition scheme
E2.

. The scheme E1 is contained in E2 as a special case (without ’PERMANENT’ and ’PLUS’).

Automaticallyïgenerated Action Specifications

The programs automatically create for each action (exception: prestressing actions) an
action specification according to the folowing rules:

Permanent actions: all associated loadings are added up. Such an action consists the-
refore of a fixed loading combination.

Variable actions: Each loading that is assigned to a variable action is also given during
input the superposition attribute, ’additive’ or ’exclusive’. Additive loadings (a1,a2,...)
can occur simultaneously, exclusive (e1,e2,...) are mutually exclusive (e.g. vehicle in
different positions). These actions are formed corresponding to the superposition
scheme E2 described above as follows:

a1 plus a2 plus a3 plus . . . plus e1 or e2 or e3 or ...

In cases, which are not covered by this simple rule, the specification must be done ma-
nually.
In the programs these specifications are performed in a dialogue, which looks as follows
and is self−explanatory:

A 2.6.4 Limit Values of nonlinearlyïdetermined Results

When using loading combinations or the specification ’plus’ in the above schemes the
programs superimpose results that were obtained for the participating loadings. Such

STATIKï5 Aï25
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

superpositions however are not permitted in nonlinear analyses as well as those obtai-
ned by second order theory.
In order nevertheless to obtain useful limit values for such cases, one has to consider
the following points:
S One has to limit oneself to a single action, so that in the limit state specification no
action combinations result,
S In the specification of the single action one may only use the superposition scheme
E1, that is only B1 OR B2 OR B3 ... , whereby the B1 may only be single loadings.
In order nevertheless to be able to work with the input loadings, the programs pro-
vide the combination loadings. Here the loadings are combined before the analysis
with the necessary factors to form a new loading, which is then equivalent to a nor-
mal loading (see Ch. A 2.4.3).

A 2.6.5 Limit State Specifications with Action Sets

Working with action sets is necessary or recommendable when all loading configura-
tions of an action cannot be obtained or only with a lot of effort using the superposition
scheme described above for action specifications. This case is certainly necessary for
the following example:

Excerpt from the dialo-

gue ’Actions’

The automatically generated action combina-

tions each consider the action set with the
two defined groups (lower dialogue)

In the case of a multi−span bridge, the action Road Traffic Loading with the condition
that it must be considered in the two above groups, could scarcely be specified without
dividing it into two separate sub−actions. This way of handling the problem also gives
a better overview, as one can follow more easily what has actually been done.

A 2.6.6 Automatic Generation of Action Combinations

Depending on the design situation and the limit state, for which a limit state specifica-
tion is foreseen, the action combinations can be automatically generated.

Aï26 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

They are formed according to the following scheme (code−dependent), whereby it is

assumed that an action is always defined in the same way as a leading action, as also
an accompanying action. The correctness of the hazard scenarios formed in this way
has always to be checked in each case by the engineer and if necessary adapted to the
actual requirements.

Eurocode/E-DIN:

Basic combination (without accidental loading):

Sd + ȍg G,j ƪ
@ G k,j ) gQ,1 Q k,1 ) ȍy
iu1
0,i ƫ
@ Qk,i () g p @ Pk)

Accidental action combination:

S d,A + ȍG k,j ) Ad ) y1,1 @ Q k,1 ) ȍy 2,i @ Q k,i() g p @ P k)

iu1

Gk : char. values of the permanent loads (actions dead load, surcharges)

Qk,1 ,Qk,i : char. value of the first or further varaiable actions
Pk : prestressing
Ad : design value of the accidental action
g G : partial factors for permanent actions (1.35 and 1.0)
g Q : partial factors for varaible actions
g P : partial factors for actions due to prestressing
y 0, y1, y 2 : combinationvalues for occasional, frequent and quasi−perm. actions.

SIA 260:

Standard design situation

E d + E(gGG k, gPP k , g Q1 Q kl , y0i Qki) (4.4.3.4)

g G : load factor for permanent actions

Gk : characteristic value of the permanent action
g P : load factor for prestressing actions
Pk : characteristic value of the prestressing action
g Q : load factors for variable actions
Qk : characteristic value of a variable action
y 0 : reduction factors for variable actions

Note: For a variable accompanying action y 0i Qki (the decisive one) is considered.

Accidental design situation

E d + E(G k, P k , A d, y2i Q ki) (4.4.3.5)

Ad : design value of the accidental action

y 2i : load factor for the accompanying action i

STATIKï5 Aï27
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7 Results

A 2.7.1 Load Case Results

For individual load cases or fixed combinations of load cases support reactions can
be obtained in the nodes together with displacements, section forces and section
results (e.g. edge stresses) in arbitrary member sections.

Reactions
In the case of completely fixed nodes for space frames there are 6 reaction quantities,
3 reaction forces and 3 fixed−end moments. In the case of plane frames there are 2 reac-
tion forces and 1 fixed−end moment. These are always defined in the nodal coordinate
system (see page A−14), which without any explicit specification corresponds to the
global coordinate system.
For the output of the sums of the reaction forces the forces are transformed into the
global system.

Displacements
For load cases and load case combinations two types of displacement results can be
requested. These are the displacements of the nodes, which are only produced in a
numerical form and member displacements, which can be output in any member sec-
tions and also presented graphically.
Nodal displacements: In the case of space frames for completely fixed nodes there
are 6 displacement quantities, 3 displacement components and 3 rotation components.
In the case of plane frames there are 2 displacement components and 1 rotation. These
are always defined in the nodal coordinate system (see page A−14), which without any
explicit specification corresponds to the global coordinate system. If one wishes to have
nodal displacement results in particular directions, then the nodal coordinate system
can be selected accordingly during the input of the structure. Normally, especially
because of graphical output, one would prefer to request member displacements.
Member displacements: These have the same components as the nodal displace-
ments, but in contrast to them, however, they are always output in the global coordinate
system and can be requested for any member section. In contrast to earlier program ver-
sions it is therefore no longer necessary to introduce a node everywhere where one
wants to have displacement results (say in the mid−point of a member). This also allows
the creation of correct displacement figures.

Section Forces
z
centre of gravity
Mz or axis point of
cross section
member start y
Vy
N
My T
Fig. Aï16 Section force definition Vz x

Section forces in space frames have the 6 components shown in LEERER MERKER. As
shown, they act positively on the section boundary. In the case of plane frames there
are 3 section forces, namely N, Vz, My.

Aï28 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

Section forces are always defined in the member’s own local coordinate system (see page
A−9 ).

. In order to be able in each case to interpret the section forces correctly the user is reminded
that the member axis, i.e. the local x axis, can differ from the centre of gravity of the member
(if the cross section was provided with an axis point) and that the local y and z axes can differ
from the direction of the principal axes of the cross section (for unsymmetrical cross sections).

Cross Section Results / Edge Stresses

For a homogeneous cross section the following calculated strain and stress results can
be obtained:
S Strains and stresses at arbitrary points in the cross section. Besides the auto-
matically prescribed points shown in the figure below, arbitrary points can be
defined in the cross section. Results in points of the same name have their own col-
umn in the tabular output and can be presented graphically as well. Comparable
result points in different cross sections should therefore have the same names.

TL TA TR
Automatically generated
RP2 result points with their pre-
AL A AR scribed names
(A=Axis, T=Top, B=Bottom,
L=Left, R=Right )
RP1
BL BA BR Individually input result
points
Bounding rectangle Centre of gravity or axis
parallel to cross sec- point, respectively, of the
tion input axes cross section

. The automatically generated result points are always defined in the standard variant of a cross
section and therefore independent of the variant.
S Extreme strains or stresses in the cross section, provided it consists of just one
material, otherwise in the parts of the cross section with a particular material

Extreme stresses are output

for each partial section con-
concrete sisting of a particular material.

All possible polygon corner

points are investigated. The
steel decisive point can change
from section to section and is
not output.

A 2.7.2 Influence Lines

Influence lines are results of influence line load cases (see Ch. A 2.4.4).

To output an influence line the type of moving load still has to be input. One can select
local or global forces or moments in a desired coordinate direction.

STATIKï5 Aï29
Part A Basic Module A 2 Basic Theory and Modelling

A 2.7.3 Construction Stages

STATIK-5 permits the combination of results, which were calculated in different con-
struction stages of a structure, i.e. each load case can be applied for a specific construc-
tion stage and its results can be combined at the end with those of any other load cases.
The structures of the individual construction stages can differ in the following prop-
erties:
S Support conditions
S Nodal connections
S Hinges
S Cross section variants
S Members can be active or passive, but have to be designed accordingly at the begin-
ning

. To work with construction stages a special program option is required.

Aï30 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.1 Introduction
After two short sections dealing with starting the program and opening a new analysis
some examples are provided, which introduce you to the main aspects of the use of
the program. The examples are ordered according to increasing complexity or according
to specially treated topics and are partly developed one from another. Since all users
do not have the 3D option, firstly the examples for plane frames are dealt with and then
those for 3D structures.
It is absolutely necessary that you work through these examples which are intended
as an introduction, before you attempt real projects. You will then be familiar with the
logic of the program and for further details on the use of the program you can always
consult the Help System of STATIK-5, whose frequent use we highly recommend. It
can be called in different ways:
S By clicking on the menu Help" in the menu bar of the program. A list of all available
help documents appears, which one can go into directly. One of these is called Use
of Help". It provides instructions on the use of the help system.
S By pressing the key <F1> you can get specific help on the current action (e.g. input-
ting a point) or on the input element to which the mouse pointer currently points.
S Many of the dialogue windows that appear during the input have their own help
button for information on the corresponding dialogue.

It is assumed that the user has some basic knowledge of the use of the Windows operat-
ing system. This includes the use of the mouse, windows (move, zoom in and out), the
Start" menu, task bar, the clipboard and the Windows-Explorer.
. As in Windows, in general one always works with the left mouse button. Clicking or selecting
a symbol on the screen means: move the mouse pointer onto the symbol and then press briefly
the left mouse button. The right mouse button is only to bring up a context menu to the screen
(see later) in a particular situation.
A detailed description of the Graphics Editor as well as of the CubusViewer is given in
Parts D and C of this manual.

A 3.1.1 Presentation Conventions for the Examples

For all application examples the following presentation conventions hold:

S All actions to be carried out are indented and marked as follows:
" Description of action
S All bold print in the description of an action has to be typed exactly with the follow-
ing exceptions.
S Special keys enclosed in <..> (e.g. <Enter>=<o>, <Esc>, <F1>, etc.)
S The mouse buttons are abbreviated with <LMB> and <RMB> (left and right)
S Buttons on the screen are shown in square brackets (e.g. [Cancel])
S Words in italics like Click, Select, ... are clearly predefined user actions
S An entry to be chosen in a menu is given within apostrophes, separated for multi−
selection by ’>’ (e.g. ’Options’ > ’Language’ > ’German’)

A 3.1.2 Load Examples

The examples described below are stored in your program installation and can be
viewed and loaded using the help system. This applies especially also to examples that

STATIKï5 Aï31
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

are not developed again from scratch, but serve as an initial situation for modifications
and extensions.

When editing a loaded example not the original, but an automatically created copy in
the TEMP folder of Windows is used. The original data therefore cannot be lost and you
can load an example as often as you like.

Loading an example is done as follows:

" Start STATIK-5 directly, as decribed under 1) in the next

chapter and from the menu bar of the program select:
’Help’ > ’Load Examples’ > Name of an example

A 3.2 Starting Program

STATIK−5 can be started in two ways:

1) Starting STATIK-5 2) Starting the Cubus-Explorer

STATIK-5 Cubus-Explorer
In the File" menu: If required introduce a new STA-
choose a recent analysis or call TIK-5-analysis.Open it or an
the Cubus-Explorer existing analysis for editing.

Fig. Aï1 Starting Program

1) By direct execution of the program file STATIK4.EXE, e.g. via the ’Start’ menu of Win-
dows (for standard installation: [Start] > Programs > Cubus > STATIK-5). STATIK-5
responds with an empty window and the following menu-
bar:

Starting in this way is recommended above all if you want to continue editing one
of the recent analyses (these are listed in the ’File’ menu).
2) Using the CubusExplorer. The CubusExplorer is an independent program to manage
analysis with different Cubus programs and is also called via the start menu of Win-
dows. Procedure 2) is described in the next chapter.

Aï32 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.3 Opening an Analysis

Start the CubusExplorer using the Windows start menu. If you are doing this for the first
time, then it will respond as shown left. Click on the ’+’ beside ’My Computer’ and the
response will be as shown on the right.

The CubusExplorer is very similar to the Windows Explorer. The difference is, above
all, that in the left window only those directories are shown that you want and these
are normally those which contain analysis data of Cubus programs. For a detailed
description of the CubusExplorer refer to its ’Help’ menu.
For our examples we want to create a folder called ST4Data"on a harddisk (here D:),
in which we can save our analyses. Basically, you have complete freedom in storing a
folder structure to manage your project and at any time you can reorganise and rename
or move folders.
Click first on the symbol of the desired harddisk and then on the symbol to create folders
and make them visible.
The window that appears shows the direc-
tory structure of the selected harddisk.
You can now select one of the shown
folders or subfolders and using the button
[Select] cause this to be shown in the
CubusExplorer.
However, we want to create a new folder
and select for this purpose the object
(harddisk or folder), where the new folder
should reside - in our case the harddisk
symbol D:. To create a new folder we click

on top right.

A new folder appears at the desired level, which we rename as ST4Data" and then with
the button [Select] we place it in the CubusExplorer.
Back in the CubusExplorer in the display filter you should activate the button for STA-
TIK−5. With the filter setting shown below in the middle window of the CubusExplorer
only STATIK-5 analyses are shown.

STATIKï5 Aï33
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now select the newly created folder and then click

on the button shown on the left to create a new
analysis. Directly below the button there appears
a row of buttons for all installed Cubus-Programs.
Select the symbol for STATIK-5, wherupon in the
middle window of the CubusExplorer a new analy-
sis entry with the standard name ST4-analysis"
appears. Since the name of the new analysis is
already highlighted, you can rename it directly by
typing in an appropriate and descriptive name.
Thus you have now created the analysis folder, and
you can start STATIK-5 with the button [Edit] bot-
tom right in the CubusExplorer.

After opeining a new analysis the dialogue window Analysis Settings", appears which
allows one to set some analysis−specific parameters, above all the text parts, which
appear in the page headers of the printed output as well as the choice of code and the
material types used for concrete and reinforcing steel. Regarding details the help system
provides the necessary information.

Further, after opening a new analysis there is the possibility of importing input data from
a STATIK-3 analysis or a DXF file. For this purpose use Import" in the ’File’ menu.

Aï34 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4 Example1: Portal frame

A 3.4.1 Task

2 8
HEA280
steel
5 kN/m (specified
class)

uprights (col-
umns):
4.6 rectangular cross
section
b x h=0.2 x 0.35
concrete (speci-
fied class)
16 m

Results: - section forces, reactions, bending deflections

edge stresses

Aim: To become acquainted with the general procedure in an analysis. This is

basically the same for more complex analyses.

" Start the program (according to Ch. A 3.2) and open

(according to Ch. A 3.3) a new analysis with the name Ex.

First comes a small dialogue (abbreviation for dialogue window) to describe the analy-
sis. The contents appear partly in the page header of the printed output. The descriptive
text is for the purpose of archiving.

" Fill in the dialogue according to the figure and then click
on [OK].

STATIKï5 Aï35
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Now the STATIK-5 window looks as follows:

buttons for tab sheet ’Structure’ as menu bar

printing part of the tab control
print entry
CubusViewer
buttons for
individual Layers

buttons for
graphical edi- layer groups
tor commands

working surface

Undo / Redo

coordinate fields status line

A 3.4.2 Member Input

Now we input the frame structure according to the given task and begin with the left
column.

" Click on the button for the ’Member’ dialogue in the tab
sheet ’Structure’.

The ’Member’ dialogue shown below now appears, in which all properties of the
member to be input have been set. For the sake of clarity these properties have been
spread over several tab sheets, whereby the cross section (CS) as the most important
property (specification always required!) is found on the first tab sheet. Additional prop-
erties can be specified in the other tab sheets.

Aï36 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

tab sheets for special

properties
close dialogue

material selection
specification of (with rolled steel
cross section sections)

selected cross sec- to select cross sec-

tion tions that have already
either been defined or
used in the current
analysis

diagram of selected
cross section

search for members

with specific properties

to create a member
with the set properties gives help on dialogue

In this example we now set the properties only for the cross sections. We leave everyth-
ing else as shown.

With the above combo box a cross section can be selected out of all perviously defined
cross sections. For the definition of a new cross section use the button to the left.
Since we have not defined any cross sections so far, we begin with the CS for the col-
umns:
" Click on this button for the definition of a new cross sec-
tion. Now the dialogue ’Choice of cross section’ appears.
" Change to the register ’cross section library’ which is
used to input user-defined cross sections.

create new parametrized CS

create new FAGUS-CS
edit selected CS
print entry for selected CS
delete selected CS
import CS from other calculations
start the program FAGUS (cross section
editor)

In STATIK-5 there are two different types of user-defined CS: Parametrized CS and
FAGUS-CS. For the most often used regular geometries (e.g. rectangular, T,I and O
shapes) there are predefined parametrized CS avaiable. For irregular shapes or compos-

STATIKï5 Aï37
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

ite sections you can graphically input general CS with the program FAGUS-5. The later
cross sections are called FAGUS−CS.

For the cross section of the column we choose the paramatrized rectangle:

" Click on the button to the left in oder to defined a new

parametrized CS.

" Choose the tab sheet ’Solid’ in the appearing dialog, click
on the icon with the rectangular CS, specify the appro-
preate parameters (see below) and press [OK].

The dialogue ’choice of cross section’ now present the CS list with the newly defined
cross section selected:

" Click on [OK] and the name of the selected CS is assigned to

the CS combo box in the member dialogue:

Aï38 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue, in order to

input the left column member.
The mouse pointer now takes on the form shown on the left and indicates that a point
has to be input. One of the point input methods is to type in its coordinates. We take
the bottom left of the frame as the origin of the X,Z coordinate system, in which X points
to the right and Z upwards.
" Type 0 <o> 0 <o> for the start point
" and 0 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
We input immediately afterwards the second column, which has the same cross section:
" Click again on [Create] and type
16 <o> 0 <o> for the start point and
16 <o> 4.6 <o> for the end point of the member
For the horizontal member specify a different cross section:
" Click on this button to open the ’choice of CS’ dialog and
change to the tab sheet ’hotrolled profiles’. Here select
the profile ’HEA200’:

Below the tree of the profiles you find (depending on its type) buttons for the rotation
of the profile. Try it out and watch! In contrast to the member orientation specified in
the member dialog, the local coordinate system of the member is not affected by these
rotations (see also context help for the dialog) i.e. the local z−axis remains horizontal.
The selected steel section is shown on the right. The labelled points ’TL’, TA’, ... are
places in which cross section results (e.g. edge stresses) can be obtained.
" Click on [OK], to confirm the selection and to close the
dialog.
" [Create] in the still active ’Member’ dialogue.
To input the member we now grab the existing points of the tops of the columns. The
procedure is explained in the following box.

Box: Point input by snapping

" Select for the start point of the member the top of the left
column and for the end point the corresponding one on
the right

STATIKï5 Aï39
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Point input by snapping (= Select) is done by moving the mouse pointer near to the point to
be snapped until on the upper left of the mouse pointer a small circle is shown; by clicking on
the nearest point to the cross it is snapped.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue ([x] upper right)

The input of member as a geometrical structure is now completed.

A 3.4.3 Userïdefined Cross Sections

In order in the input to assign the members to the given cross sections, they have to
be defined beforehand if they are not taken from the library of rolled steel sections. For
our example we need a rectangular cross section for the columns.
" Click on the button for the input and edit user−defined
cross sections (left in the ’Structure’ tab sheet );the fol-
lowing dialogue appears:
general cross sections parametricised cross sections

buttons to create cross

sections

list of the defined cross sections

" Select the button for a rectangular cross section; call it

RColumn and set the parameter fields for width and
height as required (0.20 x 0.35 m)
" Since no further cross sections have to be defined, click
on [Close] in the dialogue and confirm the change in
cross section

A 3.4.4 Node Input

. Nodes only have to be input if they have special properties like supports, rotated coordinates,
etc..
For the complete structure it only remains to specify the supports. For the most common
support types there are buttons in the ’Structure’ tab sheet, with whose help nodes can
be introduced directly having the corresponding support conditions. For arbitrary sup-
ports (e.g. with springs) and other nodal properties use the ’Node’ dialogue (button
directly beside that for members).
" Click on the button shown for a freely rotational, fixed
displacement (i.e. pin−joint or hinged) support
" Select the bottom of the left column
" Click on the button for a fixed support
" Select the bottom of the right column
If the now completely input structure is not properly centred in the STATIK-5 window

Aï40 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the button shown (Graphics Editor tool on the

left edge of the screen)

Box: Selection of figure detail

Note the button group shown to select the figure detail

draw new filling on/off
zoom out Move figure detail:
zoom in
Hold the <Ctrl>-key depressed and drag the detail with
detail with win- previous detail the left mouse buttonto the desired position.
dow
centre and fill-
ing . Further information on context help (<F1> using one of
the buttons shown)

Box: Undo/Redo

If you have made an incorrect input or several in succession, this is no problem:

With the Undo function (on left edge of window) you can undo stepwise as many changes to graphics objects as
you like (provided the button is active) . Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Z>
With the Redo function changes made using the Undo function can be reversed. Key combination: <Ctrl>+<Y>

STATIKï5 Aï41
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.5 Load Input

" In the tab control change to ’Loads’

If you enter the tabsheet ’Loads’ with no load cases defined yet, a load case for the dead
loads of the whole member structure is generated automatically. If you don’t need this
load case you may delete it as we will do for our example.
" Click on the button shown in order to delete the prede-
fined load case ’EG’
5 kN/m " Click on the button to create a new load case
" Leave unchanged the dialogue that appears and close it
with [OK]

The Load Case Identifier identifies the load case (corresponds to the load case number
in earlier program versions). The Title is purely for descriptive purposes. The correct
Assignment to an Action permits, for simple cases, an automatic creation of design
load specifications.
" Click on the button for constant line loads, and set the
dialogue as shown:

. Since the Z axis points upwards, loads usually have to be input with a negative sign.

Aï42 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Create]

The program expects the input of the start and end points of the line load.

" Type 2 <o> 4.6 <o> for the start point and

. It is suggested to input the end point of the load not in absolute coordinates but relative to the
start point. For this purpose we have Relative Input, which you can activate with the key <R>.
Thus the following pair of coordinates is with reference to the start point.

" R8 <o> 0 <o> for the end point

" Close the dialogue

" Click on this button in the ’Loads’ tab sheet, to obtain a

reasonable scale factor for the load display

The input is now complete. The structure should now appear on your screen as shown
below:

How to document a structure with text and figures you will find out in the next example.

STATIKï5 Aï43
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.4.6 Results

The linear solution of the given load cases is performed automatically. You can begin
viewing the results immediately.

" In the tab control change to ’Results’

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Results can be called in portions in any order, whereby the settings in the ’Results’ tab
sheet are worked through sequentially from left to right (Points 1..6) and then the button
(7) for the creation of the required results is pressed:

1 By clicking on the arrow key beside this combo box a hierarchical list with all load cases
appears, with all existing load case combinations, limit state specifications and any addi-
tional specified special analyses. In our example there is nothing to select, since we have
only input one load case.

2 Depending on the setting in (1) here the available output quantities can be selected.
Here, besides the displacements, there are the reactions, section forces and cross section
results.

3 Select here the type of output. Normally the two buttons shown for graphical and
numerical output can be selected.

4 If the output quantity consists of several components (e.g. in the case of section forces),
and if these are not all output together, here the possible components to be selected
are available.

5 For results that are output in member sections a section specification is required. There
is a quick specification valid for all members (left button), by which either the number
of steps per member or a maximum section spacing is specified and an individual sec-
tion specification for design purposes (middle button). By clicking on the right button
the settings for the selected specification type are executed.

. The section specification is used both for the tabular and for the graphical output. For better
quality graphics a specification with a finer section distribution has to be selected.

. For the quick specification, depending on the output quantity, additional sections are auto-
matically created appropriate to the existing loads. For a concentrated load for instance a
discontinuity in the shear force occurs exactly where the load acts.

6 Depending on the settings in the areas (1)..(5) there are other presentation parameters
(e.g. amount of labelling or scale factor for graphics), which can be set in the dialogue
for this button.

With this button the creation and display of the results is started according to the settings
in the areas (1)..(6).

" Try to output all possible results by varying the settings

for the one load case.

Aï44 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Here is a selection of results. The printing of results is discussed in the next example.

My

Vz

extremal stress

STATIKï5 Aï45
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5 Example 2: Framed Lattice Girder

A 3.5.1 Task

1.6

1.2

RHS120/80/6 HEB160
4.6

HEB300

16 m

Load cases: [kN/m]

dead load weight of roof snow left wind left
snow right wind right
dead load
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

oder

Results: - Results for user−defined load case combinations

- Limit state values of different quantities for structural safety verification

Aims: − Basic knowledge of Graphics Editor

− Load input, load case combinations
− Documentation/printing
− Subsystems, limit value results
Special: The frame input in Example 1 serves as a starting point

" Start STATIK-5 directly and open the stored Example 1

with the help command in the menu bar: ’Help’ > ’Load
Examples’ > ’Example 1 (A 3.4)’
In contrast to Example 1, in which only new objects were input, here we also want to
modify existing objects. This is accomplished for all objects following the same so−
called object−orientated procedure:

Box: Object−orientied working procedure

You select the desired object(s), then press the right mouse button to get the context menu showing the functions
that are possible with all the selected objects.
. If you can’t find a function in the context menu, then it may be that you
have also selected objects that don’t go with this function!
Selecting objects is important. Besides clicking with the mouse or opening a window there are some other very useful
selection methods and information to select, which are essential to know about. Therefore read now Chapter B5.2.

This button top left in the STATIK-5 window also makes available more advanced member selection methods.
More about these later in the example.

Aï46 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.2 Modification and Extension of the Member

First we want to adapt the cross sections of the existing members to the new task.
" Select the two column members.

. In order to select by clicking several objects one after another, you have to keep the <Shift>
key pressed, as otherwise with every mouse click previous selections are lost. The quickest
method to use here is opening a window from right to left over the two columns.
" Press the right mouse button (<RMB>)

" Select from the context menu ’Properties’ (top line):

. If another menu appears, you have not selected any object. If ’Properties’ disappears, i.e. is
not available, you have (probably when opening the window) also selected other alien objects.
Click in this case in any empty space, to deselect everything, and begin the selection from
scratch again.

The ’Member’ dialogue appears now, in which the cross section of Example 1 is still set
to HEA280.

" Click on the button to open the CS definition dialog. In

the hotrolled profile tress select ’HEB300’ and press
[OK].
" Click on ’Apply’ (bottom of the ’Member’ dialogue)

. The button [Apply] becomes active, as soon as you change anything in the dialogue. The
number in brackets following ’Apply’ is very helpful. It shows how many objects are selected
(even before the button is active), i.e. to how many objects the changes apply.

Box: Changing the properties of objects

− select an object or several similar objects,

− press the right mouse button
− select from the context menu the line ’Properties’
− in the dialogue that appears change the desired property(-ies)
− click on the button [Apply]

" Change in the same way the cross section name of the
horizontal member to ’HEB160’

Now the new members have to be added. First we input the bottom chord. In order to
learn a new possibility of the Graphics Editor we want to create it by duplicating the
top chord.
" Select the top chord

" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’

The ’Duplicate’ dialogue offers several possibilities for the single or multiple duplication
of objects. For a complete explanation click on the help button [?] of the dialogue.
" Set the dialogue as shown

. With the arrow button in the dialogue one can pick up distances with the mouse, which how-
ever is not yet possible here.

STATIKï5 Aï47
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on [Preview], and you can see beforehand, how the
program duplicates using you settings.

" If the preview shows what you want select [OK]

Now come the lattice members. We input the first diagonal member, then the neighbour-
ing diagonal. The others can then be generated by duplicating and mirroring (creating
a mirror image).

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select the cross section ’RHS120/80/6’

" [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue

" Select as start point of the diagonal member the upper

left end of the column

" Type in (relative input) R1.6<o> −1.2<o>

Box: Relative input of coordinates

Often it is easier to work with relative rather than absolute coordinates. Type in<R> before typing the coordinates
of a point, so that the values do not refer to the origin of the coodinate system, but to the so−called relative point.
The relative point is shown by a small red triangle.Before typing in the coordinate values it can be moved to any exist-
ing point by clicking on it. As default value the program always chooses the last point to be input.

" Once more [Create] for the neighbouring vertical

member with the same cross section.

" As start point select the bottom end point of the diagonal
member.
To construct the the end point their are various possibilities which are shown by the
context menu:

" <RMB> brings up the context menu

The available methods are self−explanatory from the name. For details query the help
system, by moving to the line to be queried and then pressing <F1>. Go quickly through
the list so that you know more or less what possibilities are available. In our case we

Aï48 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

use ’Move mouse in Z direction’. As soon as you gain experience with the Graphics Edi-
tor you will not need the context menu every time but use the short cut directly (key
<Z> ). Such a short cut you know already from the relative input method.
" Select ’Move mouse in Z direction’
You can still move the mouse pointer over the whole working surface. Next to it there
is a fixed mouse pointer, shown as a small black triangle, which can only move in the
Z direction. It shows the position at which a point is introduced by clicking.
symbol for snapping " Move towards the top chord until on the mouse pointer
line
the symbol for snapping to a line is shown (figure), and
then click.
fixedmouse
pointer mouse pointer (cross−
hair)

The left half of the lattice we can now generate by duplicating the first two members
four times:
A B " Select the two members just input (open window from
right to left, as shown).
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’
" Click on this button in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue and grab
the ’Displacement Vector ’ by clicking on the points A and
B.
" Set the number of duplicates to 4
" If the [Preview] is as wanted select [OK]
Since the lattice girder is symmetrical, we can generate the remaining members by mir-
roring:
A " Select all lattice members except that on the axis of sym-
metry, which we will still have to create (open window
B
from right to left within horizontal members)
" <RMB>
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and select from the con-
text menu ’Mirror’ (with <Shift>, so that the original is
not lost when mirroring)
" Click on the points A and B in order to define the axis of
symmetry.
. If no member exists on the desired axis of symmetry, one can be introduced beforehand for this
purpose and deleted afterwards. Any line, even an auxiliary line (see later) can be used as an
axis of symmetry.

STATIKï5 Aï49
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.3 Modification of the Right Support

Whereas the support at the bottom of the column in the first example was fully fixed,
now we want to change it to a pinned support. We could simply delete it (Select,
<Delete>) and create a new one, but we also want to practise the procedure for chang-
ing an object property for a node:

" Select the right support

" <RMB> > ’Attributes’

" Click on the button with the corresponding support type;

then on [Apply] and close the dialogue

With this the input of the structure is finished. Although the program saves data in select-
able intervals, we want now explicitly to make a save, not to lose what has been input.

" Click on the button to save the current state (safety

measure, not absolutely necessary)

We then want to make a complete documentation of the structure, but firstly however
show a very important box on inputting nodes and members:

Aï50 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Box: On inputting nodes and members

Crossing or touching members , if not otherwise specifically required in their attributes, are merged in the points
at which they cross or touch.
There is, mainly for numerical reasons, a minimum member length lmin. This minimum length also applies to elements
of members,which arise as a result of intersection or any other subdivision of the input members. The length lmin can
be adjusted in the menu ’Options >Settings>Tolerances’ if necessary. In view of numerical problems, however, care
should be exercised in this. Even the default settings of the program cannot guarantee numerical stability for all poss-
ible structures. If there are numerical problems the solution module issues a corresponding warning.

Points which lie on top of one another due to rounding errors in the different types of input are not necessarily identical
with respect to their coordinates. There is a tolerance value dtol for the distance between two points, which specifies
whether the points should be regarded as coinciding. This tolerance value too can be changed in the menu ’Options
> Settings’ if one exercises the necessary care.
The same tolerance value dtol also holds for points (nodes or member end points) on members. If the distance of the
point from a member is smaller than dtol,the point lies on the member.
Finally, in the case of space frames dtol is also used by the program to establish if two members intersect in space. For
this to be the case their spacing has to be less than dtol.

A 3.5.4 Documentation of the Structure

An important part of a statical analysis is the complete documentation of the input data.
For our example we want to carry out here the following steps to document the struc-
ture’s data:
S Augment the view of the structure by introducing dimensions as in the task descrip-
tion
S Set the desired content of the figure with the help of the layer button
S Include in the printing list a figure of the structure
S Create a text legend with all structural data and enter it in the printing list
S Call the CubusViewer to have a print preview, to set possible presentation para-
meters and print

Structure Dimensions

On the right edge of the STATIK-5 window is the layer bar. Structural objects of the same
type are drawn in layers, which is also a well known feature of CAD systems. By clicking
on the layer buttons the corresponding layers can be made visible or invisible. Further
details are given below.
If for printing purposes you want to augment the figure with information like dimension
lines or additional labelling, one can use the layer group User", in which the button
for the first user layer is already provided. You can also distribute the additions to the
drawing over different layers, by creating any number of additional user layers using
the context menu of the group header User".
Sometimes it happens that points which one wants to input have to be constructed using
auxiliary Help Points and Help Lines. Such constructions are also carried out in user
layers. Here constructed points can be grabbed during the input of structure objects.
To be able to draw in a user layer, it first has to be made the active layer (do not confuse
this with making a layer visible):
" <RMB> on the button of the existing user layer and then
in the context menu on the line ’active’
Now all drawing tools of the Graphics Editor are active.

STATIKï5 Aï51
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Click on the dimensioning tool

" Fix the direction of the dimension line by selecting the
top or bottom chords

" Click on a position through which the dimension line

should pass (a little distance below the support)

" Click now in sequence on the points that you want to

include in this dimension line, i.e. here on both support
points

" Close the dimension line with <Esc>

" Proceed in the same manner for the three remaining

dimensioning lines in the task description

Try here also the other drawing tools and delete the corresponding ’creations’ using
Undo.

Select Figure Contents with Layer Buttons

As mentioned above, the figure contents can be specified as desired by making the
corresponding layer buttons visible or invisible. Try out the settings and
" Select at the end the settings shown on the left.

Note also the context menus both for the group buttons (structure, surfaces, ...) and
for the layer button buttons (<RMB> click). If you want to know more about the individ-
ual menu items then make use of the help system (<F1> on the corresponding line).

. The program takes care of storing in the corresponding layer for the non-user objects (nodes,
members, loads, results, etc.). Only in the user layers does the user explicitly need to make
the layer active, in which he wants to draw. This is done in the context menu of the correspon-
ding layer. Only one layer can be active at any one time. As soon as one begins to work again
with structural objects, any active user layers are automatically deactivated.
The creation of further user layers is done in the context menu of the group button ’User’.

Enter Figure in Print List

The contents of the graphics area can be sent directly to the printer at any time (left but-
ton) or using the right button entered in the output list for later printing. If one clicks
one of these buttons a dialogue appears, which among other things gives the option,
whether a figure should be created with the complete contents of the graphics area or
with only a part of it. For details on the ’Print entry’ dialogue use its help button.
Here we want to enter a figure of the whole structure:

" Click on the button for a print entry and then on [OK] in
the unchanged ’Print entry’ dialogue

" Turn off the visibility of the dimensioning layers again

Aï52 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Creation of a Structure Legend with Print Entry

" Click on the button for checking the structure (is pre-
requisite for creating a structure legend)

" Click on the button to create a structure legend (top right

in the ’Structure’ tab sheet )

The structure legend, as all text output, is created in a separate window, which looks
as follows:
Buttons for
− printing directely
− craeting a print entry
− copying all tables to
the clipboard
− copying selection
to theclipboard
− searching
− print preview mode
− table attributes
(1) combo box of leg-
ends (here only one)

(2) List of the tables in

the legends selected
under (1) (only those
checked are printed/
entered)

Table selected under

(2)

One can only navigate in this document, as described in the legend of the figure. In the
normal case it contains a legend with one or more tables, as is also the case here.

" Click on the button for the print entry

" Close the text window([x]-button top right)

STATIKï5 Aï53
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Print Preview and Printing with the CubusViewer

Up to now we have only created two print entries, one with the structure figure and
one with the structure legend and now we want to call the CubusViewer, to see how
printing is prepared and how one prints.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
The CubusViewer appears in a separate window and should look approximately as in
the following figure, in which you can also see its most important functions. A detailed
description of the CubusViewer can be found in its ’Help’ menu as well as in Part C of
this manual.
In the menu ’File’ amongst
other things the printer can
be selected
Printing the active entries

Activate / deactivate entries

(presentation and printing)

Page set−up (size, page

header, ...)

Zoom functions for preview

For quick editing of a long

entry list or large files:
− deactivate filling
− deactivate preview
− show figures with reduced
contents

Window with list of print

entries (supports the mov-
ing of lines with the <LMB>
(drag & drop)

Window with preview of

current print entries

Editing the entries in the window with the list is done using the menu ’Entries’ in the
menu bar or using the context menu for the entries shown below. Select one or more
entries and with the <RMB> then call the context menu:
Context menu of the entries:

The menu ’Entries’ still has in addition

(or exclusively, if no entry is selected):

Note the possibility of changing the scale of figures.

" Print the two entries and then close the CubusViewer

Aï54 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.5 Load Input

According to the task description the following 5 load cases have to be input:

Dead load Roof load Snow left Wind left

Snow right Wind right
Dead load of
frame structure 20 16 16 4..10 4..10

or

Load values in[kN/

m]

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" First we want to delete any existing load cases. Click on

the delete button shown (several times if necessary).

Dead load of Load Case ’Dead Load’

frame structure
" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Fill in the dialogue as follows, then [OK]:

In contrast to Example 1 we set the option field ’For action’ correspondingly for each
load case, which will allow the program to create automatically a limit state specification
(see later).

" Select the button for acceleration loads

. For the automatic generation of body forces, like dead load or statically equivalent earth-
quake loads, accelerations are input. On the basis of the mass/length unit of the member, which
is known for each cross section (also for composite cross sections), STATIK-5 can generate
the corresponding loads.
For the most frequent case of dead load there is a special option field in the dialogue for
acceleration loads, for which an acceleration of +10m/s 2 is given by default. If you would prefer
to use 9.81 or another value, you can change the value accordingly and then save the dialogue
as default for further projects (in the menu bar: ’Options’ > ’Dialogue Settings’ > ’Save as
Default’).
This type of storing functions with most dialogues and can also be carried out directly with
<Ctrl><F9>.

STATIKï5 Aï55
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue for acceleration loads according to the

following graphics

" [Create]

The presentation of the load thus created is in the form of a circular labelling box.

20 Load Case ’Roof Load’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input RL as identifier and Roof Load as title and assign

the load case to the action ’Superimposed DL’ (DL=dead
load).

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −20

" Select the top chord and then click in the dialogue on the
button [Create in Selected]

" Close the dialogue and adjust the scale factor with the
dialogue field shown

16 16
Load Cases ’Snow Load Left and Right’

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input SnowL as identifier and Snow Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Snow’

" Select the button for uniformly distributed member load

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’Z’ and the load value
to −16

" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting its starting point at the
left end of the top chord and its end point at the top of
the middle vertical member

" Input the load case ’Snow Load Right’ in the same way

Aï56 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

4..10 4..10 Load Cases ’Wind Load Left and Right’

oder
The most important difference to the snow loads is that the wind load cases are exclus-
ive, i.e. that they cannot occur simultaneously. This is taken into account in that in the
’Load case’ dialogue the control field ’Load case exclusive’ is set.

" Select the button to create of a new load case

" Input WindL as identifier and Wind Load Left as title

and assign the load case to the action ’Wind’. Activate
the control field ’Load case exclusive’:

" Select the button for trapezoidal loads

" Set the dialogue to ’Force’, ’global’ ’X’ and the load
values to 4 and 10
" [Create]

" Input the load line by selecting the bottom and top end
points of the left column

" Input the load case ’Wind Load Right’ in the same way

Box: General hints on inputting loads

Point and line loads are stand−alone objects, which have no direct connection to nodes and members and there-
fore− at least during the input − can also" hang" freely in space. The connection of loads to the structure is carried
out by the program purely geometrically when a load case is checked ( automatically carried out during the
solution). For loads which on checking do not lie exactly" on members or nodes an error message is issued.

Line load Point load

representation

d
start point input load end input of load
of load line line point of point
load line

The load line has to lie exactly on a member axis (or several axes in series), to be accepted when checking is carried
out.
The decisive load line for the point of load application as well as its end points are only visible when the load is
selected.
The spacing for the load representation can be set in the load attributes.
In the same way the load point of a point load has to lie on the member axis or a node, to be accepted when checking
is carried out.

STATIKï5 Aï57
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Documentation of the Load Input

We also want to document the load input using figures and text.
" Select in the list box ’Load Case’ a number of load cases
one after another and make for each one a print entry
" Click on this button in the Load Case tabsheet, to open
the dialogue with the load case list:

This list shows all input load cases with their most important attributes. It also contains
buttons for creating a new load case, for modifying the properties of an existing load
case, for deleting selected load cases, for selecting all empty load cases and for creating
a legend of all existing load cases.
With this button you create a print entry with the list of all load cases (what you see
in the dialogue shown above)
" Select all load cases with <Ctrl>A
" With this button you can create a legend for all selected
load cases
" Examine the result and then make a print entry
" Close the legend window and also the dialogue with the
load case list
We now want to reduce the scale of the load figures in the CubusViewer, since otherwise
these, based on the size of their content, would be much too big when printed.
" Click on the button for the CubusViewer
" Select an entry with a load case figure, with <RMB> call
the context menu and select there ’Scale’

The pre−setting is on ’Full Page’, which for this figure would give a scale of 1:112. We
want to print the figures with only about half this size.
" Close the ’Scale’ dialogue,
select all load case figures in the list and
with <RMB> call the context menu

Aï58 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set to ’Preset Value’ and in the input field type the value
200, then [OK]

You can see now in the preview that the figures have been drawn correspondingly
smaller.

If we now want to print all entries which concern the load case documentation, then
we have to deactivate the first two entries in the documentation of the structure. Nor-
mally one would print everything together at the end.

" Deactivate the first two entries in the structure docu-

mentation

" Print the active entries

Box: Extended member selection

Besides the general method of selection of the Graphics Editor in STATIK-5 there are also specific selection aids for
members.
With this button (top left in STATIK-5 window) a menu appears with a number of special selection possibilities
for members.
Move the mouse over it and press <F1> for a description.

A 3.5.6 Subsystems

Subsystems (abbreviated in the following to SS) allow one to limit the visibility of the
members and nodes to selected structural parts. As many SS can be defined as desired,
whereby a structure element can belong to several SS. SS do not have any effect on the
statical system, which always comprises the whole structure.

With large systems having hundreds of members, working without the aid of SS is
unthinkable. But also with small systems, as in our example, SS can be very useful for
the output of results.

The definition of the SS can be done at any time and can also be extended and modified
at any time. Normally the SS are defined during the input of the structure, since they
can be very useful there and especially in the input of the load.

We want to introduce the following SS here:

S Columns
S Upper chord
S Lower chord
S Verticals
S Diagonals

STATIKï5 Aï59
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Go into the ’Structure’ tab sheet and click on the button
to define subsystems (top left in the STATIK-5 window)

An SS with all nodes and members not yet assigned to an SS is defined and maintained
by the program automatically. We introduce the partial system ’Columns’:
" Select the button for a new SS

" Fill in the dialogue as shown and then select the two col-
umns
" Click on [+]
The objects belonging to this SS are shown in blue. By selecting new members/nodes
and then clicking on [+] or [−] any objects can be added or removed. In this way existing
SS can also be modified (select desired SS in the dialogue ’Management of Subsystems’
and then [Edit]).
" [OK] to close the SS definition
" Define in the same way the subsystems ’Top Chord’ and
’Bottom Chord’
To define the strut SS we want to become familiar with a new type of member selection.
We begin with the verticals:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Vertical
Members’
" Click on the button for special member selection
" and then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a vertical member
" Keep the <Shift>-key depressed and click on both col-
umns to deselect them
" Click on [+] and then on [OK]
For the diagonals we proceed in a similar way:
" Select the button for a new SS and call it ’Diagonal
Members’

Aï60 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction

" Click on the first diagonal on the left, to select all

members with this direction and then on [+].

> " Click on the button for special member selection and
then in the menu that appears click on the button to
select all members in a particular direction
" Click on a diagonal with the other direction, then on [+]
and [OK]

Now the SS has been defined. We want to see a partial view with the top chord and the
columns:

" Activate both SS in the ’SS management’ dialogue and

then [OK]

With this button one can switch at any time between the overall view and the SS view.
In order to change the SS settings, call the ’SS management’ dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï61
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.7 Standard Results

As in Example 1 you can now change to the tab sheet ’Results’ and view all possible
results for all load cases. Besides the load cases you will also find limit value results.
Before asking how this has come about, we want to try out the procedure to view the
results.
" Select the ’Results’ tab sheet and set the combo box
’Results for’ to ’!Ultimate (ULS)’

" Set the rest in the tab sheet, as shown:

" Let the result be calculated and shown

Because of overlapping figures the graphical presentation of results for all members is
sometimes not very helpful. How to overcome this problem is discussed below.
For a calculated envelope result (i.e. design limit state) there are comprehensive inter-
mediate results and, depending on the result type, alo associated components. All of
these values are grouped together in a separate result dialogue, which is opened by
clicking on the button to the left:

E.g. here’s how to check the contribution of the dead load for a calculated envelope
of normal forces:
" Click this button to open the Envelope Value dialogue.
" Open ’Actions’ in the tree and choose the entry ’!T_Dead-
Load N’
" Start the figure generation for the chosen result (i.e. nor-
mal forces due to dead load)
. The Envelope Value dialogue remains open as long as you don’t close it or don’t change set-
tings for the result calculation, which are incompatible to the results in the dialogue. E.g. if
you change the envelope type, the dialogue will automatically be closed and the correspon-
ding button disabled until the new envelope result has been calculated.

Aï62 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Choose ’Envelope values N’ on the top line and let the
program display these results again.
The displayed figure showing the normal force limit values is rather useless, since
everything is drawn one on top of the other. STATIK-5 offers two possibilities of limiting
the results diagram to only some of the members:
S If members or nodes are selected, the results are only displayed for these objects.
This method is suitable for having a quick look at a result anywhere. For a properly
planned output of results it is better to use the next method.
S For a partial system view the results are only drawn for the objects of this view.
Therefore, for a comprehensive graphical output of results for a complex structure
you need a series of subsystems specially prepared for this purpose.
S For 3D structures there is an additional tool to customize the presentation of results:
the working plane. For detailed information see example 3 (A 3.6) of this chapter.
We want to view here once again the above normal force limit values in a partial view
with the columns and the top chord:
" Call the partial system management and activate the SS
’Columns’ and ’Top Chord’, followed by [OK]
" Let the results be displayed once again

Even if the limit value results window is open you can change to the partial system views
and let the results be displayed correspondingly.
The following figure detail shows how the last results figure to be requested should
look approximately:

" Close the limit value results window if it is still open

A 3.5.8 Influencing the Labelling of Results

In the dialogue ’Settings Results Output’ (called using button on left) you can choose

between the three available label types.

The labelling of a figure already produced can still be influenced afterwards. With a
double click on a results diagram (at present a moment line) the following dialogue

STATIKï5 Aï63
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

appears, with which you can extend or reduce the content of labels as desired: Click

on [?] for more detailed information.

An existing label of a results figure (created automatically or by hand) can also be

switched on and off at any time. Click with the <RMB> on the button of the corrrespond-
ing results layer (see Ch. A 3.5.11) and select in the menu ’Labelling Visible’:

Buttons for results layer

A 3.5.9 The Tab Sheet ’Analysis’

Special analyses Limit state specifications

Definition of load case combinations

As you will have already noticed several times before, the functions of the ’Analysis’ tab
sheet are not needed to produce standard results. The three buttons which are available
here serve the following purposes:
With this button one can define a series of special analyses, including analysis according
to 2nd order theory in the basic module of STATIK-5. We will not discuss this further
in this example.
With this button load case combinations with arbitrary factors can be defined, which
then appear in the ’Results’ tab sheet under ’Results for’, and for which the same results
as for individual load cases can be obtained. In contrast to the limit values subsequently
described we are dealing here with fixed load combinations.
This button is used to define the limit state specifications, which permit the determina-
tion of design limit state values, as described in Ch. A2.3.2. If the load cases were
assigned to certain actions when input, e.g. live loads, STATIK-5 automatically creates
a limit state specification called ’!Serviceability (SLS)’ and another called ’!Ultimate
(ULS)’.

Since the code requirements for the loads and load factors to be investigated depend
on many factors, the limit state specifications created by the program can only be used
directly in this way in simple standard cases. In the normal case you have to create your
own specifications, whereby those automatically created can be used as default values.

Load Case Combinations

We want to determine the bending deflections of our structure under all dead loads and
the full snow load. Since these loads only exist as individual load cases, we want now

Aï64 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

to define a corresponding load case combination, for which we can then obtain the
bending deflections as for an individual load case.
" Change to the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and click on the button
for load case combinations

combo box with the

defined load case com-
binations

Adopt-button

Load case window

Input field for load factor

Defined combination

" Click on the button to create a new load case combina-

tion
" The dialogue field ’New Load Combination’ appears; call
the combination ’Full_Load’ and close the dialogue with
[OK]
" Click in the load case window on the load case ’L1’
" Check if there is ’1’ in the input field for the load factor
" Click on the adopt button (with which the selected load
case with the set factor in the combination in the right
window is adopted)
" Proceed in the same way with the other load cases until
the desired combination is obtained
" Document the load case combination by making a print
entry and then close the dialogue
" Change to the ’Results’ tab sheet
" Click on the arrow key in the first combo box

You can now see that in the new additional branch ’Load combinations’ the combina-
tion is also possible:

The maximum bending deflection for this combination should be DZ=−39.50 mm.

Limit State Specifications

We do not want to generate here our own limit state specification, but look in more
detail at the automatically generated specification ’!Ultimate (ULS)’.

STATIKï5 Aï65
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select again the ’Analysis’ tab sheet and here the button
for limit state specifications

combo box with the defined

limit state specifications

List of actions
List of generated haz-
ard scenarios

Inspect or modify the

selected action

As described in Chapter A2.3.2, the design limit state values are determined as the
extreme values of the results of a number of hazard scenarios (analogous terms: design
situations, hazard combinations).
A hazard scenario is the combination of different actions with the corresponding load
factors.
An action, after all, is the simplest case of a load case. However, several load cases
involving unfavourable superposition may participate, as is the case in our example with
the actions ’Snow’ and ’Wind’. Here too the four actions were automatically generated
by the program.
We will look at the action ’Wind’:
" Select the corresponding action line by clicking on
’!T_Wind Load’ and then [Modify]

The ’Specificatio nof action’ dialog is very similar to the dialogue described above for
the load case specification. The difference is simply that the load cases are adopted in

Aï66 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

different ways from the left load case list in the action specification, depending on
whether a load case can, e.g., act in addition to the previous one or alternatively to it.
In our case the action ’!T_Wind Load’ consists either of the load case ’WindL’ or of the
load case ’WindR’. Thus both load cases are mutually exclusive, i.e. in each results point
for each extreme value at most one of the two load cases is considered.

For further details please consult the help buttons of the corresponding dialogue.

STATIKï5 Aï67
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.5.10 Output of the effective load for envelope values

In order to fully reconstruct an envelope value, there is a possibilty to output the list
of the effective load cases for every result value.

We recommend to print out first the list of all envelope specifications involved, showing
all the actions and all load cases and their combinations.

As an example let’s document the effective load for the resulting axial force of the spec-
ification ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’:

" Change to the register ’Results’ and set the output spec-
ifications as follows: ’!Ultimate_(ULS)’,’N’, numerical
output.

" Open the attribute dioalog by pressing this button and

activate the check box ’incl. effective load’.

" Calculate the results.

Two tables have been created:

The first table shows the envelope values and the corresponding hazard szenarios
(=GB):

effective hazard scenario of this row:

In this section for Nxmin the scenario 1 and for Nxmax scenario 2 was effective

The effective load case and load case combinations are listed in the second table:

The effective load cases of all individually contributing actions can be shown as well:
Let’s demonstrate it for the action ’Snow’:
" Click on this button in order to open the window of the
envelope value results and choose the action
’!T_Sonw_load_N’

Aï68 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" " Calculate the results (axial force due to action

snow load).

Here two tables are displayes as well, the first showing the resulting values and the sec-
ond table including the effecticve load cases:

A 3.5.11 How to Use the Results Layers

The results figures are also stored in layers. There is a layer group, which includes the
(maximum) 6 last results layers that are identified by monotonically increasing numbers.
Older results figures are deleted. Saving the last pair of results layers serves the following
purposes:
1) You can superimpose" several results figures, by adding the corresponding results
layers. To do this you have to keep the <Shift> key depressed, as otherwise the
already active results layers are deactivated.
2) You can switch back and forth quickly between the last pair of results.
3) Storing graphical results can also be useful for the structure or load input. For the
input of critical vehicle load positions, e.g., you can call up previously calculated
influence lines.

Some relevant comments:

S Limiting to the six last figures was deliberate, since the figures can use up a lot of
memory. This number cannot be changed by the user.
S When saving this results buffer is always deleted. This is also done because of stor-
age economy, and also because loading a new analysis would otherwise take a long
time.
S By making an entry in the output list any number of figures can be stored and looked
at again at any time.

STATIKï5 Aï69
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

A 3.6 Example 3: Space Frame

A 3.6.1 Task

HEA200
HEA140
3.86

Intermediate floor:
transverse: HEA160
longitud.: HEA140
4.30

4.34

5.20
4.34
4.34
4.34
4.34 2.50
Y 2.50
Bracing:
all ROR108/5.6
4.34 X 5.00
4.34 5.00
3.50
All columns:
HEA280
Point support

Load Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
cases: only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
[kN/m2] members in Y-direc- members in Y direction) except bracing )
tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

Aims: − 3D aspects
− projection control
− working planes
− surface loads

Prerequisites:
− 3D option of STATIK-5
− basic knowledge of the use of STATIK-5
(i.e. one has already tried out the introductory examples for plane
frames)

" Start STATIK-5 and begin a new analysis

" In the menu ’Options’ > ’Type of structure’ change to

’3D’

Aï70 STATIKï5
 Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

By selecting a 3D structure the program switches automatically to the 3D representation,

in which the buttons for projection control are visible. We do not want to deal here with
projection control.

A 3.6.2 Structure Input

We want to begin with the input of the first cross frame (X,Z plane) and then duplicate
it several times in the Y direction. First we input both outer columns:

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA280 section; as material accept the suggested
structural steel.
Z " [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for large columns),
type in the start and end coordinates:
0 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
X 0 <o> 0 <o> 8.16 <o>
Y [Create] in the ’Member’ dialogue (for small columns),
18.5 <o> 0 <o> 0 <o>
R0 <o> 0 <o> 5.2 <o> (Relative!)
Close the ’Member’ dialogue

Definition of a Working Plane

In order to better come to grips with a complex structure, there are on the one hand
the subsystems, with which you are already familiar, and in addition with 3D structures
the working planes. In the plane frame mode (of a specific working plane) the visibil-
ity is restricted to this plane and you work two−dimensionally in the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. The view can, as desired, be two or three dimensional.

We want to input the rest of the first transverse frame in the plane frame mode and for
this purpose define the corresponding working plane:

" Click on the button to define the plane (beneath the zoom
tools); the dialogue ’Working Planes’ appears

" Select the button to define a new working plane; the dia-
logue ’New Working Plane’ appears
Z " Assign the name XZ_01
C
B
" Click on the arrow button and select the points A, B and
C (in this order), to define the plane, and then [OK]
X
Y
A " Close the dialogue of the plane definition
With the first point A in the plane definition define the origin of the u,v coordinate sys-
tem of the plane. With A,B and C together define the plane and at the same time whether
clockwise or anticlockwise, with which you decide in which direction in the 2D view
you want to view the plane (right hand rule).

After defining the working plane you are in the plane frame mode of this plane. You
2D/3D view
can choose between the 2D and the 3D view. Stay in the 3D view, then only the objects
2D/3D- outside of the plane are invisible and the projection does not change. If you remove
mode
Plane definition
the 3D button, you are in a 2D view and you can only see the objects in the plane.

STATIKï5 Aï71
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Completion of the Frame in the Working Plane

" Switch to the 2D view (click on the active [3D] button)
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
V for the roof beam an HEA200 section
B
A " [Create] the roof beam by selecting the points A and B
" Select the left column
U
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’ ;
In the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the direction vector to (1.0,
0.0) and select ’Spacings’; in the corresponding input
field type the list of spacings
3.5 5 5 2.5;
[OK]
" The four columns should still be selected; <RMB> >
’Trim’; select the roof beam as trim line, to which the col-
umns have to be trimmed
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section
for the intermediate floor an HEA160 section
" [Create] (for intermediate floor member);
type the start coordinates:
0 <o> 4.3 <o>
To input the end point press the key U (mouse moved in
U direction) and click on the neighbouring column
" Select as cross section for the bracing an ROR108/5.6 sec-
tion and create the 4 bracing members with [Create] and
select the existing end points
" Select the button for point support
" In order not to have to repeatedly select this button for
the input of several supports, click on the already acti-
>
vated point tool of the Graphics Editor to activate the
repeat mode
" Select all bottom points of the columns and close the
repeat mode with the <Esc> key
" Exit the plane frame mode, whereupon the program
automatically changes to the 3D view

Multiple Copies of the 1st Frame

We now want to duplicate seven times the input frame with its working plane and sup-
ports, but without the bracing, at a uniform spacing of 4.34 m.
" Make sure the working plane layer is visible (i.e. the layer
button shwon is down)
" " Select all objects with <Ctrl>A;
hold the <Shift>-key depressed and click on the bracing
members and on the 3rd column as well as on its support
to delect them
" " <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
in the ’Duplicate’ dialogue set the vector to 0, 4.34, 0 and
the number of duplicates to 7;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]

Aï72 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

. Don’t forget the Undo function, with which you can go back as many steps as you like, if any-
thing goes wrong.

" Click on the centering button or to be faster on the key

B <F3>, to see the whole figure
C
" Select the bracing crossing points and the 3rd column
with its support in the 1st frame, which are still available
D in the last frame to duplicate
A
" <RMB> > ’Duplicate’;
Grab the vector between the duplicates using the mouse
(e.g. from A to B) and set the number of copies to 1;
If the preview is O.K, [Preview] then [OK]
E

Definition of Further Working Planes

" Duplicate the symbol for the plane XZ_01 (in the point E)
in the Y direction on each column foot
" Call the ’Working plane’ dialogue and define a new plane
called ’Roof’ with the points A (origin), C and B (see
above figure)
" Define in the same way the plane
’YZ_01’ with the points D,C,E
and a plane ’Floor’ for the intermediate floor
" Exit the plane frame mode
" Duplicate the symbol for the plane YZ_01 in the X direc-
tion with the spacings 3.5 5 5 2.5 2.5

Selecting Working Planes

" Open the ’Working plane’ dialogue (if it is no longer
open)

You can see that by duplicating the plane symbols the planes XZ_02, XZ_03, ... and
YZ_02, YZ_03, etc. were generated.
" Click in the dialogue on the plane XZ_01; as a result we
switch to the plane frame mode of this plane;
" Press now the <Arrow Downwards>-key and you will
note that this is an elegant way to go quickly through the
planes in the order of their entry in the dialogue
" Exit the plane frame mode by clicking on the button
shown on the left or by selecting ’No’ in the ’Working
plane’ dialogue
In the ’Working plane’ dialogue therefore one can switch at any time to a specific work-
ing plane. A second possibility is a double−click on a plane frame symbol. The symbols
of course have to be visible to do this, i.e. the corresponding layer button has to be
active.
" Double−click on one of plane symbols, and you get into
in the plane frame mode
" Double−click on the plane symbol in the plane frame
mode, and you are in the 3D mode again

STATIKï5 Aï73
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

The Buttons for Projection Control

In the 3D view, which can be activated at any time with the button shown on the left,
the following buttons to control the projection are always shown. For a more detailed
description look in the context help.

Rotation about a vertical axis Rotation about a vertical axis

Rotation about a horizontal axis Rotation about a horizontal axis

Nearer (point perspective) Further away (point perspective)

Architectonic perspective (point per-
Parallel perspective (axonometry) spective with horizont. viewing direction)
Point perspective Projection direction in X

Projection direction in Y Projection direction in Z

Back to last projection direction for
[X], [Y] or [Z] Projection management

Rendered representation Rendering settings

Step angle when rotating

Completion of the Structure Input

Longitudinal members of the intermediate floor:

" Change to the working plane ’Floor’

" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select as cross section

an HEA140

" Create the 2 longitudinal end beams with [Create] and

select the existing end points
C=Mid− B
point A C " Create the middle longitudinal member; to input the
between
A and B starting point use the construction method ’Mid−point
between Two Points’ (key <M>); for the end point use the
<U> and <V> keys, respectively
Longitudinal members in roof plane:

" Change to the working plane ’Roof’ and to the 2D view

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, to make

the member end points of the columns visible, that are
required for the input of the longitudinal members.

. Consult on this occasion the context help for the button for the selection mode.

Aï74 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select in the ’Member’ dialogue the section ’HEA140’

already used

A B
" Create the members after double−clicking on the line tool
C D of the Graphics Editor (A−B, C−D, ...); close with <Esc>;
E Note that the last two members of the 5th frame stop!

F " The missing three members in the middle of the top three
fields (between A−C, C−E and E−F) are best created using
the mid−point construction for the start point and then
with <U> draw a horizontal line to the member on the
extreme right.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue

" Switch off the selection mode for object points again
(point symbols no longer visible).

Trim the last three transverse frames:

" Exit the plane frame mode

" Switch off the layer with the plane symbols

" Set the projection direction to [Z]

" Select all superfluous input columns and supports by

means of a window as shown in the figure

" <RMB> > ’Delete’ or <Delete> key

" Draw the same window again in the opposite direction

(from right to left), to select the three last roof beams
" To select the end points of the members that have to be
moved, draw the window again as shown

. In order to be able to select the end points directly, you could have changed the selection mode
to ’Enable/disbale sSelectability of points of objects’. Then drawing a window according to
the figure would have sufficed. In the present case however the suggested method is quicker.

" Set the projection direction back to the previous inclined

setting

B A " <RMB> > ’Move’

" Select the point A as the point to be moved and place it

on point B by clicking

Comment: If you had done this in the previous projection direc-

tion [Z], the program (unforeseeably) when clicking on B could
also have taken the bottom point of the column. In the projec-
tion it is unambiguous.

STATIKï5 Aï75
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

Input of the bracing:

" Switch to the plane ’Roof’ and then to 2D view.

" Switch to the selection mode for object points, so that the
existing points in the plane become visible.
A
" Open the ’Member’ dialogue and select the cross section
for the braces (ROR108/5.6)

" Double−click on the line tool of the Graphics Editor and

create the brace members in the first field (close with
<Esc>);
Comment: At A there is no point which one could snap to.
For this point to meet the first diagonal, which ends
there, exactly, you have to use the construction method
’Intersection of Two Lines’, which you call using the
B C D <RMB>.

" Select the members of the second cross from below and
duplicate them 6x in the X direction by grabbing the
vector BC

" Select the members of the other 3 crosses and duplicate

them 2x in the X direction by grabbing the vector BD

" Delete the superfluous cross bottom right.

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_01’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’YZ_02’ and create the two required
crosses

" Switch to the plane ’Floor’ and create the two required
crossed diagonals.

" Close the ’Member’ dialogue and switch off the point
selection mode again

" Back to the 3D representation

With this the structure input is completed.

A 3.6.3 Load Input (Surface loads)

Surface loads are created on previously defined surfaces.

" Switch to the tab sheet ’Surfaces’

We first want to create an surface for the roof sheeting and then one for the facade in
the plane YZ .

" Select the button to define a new surface.

Aï76 STATIKï5
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Set the dialogue, as shown on the left; as the plane the
already defined plane ’Roof’ in the combo box is selected;

[OK]

" Open the dialogue to define the load−bearing elements

and set them as shown; [OK]

Thereby all members in the U direction in this plane are load−

bearing. For checking purposes they are shown in a different
colour.

" With this button start the input of the surface outline,
which in this case coincides with the structure outline.

Comment: The surface can also jut out over the structure
(overhanging roof) and exhibit polygonal recesses (adjacent
button), which may not touch each other or the outline
" Define a second surface called ’YZ Facade’ and assign it
to the existing plane ’YZ_01’

" Select as load−bearing members all in U and V directions

" Input the outline of the surface (total area without ’Over-
hanging Roof’)

Now follows the input of the three prescribed load cases using surface loads.

[kN/m2] Weight of roof sheeting Snow, whole roof Wind, whole facade
(only applied to (only applied to (applied to all members
members in Y direc- members in Y direc- except bracing )
tion) tion)
2.1
0.8 1.2

0.6

" Change to the tab sheet ’Loads’

" Create the first load case (Identifier: ’WgtRS’); and set to
’Surface Load Case’.

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet now set to surface loads
the surface ’Roof’

STATIKï5 Aï77
Part A Basic Module A 3 Working with STATIKï5

" Select the button for surface loads and set the dialogue,
as shown

"

" Create the second load case (Identifier: ’Snow’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’Roof’

" Select the button for surface loads and set: ’Projective’,
’Z’, ’uniform’, −2.1

"

" Create the third load case (Identifier: ’Wind’); and set
again to ’Surface Load Case’

" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the surface ’YZ Facade’

" Select the button for surface loads and for the linearly
distributed load: deactivate ’Global’, ’X’, ’uniform’ and
3 input load values 1: 0.6, 2: 0.6, 3: 1.2

2 " Click on [Create] and input the load polygon such that it
is suitable for the three load values, i.e. 1−>2−>3−>4 and
4 close polygon

Now the surface loads have been input and everything else is done automatically, i.e.
you can change to the ’Results’ tab sheet and begin inspecting the results.

We want now however to check how STATIK-5 transmits the surface loads to the
members.
" Select in the ’Loads’ tab sheet the button to check all load
cases, whereupon STATIK-5 determines the load transfer.

" Click with <RMB> on the layer symbol of the current

load case and select in the context menu ’Sublayer Vis-
ibility’
" Activate the control field ’Transferred Loads’, whereupon
the created member loads become visible

. You also have the possibility of checking the created line loads numerically with the load case
legend (from the load case list). For these line loads to appear in the legend with the load case
attributes ’Legend including generated loads’ has to be active.
We dispense here with a guided tour" of the results, since this is the same as in Example
2. For the selective inspection of results in the case of 3D systems of course you can
also use working planes. In addition and also in combination with the working planes
there are also the subsystems, which are very useful but whose input is not included
here.

Aï78 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

Part HPrestressing

H 1 Overview

H 1.1 What the Prestressing Module does

The prestressing module supports the analysis of prestressed beam structures, like beam
bridges, and post−tensioned or pre−tensioned beams. It appears primarily in the control
tabsheet ’Prestressing’, in which tendons are input and administered. Prestressing how-
ever also affects other parts of the program. The following points describe in a general
way how prestressing is dealt with in STATIK−5.
S The prestressing module permits the definition of tendons with respect to ge-
ometry, cross section, material, friction values and prestressing procedures. The
position of the tendon can be output in a mesh of arbitrary spacing which serves
therefore as a suitable basis for producing tendon plans.
S The program determines the variation of force in the tendons based on the speci-
fied prestressing steps taking into account the automatically determined friction
losses. Thereby the stess variation in the individual prestressing steps can be seen
(prestressing record).
Alternatively, the variation of force can also be input by the user directly in the form
of a list of distances and forces.
S From the variations of force in the tendons the resultant force action on the struc-
ture can be calculated and introduced as a loading.
S The further treatment of prestress loadings corresponds to that of normal loadings
with the difference that in the output of section forces one can select, whether only
the constrained section forces are output (e.g. in ultimate load considerations) or
whether the section forces are considered as external actions as a result of prestres-
sing (e.g. for for stress verifications (serviceability) for the concrete section).
S As in the case of ordinary untensioned reinforced structures also reinforced con-
crete (RC) analyses (see Part G) can be carried out, e.g. to dimension the reinforc-
ing steel. Here the tendons (position, prestressing force, ...) in every dimensioning
section are automatically introduced into the cross section.

H 1.2 Requirements for the Use of the Prestressing Module

S The prestressing module is an added option to STATIK−5 and its use requires the
corresponding license.
S Besides the basic version of STATIK−5 the prestressing module also requires the op-
tion ’Specialities’, which among other things permits the use of structure lines, axis
points and construction stages.

STATIKï5 Hï1
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

H 1.3 Brief Description of the Most Important Aspects of an Analysis

H 1.3.1 Structure

Structure Lines (SL)

Only parts of a structure can be prestressed that are modelled by structure lines. This
also applies to straight simple beams. Structure lines are described in Ch. E 2.

H 1.3.2 Input of Tendons

Groups of Tendons
Each tendon must be assigned to a group of tendons, i.e. before the first tendon can
be input, at least one tendon group must be defined.
There are two reasons for grouping tendons together:
1) The forces resulting from a group of tendons are summed to form a loading. The
loading is given the name of the tendon group. Thus if a group of tendons in Con-
struction Stage 1 and another group in Construction Stage 2 are prestressed, this re-
quires two loadings and therefore two tendon groups.
As shown in Example 1 below, it is also possible to prestress the tendons of a tendon
group in a construction stage and to apply prestress again in a later construction
stage. In this case, from a single tendon group several loadings may result.
2) If there is a large number of tendons it can be an advantage for the sake of clarity
to assign the tendons to several groups. All tendons in a group are stored in a Layer
and so the visibility can be switched on and off for individual tendon groups.

Tendons, Geometry
As mentioned above tendons can only be input along structure lines. The input of the
vertical tendon profile (z-eccentricities with respect to the SL) is done graphically in the
developed vertical side view face by means of the SL (E−5).

side view surface tendon input in the

developed side view surface
SL (= side view plane)
SG
SL

trace of SL in the z-eccentricity

plan view plane at distance d
d
distances
(measured along trace)

Fig. Hï1 Input of z-eccentricities

The y-eccentricity ey of a tendon point defined in the side view plane is given by its
horizontal projection onto a PT constraint line defined in the cross section (see Fig.
H−2). As an alternative to the PT constraint line ey can also be input explicitly.

Hï2 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

axis point on SL

-ez
ey tendon
PT constraint
line

Fig. Hï2 y-eccentricity using PT constraint line in cross section

Tendon Attributes

To specify a tendon, besides the geometry a set of parameters is required, e.g.

S prestressing steel material
S tendon cross section
S friction values
S wedge draw−in at anchorages
S with/without bonding
S stressing programme or explicit variation of prestressing force

Variation of Prestressing Force

The variation of prestressing force in a tendon can be input explicitly (list of distance-
force data pairs). Normally however it is defined by specifying prestressing increments
at the anchorages (prestressing procedure). Based on the tendon geometry and the fric-
tion coefficients the program determines the variation of prestressing force using the
formula:

P(x) + P o·e *m(a)Dax)

Po : prestressing force at the anchorage
P(x) : prestressing force at a distance x from the anchorage
x : developed (actual) tendon length
m : friction coefficient (typical values in the range: 0.1 .. 0.3)
a : sum of all deviation angles (absolute values, radians)at distance x
Da : unwanted deviation angle (per unit length)
values in the range: 0.004 .. 0.008 /m)
The following prestressing procedures can be carried out more than once and in any
order (beginning of course with the prestressing) at both ends of a tendon:
S Prestressing to a force of Factor * ftk at the anchor.
If it is the last step with this anchor, it is automatically anchored, if the wedge draw−in
<>0.0has stabilised.
S Reduction of prestress to a force of Factor * ftk at the anchor; anchoring as with
prestressing.
S Reduction of prestress to maximum force.
The reduction of prestress at the anchor is determined, such that the first force maxi-
mum in the vicinity of the anchor attains a pre−defined value. If it is the last step for
this anchor, when determining the reduced force a subsequent anchoring is taken
into consideration, so that the force maximum after anchoring has the desired value.
In H−3 there is an example with several prestressing procedures.

STATIKï5 Hï3
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

Input prestressing steps:

Resulting variation of prestressing force(graiphic and numeric output):

1 2 3 4 5 6
2790 0.7*ftk = 2604 2753
2549
2617
2492
2246

1832

1
2
3
4
5
6

= input values

Fig. Hï3 Prestressing steps

H 1.3.3 Prestress Loadings

There are the following two possibilities of introducing the prestressing forces as load-
ing on the structure. Both ways are correct and lead to the same results in analysis ac-
cording to 1st order theory.
Prestressing as External Action:
The tendons are not part of the structure, but act on it in the form of forces. These forces
form the prestress loading. It is a question of anchor, deviation and friction forces, which
all have to be in equilibrium.
The section force results for this prestress loading correspond to the action on the cross
section (Part<PZ> from Fig. H−4). If one wants constrained section forces, then one has
to include the section force contribution of the tendons.
This way of treating prestressing is very clear and is also well−suited to rough hand cal-
culations. But it also has disadvantages and is less suitable for computer programs. Such
a loading could not be analysed according to 2nd order theory (not even as part of a
combination loading), as otherwise incorrect initial normal forces would be considered.
For these reasons in STATIK-5 the method described below was used.
Prestressing as Initial Stress State (i.e. tendons as part of the structure)

Hï4 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

After prestressing a statically−determinate supported frame structure has a strain state

in every point, which can be calculated as a function of the position and direction of
the tendon as well as the prestressing force. If one introduces this strain state as an initial
strain loading over the whole structure, the result is an initial stress state due to the pres-
tressing. It corresponds to constrained loading (Part <Z> from Fig. H−4). If one only
wants the section force part for the concrete section (Parts<PZ>), then the section force
part due to the tendons has to be deducted.

H 1.3.4 Results

In the output of section forces and section results in the case of prestress loadings the
desired part can be selected.
For this purpose each prestress loading (e.g. V1@0 = Tendon Group ’V1’ in Construction
Stage ’0’) appears in the list of loadings three times with different IDs. The significance
of the IDs is clear from Fig. H−4 .

statically−determinate statically−indeterminate

<PZ> moments when con-

sidering prestressing
= as external action

<Z> constrained moments

+
−P*e
<P> (P*e = moment con-
tribution of the tendon)

Fig. Hï4 Effect of a prestress loading

<PZ> section force part of concrete cross section (sum <Z>+<P>),

i.e. the prestressing is considered as an external action
<Z> only constrained part of the section forces
<P> only section force part of the tendons (negative)
If in the output of results a prestress loading with the ID <P> is selected, then only sec-
tion forces and section results can be requested, since here it is not really a question
of a loading but of a section force part that has nothing to do with displacements.
In the definition of loading combinations and limit state superpositions the prestress
loadings are also available in this way, whereby there the variant <P> is missing, which
is meaningless in combinations.
In the case of combination loadings one can only work with the part <Z> (no choice).
Cross section results (extreme fibre stresses) cannot be obtained for such loadings, but
they can however for loading combinations (combinations of results ).

H 1.3.5 Dimensioning, Verifications

The RC analyses described in Part G (dimensioning of ordinary untensioned reinforce-

ment, ultimate load (structural safety) and stress verifications (serviceability)) are also
possible for prestressed structures. On this point the following remarks should be
noted:
S FAGUS-5 has to know the strain in every cable relative to its neighbouring concrete
fibre at the time when the bond is active. With the direct use of FAGUS-5 this value

STATIKï5 Hï5
Part H Prestressing H 1 Overview

is input as the so called pre−strain (initial strain) by the user. This pre−strain consists
of two parts, i.e. of the cable strain due to the prestressing force and of a decom-
pression component in the concrete, which depends on the section forces in the
concrete cross section at the time of bonding.
For RC analyses in STATIK-5, to determine the decompression component FAGUS-5
assumes that the prestressing is completely introduced into the structure and that
on creating the bond the section forces due to the loading specified under G1 are
active. G1 is an input field in the dialogue ’RC Analyses’ (see Section G). If only a
part of the decompression component needs to be considered, then for the PREFAC-
Parameter (see Section G) a corresponding factor can be specified, e.g. PREFAC=0.0
for the pre−tensioning method.
S To determine the losses, besides the effects of the prestressing the section forces de-
rived from the sum of the specified loadings under G1 (see above) and G2 (in the
same dialogue) are used.
S The tendons are positioned automatically in the corresponding FAGUS-5 cross sec-
tions and precisely those that appear in the loadings of the limit state specification
used and thus in the corresponding tendon groups.

Hï6 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

H 2 Examples

H 2.1 Simple Frame with one Tendon

H 2.1.1 Task

Struktur:
1 tendon with 9 strands each of 150mm2,
Po=0.7*fpk*Ap at both ends,
Material: Y1770
Cross sections:
ConcreteC35/45
Beam:
0.10

0.60
5.00 Columns:

0.35
0.35

10.00

Task:
Determine the extreme fibre stresses for
dead load + distributed live load of −20kN/m on the beam + prestressing P0

H 2.1.2 Overview of Aim and Method

This very simple example should, without any unnecessary ballast, introduce you to the
essential points in the treatment of prestressing in STATIK-5.

Before we begin with a descriptioon of all input steps, you are first given a brief over-
view of the most important steps to solve the problem.
1) start new 3D analysis
2) define code and material
3) input the cross sections ’Beam’ and ’Columns’
4) input column members
5) input beam as structure line
6) input support nodes
7) prestressing: input tendon group and corresponding tendon
8) input loading Live Load
9) define results combination Dead Load + Live Load + Prestress
10)generate results

STATIKï5 Hï7
 Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

H 2.1.3 Detailed Description of the Input

Starting Program, Material Definition

" Start the program and open a new analysis; set the Entry
dialogue as shown.
Although we only have a plane frame we have to select ’3D’,
since this is required by the prestressing module.
" Call the Material dialogue (Settings > Materials) and se-
lect for the given material ’Concrete’ the class C35/45 and
for prestressing steel Y1770.

Cross Sections

> " Call the Cross Section library and input the two cross sec-
tions ’Beam’ and ’Columns’ as parametricised cross sec-
tions.
Beam: Col-
0.35

umns:
0.60

0.35
0.35

Structure
A part of a structure that has to be prestressed must be define as a structure line. What
a structure line is, you can look up in the Sections E 2 and H 1.3.1. For our example this
means that the columns are input as normal members and the beam as a structure line.
Columns: (normal member)
" First input both column members and assign them the
cross section ’Columns’.
Beam: (structure line)
Each structure line is based on a plan view plane, in which its curve in plan (here a
straight line) is defined. Normally we are always dealing with a horizontal plane, whose
Z-level lies, not necessarily − but advantageously, at the height of the structure line. Thus
we first have to introduce a horizontal working plane at Z=5.00m:
" Click on the button to define a plane (below the zoom
tool); the dialogue ’Working Planes’ appears
" Select the button to define a new working plane; the fol-
lowing dialogue appears, which you may have to zoom
to see the fields with the point coordinates. Fill in the
fields and then click on [OK]

Hï8 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

" Open the Structure Line dialogue and set it as follows:

" Click on the button [Introduce].

In this way you get to the input mode for the curve in plan view, which is confirmed
by obtaining the following header menu line at the top of the graphics area:

Header menu

The Graphics Editor tool to input the plan view curve should already be active, i.e. it
is ready for the input of a point.
The plan view curve of the structure line is input as a polygon. In our example it consists
of a single side (start point (0,0), end point (10,0).
Structure line points (curve points of the plan view curve) in addition to the start and
end points have to be input everywhere where the cross section changes and where there
are supports.
" Input the two points
(0,0) and (10,0), and close the polygon input with <Q>.
" Exit the input mode with [OK] in the header menu.
The structure line should now be visible as a connection between the tops of the col-
umns. Since in the plan view curve we have only input two points, it comprises a sec-
tion, which for the further input is treated analogously to a bar member.
" Open with this dialogue the button for the structure line
sections (SLA).
" Automatically the button on the left becomes active, so
that the structure line section symbols are visible.
" Select the SLA, by clicking on its symbol.

" Select as cross section ’Beam’ and then [Apply].

Support Nodes:
" Input both supports (fully fixed) at the bottoms of the
columns

Input the Tendons

" Change to the tabsheet ’Prestressing’

STATIKï5 Hï9
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

Tendons are always put in individual groups. In order to input our tendon, we first have
to define a tendon group:

" Define a new tendon group using the button shown on

the left and accept the default values in the dialogue:

" Open the dialogue in this way.

" Set the dialogue for the input of the tendon ’SG1’ as fol-
lows:

The values for the minimum radius of curvature and the diam-
eter of the duct are of no significance.
" Select [Introduce] in the Tendon dialogue.
Then you come - as in the input of the structure line - to a special input mode for the
tendon input. The graphic shows the developed area through the structure line, in
which the profile of the structure line and the boundaries of the cross section can be
seen.
" The Graphics Editor tool to input the tendon side view
curve should now be active, i.e. it is waiting for the input
of the first point. For the next step you can leave it active,
or you can exit it using <Esc> and after setting the scale
exaggeration you can start again.
" Select a somewhat exaggerated representation, by mov-
ing the slider (shown on the left) and situated at the bot-
tom of the screen a little to the right.

Hï10 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

" Now input the side view curve of the tendon, by sketch-
ing roughly its profile - firstly using the mouse - with the
three polygon points shown (from left to right).
Ultimately it should look as follows:

exit input mode other tendons section points and curve

invisible handles not visible

object points visible tendon point

. In order to keep this example fairly simple, we do not deal with all aspects of the curve’s input.
You will learn more about this in Example 2.

After the tendon has been sketched with the desired number of points, we want to mod-
ify the properties of these points for the task in hand.

" Make the object points visible, but the section and curve
handles invisible.

" Select the first tendon point and using <RMB> call its
Properties dialogue.
" The distance S should be 0.00.

" Select for the eccentricity ’PT constraint line > z explicit’
with a value of 0.00, then [Apply]
’z explicit’ means with reference to the structure line
" Select the middle tendon point.

" Set the distance S to 5.00;

" Select for the eccentricity ’PT constraint line > relative
from below’ with a value of 0.10;
’relative from below’ means with reference to the bottom edge of
the cross section. The corresponding PT constraint line is the
default PT constraint line (vertical through the axis or the
centre of gravity, respectively). More on PT constraint lines
can be found in the Help in the dialogue.

" The tangent direction should run parallel to the structure

line.

We leave the tangent lengths as they are. With the tangent lengths the shape of the curve
in the neighbourhood of a curve point can be influenced. Increasing it would mean that
the tendon would be longer in the neighbourhood of the bottom boundary.

The arc radius at the bottom of the dialogue has no significance here too, as nowhere
do we want to change the minimum radius.

" Make the changes effective using [Apply].

" Select the last tendon point and set the distance S to 10.00
and the eccentricity to ’PT constraint line > z explicit’

STATIKï5 Hï11
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

with a value of 0.00;

then [Apply]
. After making changes to the individual curve points it may be that a curve is no longer ’nice
and smooth’. If one wants to correct the tangent directions and lengths for selected or all curve
points automatically, such that a ’pretty’ curve results, there is a function in the Context menu
of the curve points for doing this. The eccentricities are thereby not changed.
We want to apply this function to the middle curve point, so that a symmetrical tendon
is given and we should obtain the same results that are shown later. If we do not do
this, then the tangent lengths depend of the first sketch of the tendon and are thus differ-
ent for each user. We could have also assigned above pre−defined values of the tangent
lengths for the correction of the point. But since they do not have any quantitative physi-
cal meaning, we could not have justified a given value.
" Select the middle curve point.
" Select in the Context menu (called by <RMB>) ’Default
Tangent Vector ’.
" Exit the input mode with [OK] in the header menu.
. If you want to modify the tendon geometry later, select the tendon and call its Properties dia-
logue. In the first tabsheet of this dialogue you will find the button, with which
you can enter the input mode once again and
you can modify the tendon as required.

Input of Live Load

" Input a new loading called ’NL’ with a distributed load
−20kN/m over the whole beam.

Input of the Results Combination

We want a results combination for the loadings EG (dead load (self−weight), automati-
cally created), NL and define the prestressing. Since we are interested in extreme fibre
stresses in the concrete part of the cross section, in the prestress loading we have to
select the part <PZ> (see Ch. H 1.3.4 on this)
" Change to the Analysis tabsheet and select the button for
loading combinations.
" Introduce a new loading combination and give it the
name ’Komb1’.
" Sort the loading list according to loading IDs (if you have
not already done so)
" Select in the loading list the line with ’EG’ and
accept these using the button shown left in the combina-
tion specification.
" Do this also for the loading ’NL’ and the prestress load-
ing V1@0PZ.
The prestress loading ID comprises the following three parts_
− V1 ID of the tendon group
− @0 construction stage number (0 is the initial state)
− PZ the desired proportion (P=negative section force part for the tendon,
Z=constraint part)

Results
" Display the section forces and extreme values of
the concrete stresses for the individual loadings and the

Hï12 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

defined results combination. Also inspect the different

parts of the prestress loading.

Results examples: (just one beam selected each time)

results combination
Moment My Komb1

loading NL alone

Extreme stress in
the concrete
for Komb1

STATIKï5 Hï13
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

H 2.2 Straight Two Span Beam with Construction Stage

H 2.2.1 Task

Structure in the final state:

QSE QSEF QSF QSS2 QSS1 QSS2 QSF QSEF QSE

6.2 31.7 8.1 8.1 21.1 6.2

46.0 35.4

Structure in construction stage BZ1 (carriageway slab in the spans not yet concreted):

Cross sections: concrete

C35/45
0.28

0.30

0.28

0.28
2.40

QSF QSS2 QSS1

.18

(QSEF) QSE

.7
1.20 .5 2.00 1.70 .8 1.20 1.20 .5 2.00 1.70 .8 1.20

Tendons: reinforcing steel Y1770, minimum radius=7.4m

SG1: 2 tendons at 25*150mm2 = 2*3750mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=9293kN g=straight
Po Po
0.32

0.16

g
2.19
1.86

1.65
g g g

1.0 1.0
20.0 24.0 2. 20.0 2. 13.4

SG2: 2 tendons at 25*150mm2 = 2*3750mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=9293kN

Po fest
0.16

2.19
1.34

1.79

g g

1.0
16.0 5.0 25.0 5.0

SG3: 2 tendons at 14*150mm2 = 2*2100mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=5200kN

g
Po
0.16
2.04

fest
1.65

g g
0.4

1.0
6.0 0.8 19.2 2. 13.4
SG4: 2 tendons at 25*150mm2 = 2*3750mm2 , Po=2*0.7*fpk*Ap=9293kN
Po fest
0.16

2.19
1.34

1.60

g g

1.0
16.0 5.0 25.0 7.0

Hï14 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

Tasks:

Construction In the construction stage BZ1 all tendons are stressed to 30% of Po and the falsework is
stage BZ1: lowered. It is assumed that the falsework no longer provides any support at the end of
prestressing.
In this state (Loadings Dead Load + Prestress) the section forces and extreme fibre
stresses in the homogeneous cross section have to be determined.
Final state: − 100% of Po is now used up
− For kerbs and road surfacing there is an additional permanent loading of 18kN/m
− As live loads the highway loads according to SIA 261 shall be introduced, and only
Load Model 1 without horizontal forces. A carriageway width of 6m, centred,
shall be assumed.
For these loadings the ordinary reinforcement for the ultimate load limit state (permanent/
temporary design situation) has to be determined.

H 2.2.2 Overview of Procedure

Before we begin with a detailed description of the input steps, we first give a brief over-
view of the planned procedure.
Decision to make: In order to simplify the input, the tendons are not input in the webs,
but concentrated in the axis of symmetry Thus in the cross sections no PT constraint
lines are necessary.

A) Input of Structure and Prestressing Data

1) start new 3D analysis
2) define code and material;
input cross sections QSE, QSF (2 variants: BZ1, final state), QSS1, QSS2
. In the case of haunching it should be noted that the program can interpolate the cross sections
geometrically. This is only possible if the cross sections to be interpolated are of the same type,
i.e. they must have the same number of cross section elements and also these must be of the
same type and may only differ in the coordinate values of their points. In the case of sides of
the plan outline the start sides must also correspond.
Therefore the span cross section QSF with its 2 variants cannot be interpolated using
QSE, which is why an additional span section QSEF has to be introduced which is
compatible with QSE.
3) input structure line (QS−variation corresponds to construction stage BZ1 = basic
state)
4) input support nodes
5) define construction stage ’Final State’
6) assign cross sections to the final state
7) prestressing: tendon group in BZ1
8) input all tendons, prestressing steps in corrwct construction stages

B) Task 1
1) input dead load in construction stage BZ1
2) define combination loading Dead Load + Prestress
3) cross section results for loading combination

C) Task 2
1) add bottom and top reinforcement to cross sections

STATIKï5 Hï15
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

2) generate live loads with highway load generator

3) create limit state specification for the final state
4) set up special analysis ’RC Analyses’ for the dimensioning of the ordinary reinforce-
ment
5) request results for the RC analysis

H 2.2.3 Detailed Description of Input

Start Program, Material Definition

" Start the program and open a new analysis; set the Entry
dialogue as shown left.

" Call the material dialogue (Settings > Materials) and se-
lect for the given material ’Concrete’ with the class
C35/45 and for reinforcing steel Y1770.

Input Cross Sections

" Call the Cross Sections Library and from there FAGUS-5
>
" Input the cross section with the name QSE initialised on
entering FAGUS-5 and input the circumference of this
cross section.
As mentioned in the overview, in the cross sections we need an axis point, which in
each cross section lies in the same position with respect to the carriageway axis. We
decide upon the position 1.00 m below the carriageway axis.
" Input the axis point 1.00 m below the carriageway axis.

1.0

Achspunkt
" Input analogously the cross sections QSS1, QSS2 and
QSEF. QSEF is used for the span−side end of the bound-
ary section of the haunched beam and has to be compat-
ible therefore with QSE (interpolation possible), i.e. the
simplest way of creating it is by copying and modifying
QSE.
During construction the span cross section QSF consists of only the two webs and the
slab is added to it at the end point. In order to be able to model this correctly we need
a cross section with the three partial cross sections ’StegL’ (’WebL’), ’StagR’ (’WebR’) and
’Platte’ (’Slab’). Then we work with the cross section variants. For Construction Stage
1 we decide upon the variant ’BZ1’, for which only the two partial web cross sections
are active and in the variant ’End of Construction’ in addition the partial cross section
with the slab is activated.
" Define the cross section QSF with the three partial cross
sections StegL, StegR and Platte.
" Change to the tabsheet ’Variants’ and with the button
shown on the left create the variant with the ID ’BZ1’.
Deactivate the slab.
" In the same way create a second variant called ’End of
Construction’, in which you activate the slab.

Hï16 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

" Exit FAGUS-5. The dialogue ’Cross Sections Library’ in

STATIK-5 should now contain the five input cross sec-
tions.

Input of the Structure

A series of members to be prestressed must be defined as a structure line. To find out
what a structure line is see Sections E 2 and H 1.3.1.
" Open the Structure Line dialogue

" Input the identifier ’SL1’ and do not change the pre−de-
fined plan view plane ’x−y’.
On the plan view plane: For a structure line first its plan view curve is input and then
the variation in side view in the developed side view surface (surface through structure
line, normal to plan view plane). Although in most cases the recommended x-y plane
is used as the plan view plane, any working plane can be defined as the plan view plane.
We choose here the pre−defined horizontal plane ’x−y’ with Z=0 as plan view plane.
" Click on the button [Introduce]. Thereby you enter the
input mode for the plan view curve, which shows the
following header menu line at the top of the graphics
area:

header
menu

The graphics editor tool shown left to input the plan view curve should be already ac-
tive, i.e. it is ready for the input of the first point.
" Input the plan view curve of the structure line as a poly-
gon, which in our example is a straight line.
Structure line points (curve points of the plan view curve) are
input everywhere where the cross section changes and where
there are supports.

6.2 31.7 8.1 8.1 21.1 6.2

The complete plan view curve should look as follows, whereby details of the represen-
tation still require the use of several buttons:

STATIKï5 Hï17
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

input curve points symbols for handles for

curve sections shaping curve

With this button in the Graphics Editor tool curve points, curve sections and handles
for the plan view curve can be made visible, without selecting it. It was active for the
above figure.
The presented symbols for the curve sections have no significance here, neither do the
handles (handle is a point for the purpose of manipulation) to shape the curves, since
we only need a straight line. On the use of handles, use the Help button in the header
menu.
" Choose [OK] in the header menu, in order to exit the
input mode for the plan view curve.
We come now to the properties of the structure line sections, which are largely the same
as for ordinary bar members.
" With this button open the dialogue for the Structure Line
Sections (SLA).

The button shown left is automatically activated in order

to make the structure line section symbols visible.
" Select the first SLA, by clicking on its symbol.

" Set the cross sections corresponding to the section and

select [Apply].
" Also assign all other SLAs the correct cross sections. In
both span sections select ’QSF’ with the variant ’BZ1’.
" To check the variation of the cross sections activate the
wire frame model layer temporarily.

If haunched sections should be displayed as ’a wire frame’, then

the start sides of the plan view polygons of the corresponding
cross sections are not the same. You can modify this in
FAGUS-5 (Select plan view outline, <RMB> > ’Select First
Polygon Side’)
" Deactivate the layer for the wire frame model.

" Input the support nodes: at the start of the structure line
a non−moveable bearing rotational about the Y-axis, and
in the other support points the same kind of support,
which however can be moved in the X direction.

In order to find the right point in the middle, it is best to acti-

vate the visibility of the object points.
" Define a construction stage with the name ’Final State’.
To do this click on the button shown,

Hï18 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

" and then on the button for a New Construction Stage.

Input the required name, then [Introduce] and [Close].
In the construction stage field, ’Final State’ should now stand,
with a yellow background colour.
" Select again the SLA button and now in the final state
assign to the field sections the cross section variant ’QSF’
’Final State’.
" To check the variation of the cross sections activate the
wire frame model layer temporarily.

Input of the Tendons

" Change to the tabsheet ’Prestressing’
" Define a new tendon group using the button shown on
the left and accept the dialogue that appears with the
pre−defined values:

" Open the Tendon dialogue.

" Set the dialogue for the input of the tendon ’SG1’ as fol-
lows:

" Select [Introduce] in the Tendon dialogue.

You now come - as with the input of the structure line - into a special input mode for
the input of tendons. Presented is the plan view surface developed in a plane through
the structure line, in which you can see the variation of the structure line and the bound-
aries of the cross section.
" The Graphics Editor tool, shown on the left, for the input
of the tendon plan view curve should now be active, i.e.

STATIKï5 Hï19
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

it is ready for the input of the first point. You can leave it
active for the next step, or you can exit it using <Esc>
and activate it again after setting the exaggerated scale.
" Select a fairly exaggerated scale, by moving the slider
tool at the bottom of the screen a little to the right.

" Input the tendon, by roughly sketching it - at first using

the mouse - with as many intermediate points as are
given in the problem description.
In the end it should look like this:

exit input mode other tendons section points and curve

invisible handles invisible

object points visible tendon point

Note on the Input of Curves using :

In a first step such curves are input as polygons, i.e. they consist of a series of construc-
tion points. But in contrast to polygons a curve is obtained whose variation is determi-
ned by additional parameters in these construction points. A curve section is designa-
ted as the part of the curve between two neighbouring construction points. Its variation
depends only on the parameters at its end points and has no influence on the variation
of neighbouring sections.
Regarding the additional properties in the construction points it is a question primarily
of the tangent direction and the tangent length, which in general can be specified in
every construction point independently for the adjacent sections.
variation of the tangent variation of the tangent
tangent direction in A length in A

curve
section

A A
tangent
handle

Fig. Hï5 Tangent parameters of the curve sections

The tangents can be modified by moving their handles. For the fine adjustment howe-
ver it is better to use the settings in the following dialogue. In this case for a better over-
view the handles can also be made invisible.

Hï20 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

In addition to the tangent parameters at the ends of the sections a straight piece or an
arc can also be introduced. These parameters, depending on the use of the curves
(structure line or tendon) have some restrictions. In the case of tendons straight pieces
are only possible at the ends of the tendons (setting in the Tendon dialogue and not
in the tendon points) and the arc pieces have as radius the minimum radius specified
for the tendon.
tangent
arc, defined B B
by tangent,
radius and E radius
E
variation of the
tangent length
curve section in B
(arc included)

Fig. Hï6 Arc at end of a curve section

After the tendon has been roughly sketched in a first step, we now want to specify its
shape by setting the described parameters in the tendon points corresponding to the
requirements.
" Make the object points visible, but the section and curve
handles invisible.
" Select the first tendon point and call its Propeties dia-
logue using the <RMB>.
" The distance should be 0.00. Select for the eccentricity ’PT
constraint line > relative to bottom’ with a value of 1.86,
then [Apply]
We have not input any PT constraint lines in the cross sections. The default PT con-
straint line vertical through the axis point from the bottom to the top cross section
boundary (enclosing rectangle) however is always available. The input of the z-eccen-
tricity with respect to the bottom or top end of the PT constraint line is normally easier
than an explict input, i.e. with respect to the structure line (=axis point).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Po g=gerade Po
0.32

0.16

g
2.19
1.86

g g g 1.65

1.0 1.0
20.0 24.0 2. 20.0 2. 13.4

" Corrections im 2nd point:

Distance: 20.0
Eccentricity: 0.32 from bottom
Tangent direction: // Structure line
" Corrections in 3rd point:
Distance 44.0
Eccentricity: 2.19 from bottom
Tangent direction: // Structure line
Activate arc and for E1 set −8.0
" Corrections in 4th point (at centre support):
Distance: 46.0
Eccentricity: 2.19 from bottom
Tangent direction: // Structure line
Activate arc and for E2 set −8.0

STATIKï5 Hï21
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

" Corrections in 5th point:

Distance: 66.0
Eccentricity: 0.16 from bottom
Tangent direction: // Structure line

" Corrections in 6th point:

Distance: 68.0
Eccentricity: 0.16 from bottom
Tangent direction: // Structure line

" Corrections in 7th point (end point):

Distance: 81.4
Eccentricity: 1.65 from bottom
Adjust tangent direction, until visually OK

" Tangent direction, if necessary, also adjusted in Point 1

until visually OK
The tendon should now correspond quite well to the given example. Changes in the
tangent lengths or the arc radii offer some scope to influence the varying position of
the tendon. Try doing this! These functions may of course also be undone at any time
using the Undo Function.

" If the tendon now has its (provisional) final shape, exit
the input mode using [OK] in the Header menu.

" Thereby the tendons in the current tendon group are

checked and the prerequisities are given to be able to in-
spect the graphical representation of the force variation
and the tabular documentations.

" Select the tendon and the button for the force variation
figure.

" Inspect the tabular output of the tendon data.

The tabular output is given in all definition points of the tendon as well as in all points
of the distance list, which can be arbitrarily configured below in the 1st tabsheet of the
Tendon dialogue.

" Input the other three tendons in an analogous manner.

Pay attention to the correct settings in the Tendon dia-
logue (e.g. no straight end pieces in the case of fixed an-
chors, correct prestressing procedure, etc.).

. If several tendons lie almost on top of each other, it is difficult to select them by clicking. In
this case help is given by the list field shown on the left, by means of which a tendon can be
selected via its name.

Hï22 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

H 2.2.4 Task 1

Required are the results for the section forces and extreme fibre stresses due to Dead
Load (self−weight) + Prestressing during construction.
For this we need the loading self−weight in the basic state, which should be created
automatically. Check this in the Loads tabsheet.
We want the required result as a results combination and for this purpose define a corre-
sponding loading combination in the Analysis tabsheet.
" Change to the Analysis tabsheet and select the button for
loading combinations.
" Introduce a new loading combination and give it the
name ’Komb1’.
" Sort the Loading List according to loading IDs (if you
have not already done so)
" Select in der Loading List the line with ’EG’ and
enter this in the combination specification using the but-
ton shown on the left.
In addition there are the effects of prestressing in the basic state (Number 0).
Each prestress loading in the Loading List has a name (e.g. V1@0 = tendon group ’V1’
during construction ’0’) and one of the following IDs, which have significance for the
output of section forces (see also Ch. H 1.3.4):
<PZ> part of section force for concrete cross section
i.e. the prestressing is considered to be an external action
<Z> only the section forces for the constrained part
<P> only the section forces for the the tendons
Since we are interested in section forces and extreme fibre stresses in the homogeneous
concrete cross section, we have to select the part <PZ> (see above).
" Take the loading line with ’V1@0PZ’ in the combination
specification and close the dialogue with [OK].
" Change to the Results tabsheet and inspect the results for
the loading combination ’Komb1’.

H 2.2.5 Task 2

For the final state the amount of ordinary reinforcement for the ultimate limit state
Type 2 (permanent/temporary design situation) has to be determined, whereby
S as Live Loads the highway loading according to SIA 261 has to be introduced, and
specifically only Load Model 1 without horizontal forces. One shall assume a car-
riageway width of 6m, centrally arranged.
S for kerbs and road surfacing there is also an additional permanent loading of 18kN/
m.
For this task the following points must be considered:
1) Ordinary reinforcement layers and shear walls for the dimensioning of the stirrups
have to be added to the cross sections.
2) The missing loading still has to be input, i.e.
- the missing self−weight of the slabs in the spans
- the additional permanent load for the kerbs and road surfacing
- the live loads

STATIKï5 Hï23
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

3) The limit state specification for the final state has to be prepared.
4) The special analysis ’RC Analyses’ for the dimensioning of the ordinary reinforce-
ment has to be specified.
5) Finally, the results for the RC analysis have to be generated.
Some of the points listed in Task 2 have nothing to do directly with prestressing and
do not therefore have to be described in detail here. If you want more details, you can
load the completed example from the menu ’Help > Load Examples > BspH2.1’. We con-
sider only specific points here.

The Limit State Specification

The know−how for dealing with limit state specifications is assumed here. A new addi-
tion is the prestressing, which is introduced as a special action and thus also appears
in the limit state specification with its own action line:

In the verification of structural safety (ultimate load) or a dimensioning based on it, the
prestress is regarded as an initial stress state and the tendons are considered on the resis-
tance side. Thus of the effects of the prestress loading we only need the constrained
part.
In our example the prestress was applied in two steps, the first one during construction
and the second in the final state. Therefore both the corresponding loadings have to
be considered in combination. The necessary settings may be seen in the dialogue.
. The loading list (left part of the Actions dialogue) is best sorted here according to actions
(button at the bottom)

Dimensioning (RC Analyses)

A prerequisite for RC analyses is a corresponding preparation of the cross sections. Rein-
forcement layers to be dimensioned must exist as well as shear walls to resist lateral
forces and torsion. No details are provided here as they do not have anything to do with
the prestressing.
In each dimensioning step the tendons are automatcally introduced in the current cross
section.

Hï24 STATIKï5
Part H Prestressing H 2 Examples

The specification for RC analyses is as for ordinary reinforced structures, whereby in

addition the loadings G1 and G2 have to be given:

G1 is the loading, which is used for the determination of the decompression part of the
prestressing force. G1 and G2 together are the permanent actions, which together with
the prestressing action are used to determine the prestress losses (on this see also Sec-
tion H 1.3.5 and the FAGUS-5 manual).

Still to be checked is also the set of analysis parameters ’Structural Safety’ used in
FAGUS-5.

. The loss of prestress is of practically no importance in ultimate load considerations, which

is why the settings for this here are hardly of any significance. More important would be the
stress verifications in the serviceability state.

STATIKï5 Hï25
Part G R.C. Analysis G 1 Overview

Part GR.C. Analysis

G 1 Overview
The Reinforced Concrete (R.C.) Analysis Module in STATIK-5 permits an automatic
execution of design and analysis tasks on R.C. cross sections for the limit state values
of the section forces determined in STATIK-5.
The analyses are carried out in the modules of the program FAGUS-5 . For questions
relating to FAGUS-5 analyses the user is referred to the manual for that program.

G 1.1 Prerequisites for an R.C. Analysis

Before a reinforced concrete analysis can be defined and executed in STATIK-5, the fol-
lowing prerequisites must be fulfilled:
S Required Licence: The STATIK-5 Licence you are working with requires the option
’FAGUS Analyses’.
S Limit State Specifications:
The section forces used for the analyses are provided by the limit state values, for
which a specification has to be available. If there are several analysis tasks, in some
circumstances several different limit state value specifications are needed. On state
value specifications see Ch. LEERER MERKER as well as page A-60 of this manual.
S Cross Sections with Reinforcement:
The members to be analysed have to consist of R.C. cross sections with reinforce-
ment. One may use parametricised cross sections or ones that were explicitly input
into FAGUS-5.
S Results Points in the Cross Sections for Additional Results:
The R.C. analyses produce a standard set of results, which should be sufficient in
simple cases. By introducing results points in the cross sections (in FAGUS-5) addi-
tional results, e.g. the stiffnesses of the cross sections, are made available. The results
points are described in the FAGUS-5 manual.
S Analysis Parameters:
For an analysis FAGUS-5 requires a set of so−called analysis parameters. Whether
one, for example, dimensions on the basis of admissible stresses or maximum edge
strains, this is one of the analysis parameters. The sets of analysis parameters avail-
able in FAGUS-5 are provided with names and can be selected in the specification
of analysis tasks. Therefore you have to know the standard analysis parameters avail-
able in FAGUS-5 and in special cases define one’s own sets of analysis parameters
in FAGUS-5.
S Definition of Design Sections:
You have to specify beforehand, in which sections the analyses are to be carried out.
Here one cannot use the quick section specification normally used for the output
of section forces (a button in the tabsheet ’Results’) but a so−called design section
specification has to be given, which is defined in the Member attributes. For this pur-
pose there is the tabsheet in the ’Member’ dialogue shown below:

Besides generated sections (in n sectiond per member element or in regular inter-
vals) individual sections can also be introduced in various positions. In the case of
negative values the distances are measured from the end of the member.
Input Field for Reinforcement Groups:

STATIKï5 Gï1
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

Tabsheet in the ’Member’ dialogue to

define design sections

In this input field the reinforcement that has to be used in the analysis is defined.
If the field is empty, the reinforcement is used as it is in the active cross section or
of the active cross section variant.
For later program versions it is planned that particular reinforcement groups (see
FAGUS-5) can be activated for certain member sections. Then these groups are
active in this mode only and other reinforcement that also is present in the cross
section is not considered.
Any input values in this field do not have any effect in the current pogram version.
Buttons for Fans:
In sections, which are denoted as fan", no longitudinal reinforcement compo-
nents due to shear and torsion are added. They are only possible at the ends of the
members and their introduction is only really meaningful at supports (except end
supports). Therefore, in the case of continuous beams, from support to support
individual members have to be input, in order to be able to specify the fan sections
as desired. More on fans will be found below in the description of the dimension-
ing.
S Section Forces analysed on the basis of Response Spectra Analyses:
In addition to the limit state values for section forces already mentioned, section
forces based on response spectra analyses (seismic action) can also be considered.
On this see Ch. F . For R.C. analyses with response spectra results to be possible,
the response spectra section forces have to be explicitly created beforehand in the
’Results’ tabsheet (’Lightning’ button).

G 1.2 Reinforced Concrete Analysis Procedure

The execution of an R.C. analysis involves the following steps:

1) Checking the prerequisites for an R.C. analysis given in the preceding chapter.
2) Formulating the analysis tasks as special analyses in the tabsheet ’Analysis’
(described in the next chapter)
3) Execution of the analysis and inspection of the available results in the tabsheet
’Results’ (described in the next chapter).

G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

Specifications for R.C. analysis tasks are defined and managed in the tabsheet ’Analysis’
using the button ’Special Analyses’:

Gï2 STATIKï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

1
Define with this button a
new special analysis.
(Adjacent buttons are to
modify or delete a
selected analysis line)

A dialogue for selecting

analysis type;
Select
’R.C. Analysis’

If you have defined a new special analysis ’R.C. Analysis’ or called an existing one to
modify, then the dialogue shown below appears:

Obligatory specification ID, under which

the results can be called

By activating a button in this column

each time an analysis task is defined

In these input fields the limit state specifi-

cation is given, for which the analysis task
has to be carried out

The section force components, for which

limit state values are determined and for
which analyses are used.
Consideration of response spectra results,
if required
The analysis parameters to be used for the
analysis tasks (see FAGUS-5)
Here special parameters can be set for
the FAGUS-5 analyses (see later)

As may be seen from the dialogue, there are three different types of analysis task: Rein-
forcement dimensioning, stress and ultimate load analyses. They are explained in more
detail in the following chapters.

STATIKï5 Gï3
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

G 2.1 Design
Here the untensioned longitudinal reinforcement in the cross sections provided for
dimensioning as well as shear reinforcement are dimensioned. Several dimensioning
tasks can be defined, each of which has its specific actions and analysis parameters. The
program proceeds as follows:
S It begins with the first dimensioning task. The determined reinforcement cross sec-
tional areas act as default values for any subsequent design tasks, which increase
individual reinforcement areas as required, but never decrease them.
S Within a dimensioning task the dimensioning is carried out in every step for each
required action.
The actions for a dimensioning task are determined by the limit state specification set
in the above dialogue with the section force components, for which they should be
applied. If, e.g. My is requested, the two section force combinations My-min with the
corresponding components and My-max with the corresponding components are
investigated. If required, a response spectrum result may be added.
The section force combinations investigated by the program can be controlled section
by section (see Ch. G 3.2).
The results from the dimensioning analyses always represent the final result from all
requested dimensioning tasks. The headings of the table for the standard results out-
put looks as follows:

Putting the reinforcement together in bottom and top positions (flanges") is useful in
many cases (continuous beam, typical beam in frame systems) and therefore respresents
the standard output. Analogous for the upper and lower reinforcement the following
columns are output:
As (M,N): reinforcement only for bending and if present a normal force
As (M,N,V): As(M,N) plus additional areas due to shear (and torsion); (more on this
in the next sub−chapter)
x/h: max. ratio of the height of concrete compression zone to effective stati-
cal height
In the last column with Asw1 the required vertical stirrup reinforcement is output, if the
cross sections used have such a result point.
In the case of complicated cross sections it is usually necessary to have a specific output
of individual results using result points and result combinations (see FAGUS-5 Manual).
In the column Asw1" in the above table, for example, such a result point is set. Corre-
sponding to the identifierAsw1" there exists for most parametricised cross sections with
reinforcement a result combination giving the required stirrups area in the z-direction.
If a result point with this name is introduced with user−defined cross sections, its result
value appears in the last column of the above standard table.
. At the beginning of an R.C. analysis the program checks the initial cross section of the first
member. If result points are defined there, additional tables with the result points found are
created and the corresponding table headings are written. Therefore, this first cross section
determines the amount of results. All subsequent cross sections also deliver corresponding
results, if they have analogous result points with the same name.

G 2.1.1 Additional Longitudinal (Main) Reinforcement due to Shear/Torsion

For a more detailed description see Ch. B 9 Shear and Torsion Models for Reinforced
Concrete" in the FAGUS-5 manual.

Gï4 STATIKï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

FAGUS-5 executes its analyses exclusively section by section and takes no account of
section force distributions along the member and also cannot handle the introduction
of forces. In order nevertheless to be able create in the desired way the results shown
in the figure below in the vicinity of of the supports (no shift), support sections have
to be identified by the attribute Fan". This, as described above, has to be done in the
’Attributes’ dialogue of the members.

tensile forces in reinforcement :

shear contribution

tensile force due to

bending (and normal
force)

sections with ’Fan’ attribute

In ’Fan’ sections, therefore, no longitudinal reinforcement due to shear and torsion is

added and the curve of the total required longitudinal reinforcement remains constant
until it intersects the shifted line" (see figure).

G 2.2 Stress Analysis

By stress analysis FAGUS-5 understands the calculation of strains and thereby also
stresses in the cross section with given reinforcement due to the action of a section force.
Several stress analyses can be defined, each of which has its own specific actions and
analysis parameters.
Actions: Analogous to the dimensioning tasks, an action is specified for each stress
analysis by means of a limit state value specification and the section force components,
for which building of the limit state value is to be used. For a section force component
the stress analysis is carried out both for the minimum and the maximum value and for
the other corresponding section force components.
Analysis parameters: For each stress analysis a specific analysis parameter set can be
specified.
Reinforcement: With stress analyses from STATIK-5 the reinforcement in the cross sec-
tions is assumed to be as follows:
S If an R.C. analysis includes no dimensionings (these also come first), the reinforce-
ment is used as defined in the cross section.
S If there are dimensioning tasks in the R.C. analysis, in each cross section the rein-
forcement is used that results from the dimensioning (see above) (without contribu-
tions due to shear/torsion).
Results: In all results output for stress analyses it is basically a question of limit state
values. These come, on the one hand, from the different section force combinations
with a stress analysis, and, on the other, limit state values are also built from several stress
analyses, if necessary.
The results of stress analyses always represent the final results from all requested stress
analysis tasks. The table headings for the standard output results looks as follows:

Here too top" and bottom" only makes sense in simple cases (uniaxial bending, simple
symmetrical cross sections). Besides these standard results, by means of result points,

STATIKï5 Gï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

cross section results and result combinations (see FAGUS-5) further results can be
obtained.

. At the beginning of an R.C. analysis the program checks the initial cross section of the first
member. If result points are defined there, additional tables with the result points found are
created and the corresponding table headings are written. This first cross section determines
therefore the amount of results. All subsequent cross sections also deliver corresponding
results, if they have analogous result points with the same name.

G 2.3 Ultimate Load Analysis

Ultimate load analyses deliver, for each section, the minimum ultimate load factor from
all section force combinations and several ultimate load analyses, if present. One can
also define several ultimate load analyses, each of which has its own actions and analy-
sis parameters.

The reinforcement, as in the stress analyses, is that used in previous dimensioning tasks.
If no dimensioning has been specified, the existing reinforcement in the cross sections
is used.

G 2.4 Members with Variable Cross Sections

In the case of members with different cross sections at their start and end points the cross
sectional geometry within the member is interpolated linearly. For this to be possible
with respect to
S cross section type
S number of points on boundary and input sequence
S number of reinforcing positions and input sequence

the cross sections must match. For two cross sections to match in this way, it is best to
make a copy of the one and to modify it accordingly. As materials always those of the
member cross section at the start are used.

Gï6 STATIKï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

G 2.5 Additional Parameters

Besides the analysis parameters described above, which are combined in FAGUS-5 and
selected in STATIK-5 for the individual analysis tasks, there are some further parameters,
which are input as a list in the form

PARAM1=WER T1; PARAM2=WER T2 ; ...

in the specification dialogue.

In the current program version the following parameters are allowed:

S BENDING=UNIAX
The whole structure is analysed for simple bending, i.e. equilibrium is only fulfilled
about the neutral axis constrained in the direction of the y’-axis, but not however
for that about the z’-axis.
BENDING=BIAX
The whole structure is analysed for bending in two planes (default)
BENDING=COL+,BEAM−
Different treatment of column and beam cross sections (+/−). With the above setting
all columns (COL+) with bending in two planes and the beam cross sections
(BEAM−) are analysed for simple bending.
S FORCES=N+,VY−,VZ−,MX−,MY+,MZ+
Section forces identified by −" are set to zero.

G 2.6 Section Force Results from a Response Spectra Analysis

In the case of section forces obtained from a response spectra analysis (Ch. F) all values
are positive, but they could in principle occur with any combination of signs. They can-
not therefore be simply added to the other limit state value results, but they have to be
considered in different combinations.

In each section the dimensioning limit state values of a section force component are
available together with the corresponding values of the other components, e.g. the two
section force sets

[S1]=Mymax, Mz, N;
[S2]=Mymin, Mz, N
as well as the response spectra results Mya, Mza, Na (all positive).

FAGUS-5 now investigates, for each section force set, all 8 section force combinations,
which result from

[Si] + [r Mya, r Mza, r Na]

For shear dimensioning also the corresponding components of the response spectra
results in all possible variants of signs are investigated.
. In the detailed checking of the individual sections (see below) one can accurately check,
which section force combinations are investigated for the individual analysis tasks.

STATIKï5 Gï7
Part G R.C. Analysis G 2 Formulating a Reinforced Concrete Analysis

G 2.7 Documentation of the Specification

Before starting to print the R.C. analyses, it is advisable to have a print out of the com-
plete analysis specification, since the different analyses are partly dependent on one
another. Use the button on the left in the specification dialogue for R.C. analyses, to
create a print entry for the analysis specification.

G 2.8 Other Important Hints

For a successful execution of R.C. analyses the following points have to be observed:
S Cross sections, which are primarily subjected to a normal force, should be input as
columns. Thereby, in the dimensioning all reinforcement is increased uniformly.
S For cross sections with bending in two planes suitable reinforcement to resist bend-
ing about the z-axis also has to be provided. Arranging ’layers’ of reinforcement at
the bottom and top edges of the cross section is usually inadequate.
S Combining reinforcing areas using result points:
Unless otherwise specified the reinforcing areas for the bottom and top positions
are summed together. This is meaningful in the common case of beam dimensioning.
For cross sections in which there are no pronounced flanges, a single number would
be easier, and for complex cross sections with a number of reinforcing positions dif-
ferentiated results are necessary. In FAGUS-5 you can combine individual reinforcing
positions with the help of a result point (select desired reinforcing positions and set
a result point Longitudinal Reinforcement").
S Be sure to have a meaningful and compatible choice of names among the different
cross sections for any result point that is introduced. If, over parts of a structure, there
are cross sections with result points having the same name, STATIK-5 can create a
figure from the corresponding results. This of course is only meaningful if the results
represent the same thing everywhere.

Gï8 STATIKï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 3 Results Output

G 3 Results Output
G 3.1 Settings in the Tabsheet ’Results’
In the first list field of the ’Results’ tabsheet, besides the linearly analysed load cases,
the load case combinations and the limit state values the special analyses that were
defined in the ’Results’ tabsheet are also executed and are obtainable for the results.
These include also the R.C. analyses:

List of all R.C. analysis specifications

ID of a specific R.C. analysis specifi-
cation

In the second list field the requested analysis type and the individual section checks,
respectively, are selected.
[1] [2]

dimensioning
numerical
stress analysis output
ultimate load analysis graphical
individual section output
check

The choice of an analysis type is only necessary for the graphical output. In the case
of a numerical output all available results are output and the setting for the analysis type
has no effect. A special case is given by the setting Individual Section Check", to which
we will return in the next chapter.
The lines Additional" in figure [2] stand for additional results for the individual analysis
types. They are only available after a previous analysis with the setting from figure [1],
since it is only then known which additional results are available.
If the setting is for a graphical output, a choice of the available results quantities corre-
sponding to the analysis type is presented. For a numerical output this choice is not
necessary, since all results are always created.

dimensioning

stress analysis

additional results

In the case of additional results a list field with all available results is displayed.
As is usual in the ’Results’ tabsheet, the analysis corresponding to the settings is started
using the execution button, whereby beforehand certain settings, like the scale factor,
label type, etc. can be made using the ’Attributes’ button.

STATIKï5 Gï9
Part G R.C. Analysis G 3 Results Output

The print entries are made in the usual way both for tabulated and graphical results.
. The first time results are requested for an R.C. analysis - independent of the individual settings
in the ’Results’ tabsheet - all analysis tasks specified in the corresponding specification dia-
logue are analysed completely. These analyses can be very extensive and take up a correspon-
dingly large amount of time. However, the results remain saved for further output of results,
until other results (not from current R.C. analysis) are requested or something is changed,
which affects the results.
. The graphical results are created from the tabulated results, which are themselves based on
the specification of the dimensioning sections. If the sections are chosen to be closely spaced,
smoother plots are obtained, but the size of the tables is also extensive.

In order to reduce the graphical output to the essential sections, one can use the adjacent but-
ton at the top of the table window, with which one can switch between full and reduced display
of results. The print entries also correspond to the current view.

G 3.2 Detail Checking of the Individual Sections

The detailed check allows a comprehensive check of the analyses carried out in FA-
GUS-5 in any desired section.
With the output size switch to Section Check", select a member and then press the
execution button. The following window appears:

Setting for the section

within the selected
member

Cross section legend

Analysis arrow to select

the analysis type and
the section force com-
bination

Numerical results

Graphical results for

the analysis set above

Move the analysis arrow (see above figure), then the corresponding line is executed
immediately and the result in the bottom window is presented graphically. One should
note, what exactly is calculated in each analysis type:
S Design:
All dimensioning tasks are carried out, beginning with the first line up to and includ-
ing the line identified by the analysis arrow. The result shown corresponds to the
marked line. The previous dimensioning tasks determine the value of the initial
amount of reinforcement for the current executed dimensioning.

Gï10 STATIKï5
Part G R.C. Analysis G 3 Results Output

S Stress analysis:
Firstly all specified dimensioning tasks, if any, are executed, whereby the reinforce-
ment for all subsequent analyses is fixed. If there are no dimensionings, the rein-
forcement of the corresponding cross sections is used.
Then the stress analysis is executed with the selected line for the section force and
the analysis parameters that were set for the stress analysis.
S Ultimate load analysis:
Same procedure as for stress analysis.

STATIKï5 Gï11
Part G R.C. Analysis G 3 Results Output

Gï12 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

Part FDynamic Analysis

The dynamic analysis module of STATIK-5 comprises the analysis of natural vibrations
and the method of response spectra.

F 1 Natural Vibrations
F 1.1 Basics
In STATIK-5 the natural vibrations of frame structures are analysed according to the
theories of 1st and 2nd order. With the theory of 2nd order, for the member stiffnesses
the influence of initial axial forces, which are determined from the section forces for
any arbitrary loading, are taken into account.
The results of the analysis of natural vibrations are the mode shapes, the associated ei-
genfrequencies and the modal participation factors for the response spectra method.
To achieve this the following eigenvalue problems have to be solved:
(K − Zi2 * M) * Ii = 0 (1st order theory)
((K + KG (N))− Zi2 * M) * Ii = 0 (2nd order theory)
Zi : eigenvalue (frequency in radians) der i−th mode
Ii : mode shape of the i−th mode
M : mass matrix of the structure
K : elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix of the structure
Theoretically, as many eigenvalues can be determined as there are degrees of freedom
in the structure. In practice, however, only the n eigenvalues with the lowest eigenfre-
quencies are of interest. The number of eigenvalues n to be determined can be specified
by the program user.
The calculation of the eigenvalues and mode shapes is carried out iteratively, whereby
the analysis is continued until the relative change of all required eigenvalues from one
iteration step to the next is less than a given tolerance. It value can be specified by the
user. It is sufficiently small when the results do not change for a further reduction of
this value.
In principle, the determined mode shapes are arbitrary with respect to their amplitude.
They are normalized (i.e. scaled) by the program so that the following condition is fulfil-
led:
IiT * M * Ii = 1
In the case of another frequently encountered normalization the mode shapes are scaled
such that the largest displacement parameter has the value of 1.0. With this normaliza-
tion as well STATIK−5 permits the numerical output of mode shapes.
. The participation factors output for all eigenfrequencies for ground motions in the Xï, Yï and
Zïdirections (see below) are proportional to the scaling of the mode shapes and thus depend
on the type of normalization.

F 1.1.1 Modelling the Stiffness of a Structure

For a suitable modelling of the structure with respect to its stiffness basically the same
rules apply as with conventional statical analyses. Regarding member discretization, ho-
wever, the following has to be considered:

STATIKï5 Fï1
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

Whereas under static loads a member gives exact results, for dynamic analysis it may
have to be subdivided in order to obtain sufficiently accurate results. This is because
the program approximates the mode shapes for each member with cubic parabolas.
A frame structure with many members will probably give the desired mode shapes wi-
thout additional member subdivision. But without subdivision a simple member gives
unacceptable results even for the lowest eigenvalue, as is shown in the table below.
As a rough guide, it is recommended to introduce at least 2 beam elements for each half
wave of a mode shape.

L natural vibrations in lateral direction:

EI 2
Zi =
EI P Si/L i = 1, 2, 3, ...

i number of elements per member Z

mode shape
1 2 3 4 5 6 exact

1 1.110 1.004 1.001 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.0

2 5.087 4.440 4.047 4.016 4.007 4.003 4.0

3 11.160 9.990 9.165 9.072 9.036 9.0

4 20.350 18.570 17.760 16.370 16.190 16.0

5 33.220 28.230 27.750 25.660 25.0

6 45.770 44.640 40.060 39.960 36.0

. STATIK-5 verfügt im Stabdialog über eine einfache Möglichkeit, eingegebene Stäbe für die
Berechnung automatisch feiner unterteilen zu lassen.

Remarks on the influence of stiffness on the vibrational behaviour of

a structure:
From the equation for the natural frequency of a single degree of freedom system

w+ Ǹmk (k: Steifigkeit, m: Masse)

it follows that that both stiffness and mass appear in the square root in the expression
for the eigenfrequency. If, for example, one reduces the stiffness of the whole structure
by 50% to take into account the cracked state of concrete (such stiffness factors can be
input for the members), then the period of the fundamental mode of vibration is increa-
sed by the factor 1.41.
For some structures it is possible that together with the fundamental mode of vibration
of the whole structure numerous local eigenmodes occur, which may not be of interest
for the particular analysis (e.g. for hinged members, cables or vibrations in one direc-
tion, which are prevented by fixing devices that are not modelled). This can often be
prevented by increasing the stiffness of individual components, e.g. the non−relevant
bending stiffness of cable members. Such measures of course must not influence the
investigated behaviour of the structure as a whole.

F 1.1.2 Modelling the Mass of a Structure

In addition to statical considerations, for dynamic analyses the mass distribution has to
be carefully modelled. If the modelling of the masses is too approximate (e.g. only con-
centrated masses in the nodes) in some circumstances not all desired mode shapes can
be determined.

Fï2 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

In an analysis several mass distributions or combinations of mass distribution can be

defined, from which for one specific dynamic analysis only one is selected. A mass dis-
tribution can comprise the following mass elements:
S Eigenmasses (automatically determined for the cross section):
Eigenmasses are treated like line masses, whereby rotational components are auto-
matically taken into account. In the case of members of variable cross section it
should be observed that the mass distribution between the start and end of the
member is normally assumed to be linear. However, if in the analysis a subdivision
is requested for a member, then the cross section is geometrically interpolated be-
tween each intermediate point leading to a more exact mass distribution.
S Line masses:
These consist of one component with the unit [t/m], providing the necessary inertia
forces for accelerations about the axis (centre of gravity) of the member and rota-
tional components with the unit [tm2/m] to take into account the inertia moments
for angular accelerations about the axes of the local coordinate system. The distribu-
tion is constant or linear along the member or structure line axes.
S Concentrated masses in the nodes and at arbitrary positions on the members with
a translational component (unit [t]) for the displacements DX,DY,DZ and rotational
components (unit [tm2]), separately for the rotations RX,RY,RZ.

Concentrated masses can also have eccentricities. If they lie on members, then they
are eccentricities in the local directions y and z and for nodal masses in the global
(or the nodes’ own) directions X,Y,Z.

A concentrated mass is an idealized model for a mass having real dimensions. It must
be situated at the centre of gravity of the mass. However, since concentrated masses
can only be input at structural nodes or on member axes, their actual position has
to be defined with eccentricities.

If the assumption of concentration of the total mass at a point is inadequate, then

the corresponding rotational components have to be introduced. These are the mass
inertia moments about the corresponding axes of rotation. They are calculated using
the equation

Q+ ŕ r òdV
2
; with r as the distance of a volume element from the axis of rotation
V

Due to the close analogy of the mass distributions with loads their input is put together
with the load input. A new mass distribution is specified like a new load, whereby in
the selection field ’Type’ instead of ’Load’ ’Mass Distribution’ is selected.
Analogous to the loading combinations there are also combinations of load distribu-
tions. Thus, for a new load select the type ’Mass Combination’.
Loads, for which the check box ’only gravity loads..’ in the properties dialogue has been
activated, can be used directly as mass distributions in mass combinations.
. Members for which neither an eigenmass nor a distributed mass is input, are assigned a mass
of size 1eï4 * eigenmass automatically by the program. In this way meaningless mode shapes
can be avoided, while the eigenfrequencies are hardly affected at all.
. The total mass as well as the position of its centre of gravity is output graphically and numeri-
cally for the individual mass distributions and also for mass combinations (Legend in the Load
tabsheet).

F 1.2 Specification of the Analysis of Natural Frequencies

Dynamic analyses are special ones, which in the tabsheet ’Analysis’ can be defined using
the button shown on the left. If you click on this button, the corresponding dialogue

STATIKï5 Fï3
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

appears, which manages all special analyses. Proceed as shown in the following
graphic:

Define with this button a

new special analysis.
(Adjacent buttons to
modify or delete lines in
the analysis)

3 A dialogue to set the parameters

for a natural vibration analysis ap-
pears

ID, under which the

2 natural vibrations
analysis appears in
A dialogue to select the der Results list
analysis type appears;
select ’Eigenvalue
analysis Dynamics’

All mass elements are provided with

an additional eccentricity in the cor-
responding global direction

Fï4 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

F 1.3 Output of Results

In the first list field of the tabsheet Results besides the linearly analysed load cases, the
load case combinations and limit state values can also be listed for the special analyses,
which were defined in the tabsheet Analysis, and can be obtained for the results:

Gives eigenfrequency table for analysis with ID

’Dyn’

List with n entries (n=No. of requested eigen-

values); gives the mode shapes too

Under the ID that was input in the specification of the natural vibrations analysis, you
can find in the above list field a basic entry, under which a tabular representation of
the eigenfrequencies (see below) can be obtained. Immediately beneath this are the
entries for the mode shapes. They are numbered from 1 to the number of requested
eigenvalues.
Results example for eigenfrequency and participation factor table:

basic eigenmodes nor-

malized according to
:
IiT * M * Ii = 1

In the third table the mode shapes with their modal masses are listed separately for the
directions of excitation X, Y and Z. The lists are sorted according to decreasing modal
masses. This table is especially useful in the case of a response spectrum analysis, in
which it is usually requested that for a considered direction of excitation the sum of the
modal masses of the considered eigenmodes is a certain percentage of the total mass.
If this is 90%, then according to the above output for the X−direction the eigenmode
2 and for the Y−direction the modes 1 and 3 have to be considered. In the Z−direction
practically no mass is excited by the first five modes.

STATIKï5 Fï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 1 Natural Vibrations

Results example for a mode shape:

The tabular output of the mode shapes can be requested if desired for the following
types of scaling:
S according to the normalzation IiT * M * Ii = 1 (normalized with respect to mass)
S scaled to the maximum displacement value Dmax = 1m (where Dmax signifies single
displacement parameter and not the spatial displacement of a point); the participa-
tion factor output in the title corresponds to the direction of excitation in which the
maximum displacement occurs
S by specifying a scaling factor, which refers to scaling according to mass normaliza-
tion (1. Option)
In the title the corresponding participation factor is also output.

In the dialogue ’Settings for Results Output’ besides the start button for the analysis the
type of normalization can also be selected.

Fï6 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.1 Basics

F 2.1.1 Principle of Modal Analysis

The following dynamic equilibrium formulation is the basis of the principle of modal
analysis on which also the method of response spectra is based:
.. .
M A(t) ) C A(t) ) K A(t) + F(t)[1]

with

M : global mass matrix of the structure

C : global damping matrix of the structure
K : global stiffness matrix of the structure
..
A(t)AAA A(t) : vector of nodal accelerations, nodal velocities or nodal displacements
F(t) : external load vector

With the transformation of [1] among other things with the help of the assumption:

A i(t) + fiY i(t)[2]

where:

A i(t) : i-th modal component of the displacement vector A(t)

fi : vector of i-th mode
Y i(t) : modal coordinate (amplitude) of the i-th mode

the system of equations is uncoupled [1] into n independent scalar equations of motion
(n=No. of eigenvalues), written for the i-th mode, as follows:
.. .
Y i(t) ) 2c i w iYi(t) ) w 2i Y i(t) + F i(t)[3]

where:

ci : modal damping of the i−th mode

wi : circular frequency i−th mode
F i(t) : modal loading function of the i−th mode

By solving the uncoupled equations of motion for their amplitudes and superposition
of the mode shapes scaled with these amplitudes one obtains the desired structural re-
sponse.
. Literature on modal analysis:
R.Clough, J.Penzien: “Dynamics of Structures” (Verlag Mc Graw Hill)
K.J. Bathe: “Finite-Elemente-Methoden” (Verlag Springer)

STATIKï5 Fï7
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.1.2 The Method of Response Spectra

In the response spectra method one is interested in the maximal response of the struc-
ture for a given seismic loading. The starting point for the analysis are the uncoupled
equations of motion [3] of the structure. The modal loading function Fi (t) is thereby re-
placed by:
..
F i(t) + ai a(t)
where:
..
a(t) : seismic base acceleration acting on the structure
ai : modal participation factor for the i-th mode
The modal participation factors are defined as follows:

a i + fTiF 0 + f TiM e
with:
fi : i−th eigenvector of the structure
F0 : vector of the mass loads of the structure, on which the seismic
acceleration ä(t) acts
M : global mass matrix
e : vector for the excitation direction

e.g. for X direction: e + NJ Nj, Y direction:

1
0
0.
.
e+ NJNj
0
1
0.
.

The modal maximum responses Y i,max can now be calculated with the help of the spec-
tral values of a given response spectum as follows:

Y i,max + ai S d(w i) + ai w1 S pv(wi) + a i 12 Sa(w i)[4]

i wi

with:

S d (wi) : spectral value of the relative displacement

S pv (wi) : spectral value of the pseudo−velocity
S a  (w i ) : spectral value of the absolute acceleration

Thus the response spectrum describes the maximum response of the single degree of
freedom system (simple oscillator) [3] with a given damping value and variable eigenfre-
quency for the seismic loading ä(t). The ordinate of the response spectrum can vary
with frequency or period, as abscissa Sd , Spv or Sa can be used.
The analysis is reduced therefore to the given response spectrum (determination of the
spectral values) for the eigenvalues with the frequencies wi (and damping values xi ) and
and the determination of the maximum modal amplitudes Y i,max of the eigenvalues from
them using equation [4].
With [2] one obtains:

A i,max + fiY i,max[5]

The total response Amax is given by a suitable superposition of the modal maximum
contributions Ai,max . In practice the following methods of superpositionen have proved
to be useful:
Addition of the absolute contributions:

ȍ ŤA
n
A max + Ť[6]
i,max
i

Fï8 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

SRSS method ("Square Root of the Sum of the Squares"):

A max+ Ǹȍ n

i
2
 A i,max  [7]

CQC method ("Complete Quadratic Combination"):

A max + Ǹȍ ȍ n

i
n

j
Ai,maxå ijAj,max [8]

with the correlation coefficients (x = modal dampfing coefficient):

8 Ǹcic j ǒci)rc jǓr 3ń2 wj

å ij +  , r + w
ǒ Ǔ
(1−r 2) 2 ) 4c ic jr(1)r 2) ) 4 c2i )c 2j r 2
i

The section forces for the system are determined in the same way as the displacements.
First the modal contributions of the section forces Si,max are calculated from the modal
displacements Ai,max and then analogously to [6], [7] or [8] added to the total response
Smax of the structure.

The previous considerations are valid for a seismic excitation ä(t) in one direction. If
all 3 seismic components have to be taken into account, this is done in an analogous
way. This means that first the total response Amax of each individual seismic component
äX (t), äY (t) and äZ (t) is determined using [6], [7] or [8]. Then these are again using [6] or
[7] summed to the response.

STATIKï5 Fï9
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.1.3 Design Spectra

SIA Code 160 (1989)

The elastic acceleration spectra ah /g normalised using the acceleration due to gravity
g are defined in the code in Figure 27 (page 70) for stiff and medium stiff soils for the
four zones 1,2,3a and 3b.

a h /g
Zone 3b stiff soil

0.3 Zone 3a
medium stiff
soil
Zone 2
0.2

Zone 1
0.1

2 3 10 33 Frequency [Hz]

The ductility factor K is determined according to Paragraph 4 19 72 of the code (page

71) as follows:

ductility factor K

values from linear constant

Table 33 interpolation 1.0

1.0

10 Hz 33 Hz Frequency

On the design coefficient Cd see Paragraph 4 19 73 of the code.

The maximum modal amplitudes Yi,max may be calculated using [4], page F−8 for the
i-th eigenvalue as follows:

Y i,max + ai @ 12 @ S a(w i) @ 1 @ C d

wi K

with
a
S a(w i) + gh @ g

ai = modal participation factor for the i-th mode

Greek Code GRN

Zone factorD : maximum horizontal base (ground) acceleration

A = D˜ g
(g : acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s2).

Fï10 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

Soil Type A","B","C ","D": specify range limits T1 and T2

of the spectrum:
Soil−Typ A B C D
T1 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.20
T2 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.20

With the input coefficients the design spectrum is defined as follows:

0 v T t T 1 : ƪ
R d(T) + A @ g I 1 ) T Q b *1
T1 q 0
ǒ Ǔƫ
T 1 v T v T 2 : R d(T) + A @ g I qq b 0

ǒ Ǔ
2ń3

R d(T) + A @ g I  qq b 0 2
T
T 2 v T :
T

R d(T) + at least0.25 @ A @ gI

A = base acceleration = D . g
T = period or corresponding eigenvalue
E0 = spectral amplification factor = 2.5 @ h
I = importance factor
q = behaviour factor
 = foundation factor
 = Damping correction factor + Ǹ 7
(2 ) c @ 100)
 w 0.7 ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ

Seismic excitation vertical (only for vertical analysis):

The parameters D  and q are used for a vertical response spectrum analysis, whereby
the program automatically carries out the following adjustments:
v = 0.7 
v = 1.0
qv = 0.5 q (at least 1.0)
With this type of analysis only seismic loads in the Z direction (=vertical direction) may
be input.

Eurocode EC8 (ENV 1998ïENV 1998ï1, January 2003)

Zone factorD : maximum horizontal base acceleration

A = D˜ g
(g : acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s2).

Soil type A","B","C ","D","E": specify the range limits TB,TC and TD
and other parameters of the spectrum:
Soil type Userdefined": Parameters TB,TC and TD and S can be specified
by the user
Parameter values describing Spectrum Type I for horizontal seismic excitation:

STATIKï5 Fï11
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

Soil-Typ TB TC TD S
[sek] [sek] [sek]

A 0.15 0.40 2.00 1.0

B 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.2
C 0.20 0.60 2.00 1.15
D 0.20 0.80 2.00 1.35
E 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.4

Parameter values describing Spectrum Type II for horizontal seismic excitation:

Soil-Typ TB TC TD S
[sek] [sek] [sek]

A 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.0

B 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.35
C 0.10 0.25 1.2 1.5
D 0.10 0.30 1.2 1.8
E 0.05 0.25 1.2 1.6

With the input coefficients the design spectrum is defined as follows:

0 v T t T B : ƪb
S d(T) + A @ g I @ S @ 2 ) T q0 * 2
3 TB 3
ǒ Ǔƫ
b
T B v T v T C : S d(T) + A @ g I @ S @ q0

b T
+ A @ g I @ S @ q0 C
T
ǒ Ǔ
T C v T v T D : S d(T)
w 0.20 @ A @ g I

b T T
ǒ Ǔ
+ A @ g I @ S @ q0 C 2 D
T
T D v T : S d(T)
w 0.20 @ A @ g I

A = base acceleration = D . g
T = period of the corresponding eigenvalue
E0 = spectral amplification factor =2.5 @ h
I = importance factor

Ǹ
q = behaviour factor
 = Damping correction factor + 10  w 0.55 ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ
(5 ) c @ 100)

Seismic excitation vertical (only for vertical analysis):

For the vertical components of the seismic action the Spectrum is given by describtion
of the horizontal design spectrum with the vertical ground acceleration Av replacing A
and S taken equal to 1.0.
The input coefficients for the vertical design spectrum are defined as follows:

Typ Av/A TB TC TD S
[sek] [sek] [sek]

Typ I 0.9 0.05 0.15 1.0 1.0

Typ II 0.45 0.05 0.15 1.0 1.0

Fï12 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

With this type of analysis only seismic loads in the Z direction (=vertical direction) may
be input.

Design ground displacement:

d g + 0.025 @ a g @ S @ TC @ TD

SIA 261
The dimensioning value of the horizontal ground acceleration (agd) for the 4 seismic
zones is defined as follows (Paragraph 16.2.1.2):

Zone Z1 Z2 Z3a Z3b

agd [m/s2] 0.6 1.0 1.3 1.6

The soil classes determine the section boundaries TB, TC and TD together with the value
of the parameter S for the design spectrum (Paragraph 16.2.2.2):

Soil− TB TC TD S
classe [sek] [sek] [sek]

A 0.15 0.40 2.00 1.0

B 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.2
C 0.20 0.60 2.00 1.15
D 0.20 0.80 2.00 1.35
E 0.15 0.50 2.00 1.40

The structure classes determine the importance factors f (Paragraph 16.3.2):

Structure Class I II III

Importance factors Jf 1.0 1.2 1.4

The design spectrum is determined as follows :

0 v T t T B :
agd b
S d(T) + g @ S @ 0.67 ) T q0 * 0.67
TB
ƪ ǒ Ǔƫ @ g f

agd
T B v T v T C : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S
q @ gf

agd T
T C v T v T D : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S @ C @ g f
T@q
agd T @T agd
T D v T : S d(T) + b 0 @ g @ S @ C2 D @ g f w 0.1 @ gf @ g
T @q

agd = base acceleration

g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.81 m/s2
T = period of the corresponding eigenvalue
E0 = spectral amplification factor = 2.5 @ h
q = behaviour factor
f = importance factor
 = Damping correction factor+ 10
(5 ) c @ 100)
 w 0.55Ǹ ǒ c + 5%, h + 1 Ǔ

STATIKï5 Fï13
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

Seismic excitation vertical (only for vertical analysis, Paragraph 16.2.4.2):

For the parametersD and q for a vertical response spectrum analysis the following ad-
justments are automatically performed by the program:

Sdv = 0.7 Sd

qv = 1.5

For this type of analysis only seismic loading in the Z−direction (= vertical direction)
may be input.

Design ground specification (Parapraph 16.2.4.3):

u gd + 0.05 @ g f @ a gd @ S @ TC @ T D

Userïdefined Spectrum

A design spectrum can be input by the user using the following input scheme (units
m,s,Hz):

BENUTZERDEFINIERT

VERSCHIEBUNG VS. FREQUENZ SFAK gamma/q LOGARITHM_INTEPOL.

BESCHLEUNIGUNG PERIODE
PSEUDO_GESCHWINDIGKEIT

FÜR A_DÄMPFUNG_IMPLIZIT WERTE xj vji

DÄMPFUNGSWERTE [i SCHRITT 'x vji

’gamma/q’ is a factor with which all input spectral values vji are multiplied.

If, for example, the input spectral values are based on an importance factor J=1 and a
behaviour factor q=1, the spectrum can be modified immediately using a corresponding
factor ’gamma/q’ for the changed values of these two quantities.

In the section F 2.3.2 an example of the input of a user−defined spectrum is given.

Fï14 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.2 Specification of a Response Spectrum Analysis

A prerequisite is a natural vibrations analysis with the desired number of eigenvalues

(see Ch. F 1.2 ).

Specifications for response spectra analyses are defined and managed in the tabsheet
’Analysis’ using the button ’Special Analyses’ :

2
Define with this button a
new special analysis.
(Adjacent buttons to
modify or delete a se-
lected line in the analy-
sis)

A dialogue appears to se-

lect the analysis type;
select
’Response Spectra’

If you have just defined a new special analysis ’Response Spectra Analysis’ or activated
an existing one for modification purposes, the dialogue shown below will appear:

Upper half of dialogue:

Mandatory specification ID
under which the results are
called

ID of the vibration analysis to

be used

Selection of the used eigen-

modes (see next page)

Damping values are used by the

CQC method
If used eigenmodes have to cor-
respond 1:1

Damping coefficients are used in the following cases:

− For code spectra SIA−262, EC8 and GRN as well as user−defined
spectra with explicit damping values
− With the C.Q.C method

STATIKï5 Fï15
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

To select the eigenvalues to be used, the following options are available:

S Use all eigenvalues: use all eigenvalues requested in the eigenvalue analysis.
S Use the n most important eigenvalues for each direction: the eigenvalues are
sorted for each direction according to decreasing modal mass, i.e. those that give
the greatest contribution come first. One can specify for each direction how many
of the first n eigenvalues should be used. With the three input numbers it is uniquely
defined which eigenvalues have to be taken into account, whereby for each analysis
(see below) only those directions are considered that have a seismic excitation factor
> 0. The program calculates the same as if the numbers of these eigenvalues were
input in the last option ’Selection of Eigenvalues’.
S Modal masses as percentage of the total mass: Analogous to the previous option,
in each direction the n most important eigenvalues are used, where n is fixed by the
program such that at least the sum of the considered modal masses corresponds to
the specified percentage of the total mass. If this percentage cannot be reached an
error message is given. Here, also, for each analysis task (see below) only those di-
rections are considered that have a seismic excitation factor > 0.
S Selection of eigenvalues: Only the specified eigenvalues are used. The numbers
correspond to those of the table with the calculated eigenfrequencies (sorted accor-
ding to increasing eigenfrequencies).

Choice for the damping value:

a) For a spectrum defined in a national code
S a−1) According to spectrum definition: the value of the damping coefficient [
defined in the spectrum specification dialogue for a given national code will be used
for all eigenmodes in the computing of the spectral value based on formulae defining
the spectrum.
S a−2) For all modes: the value of the damping coefficient [ given will be used for
all eigenmodes in the computing of the spectral value based on formulae defining
the spectrum. The [ value defined in the spectrum specification dialogue for a given
national code will be overwritten by this new value.
It is possible here to give [ = 0.
S a−3) General values: Individual according to the modes list. A list of damping coef-
ficients [i is given here. This list must correspond to the list of eigen modes to be
analysed. A coefficient must be given for each eigen mode, in the same order.
b) For a user defined spectrum
The values of the damping coefficients [ given according to one of the methods a−2
or a−3 described here before must lay between the minimal and maximal damping
values [ given by the user in the spectrum specification dialogue. If the user only
defines the spectrum for one single value of the damping coefficient [, it’s then im-
possible to interpolate and this spectrum will be used as−is, which ever values of
the damping coefficients [ are given. The method a−1) ’According to spectrum defi-
nition’ can not be applied to a user defined spectrum.

Fï16 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

A response spectra analysis can consist of several analysis tasks, which are defined as
follows:

Lower half of dialogue: active for combina-

building maxi- tion column
mum values

Each active line is an

analysis task

Excitation direction: nor-

mally either horizontal with
an angle and a factor or
vertical with a factor.
The factors relate to the va-
lues given by the spectrum
and are normally 1.0.

activate
lines

name of analy- seismic excitation spectrum to be type of superposition:

sis task direction used − absolute contributions
(should form a unit − SRSS
vector) − CQC

The different methods of superposition are described above in the chapter dealing with
the fundamental theory. A special case is given by the method of superposition ’Abso-
lute Contributions’, if set (in the top half of the dialogue ’Selection of Eigenvalues’) and
only one eigenvalue is requested. In this case, of course, there is nothing to superim-
pose, but obtaining the absolute values is dispensed with − thus the results are then
sign−dependent.

The results of the individual analysis tasks can also be combined (Combinations) and
the maximum values (Limit Values) of the results of the analysis tasks and/or combina-
tions can be obtained. How the settings in the above dialogue for this case are to be
understood is explained in the following figure:

Combination−
column

An activated selection button in the ’Combination Column’ signifies that this row can
be combined with the one above it. Several activated selection buttons directly one
above the other can form a chain. In the dialogue shown under the ID KA123 three tasks
and under KB12 two tasks for each combination are combined.

STATIKï5 Fï17
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

In the last of a series of activated rows the input fields for the name of a combination
and the method of superposition appear automatically. As method of superposition ’Ab-
solute’ and ’WQsum’ are available. Their meaning is explained in the chapter on funda-
mental theory under F 2.1.2.

Finally, maximum values, i.e. limit values from the above results, can be produced. To
obtain the maximum values all defined combinations can be compared as well as the
results of all analysis types activated in the column ’Max+’.

Fï18 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.3 The Dialogue ’Edit Spectra’

Before spectra can be selected they have to be defined. For this purpose there is the
dialogue ’Edit Spectra’ described below, which is reached using the button of the same
name.

Specifications for spectra are defined and managed in the special analysis dialogue ’Re-
sponse Spectra Analysis’ using the button ’edit spectras’:

1
Define a new spectrum
with this button.
(Adjacent buttons for
modifying or deleting a
selected spectrum)

A dialogue to select
the type of spectrum
appears;
Select the desired
spectrum type’

F 2.3.1 Prescribed parametricized Spectra from different Codes

The dialogues of the implemented code design spectra are built in the following way:
Code spectrum (example EC code 8):

Mandatory ID, under which the

spectrum in the analysis tasks
(analysis dialogue ’Response
Spectra’) can be called

Spectrum parameters

STATIKï5 Fï19
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.3.2 User-defined Spectra

Besides the design spectra of the established codes user−defined spectra can also be
input, which with the continuing microzonation of certain areas are becoming increa-
singly popular.
As an example, the following spectrum in the form of Frequency vs. Acceleration is gi-
ven. It is based on an importance factor J=1 and a behaviour value q of 1.0..
ah [m/s2]
For the spectrum to func-
tion,
3.0 [=5%
1) its frequency range
must cover the frequen-
[=10% cies of all eigenmodes
used in an analysis.
2.0
2) and, in addition the
[=15% damping values given in
the response spectrum
1.0 dialogue must lie within
the hatched zone for each
mode, i.e. between 5 and
15%..

0.5 1 2 3 10 33 100 Frequency [Hz]

The input of the above spectrum in the dialogue ’User−defined Spectrum’ is carried
out in the corresponding text field according to the rules of the input scheme on
page F−14, which is shown again here:

BENUTZERDEFINIERT

VERSCHIEBUNG VS. FREQUENZ SFAK gamma/q LOGARITHM_INTEPOL.

BESCHLEUNIGUNG PERIODE
PSEUDO_GESCHWINDIGKEIT

FÜR A_DÄMPFUNG_IMPLIZIT WERTE xj vji

DÄMPFUNGSWERTE [i SCHRITT 'x vji

By way of an example, the most important

rules for the interpretation of the input
scheme are illustrated. The following re-
marks are also relevant:
− The whole input text consists of a single
line, whereby it can be interrupted anyw-
here by using a line continuation symbol
’/’.
− From the words written in capitals at
least the initial letter must be used.
− All numerical values must have a deci-
mal point.
Otherwise, the input is format−free. Bet-
ween the individual elements (words,
numbers) there must be at least one
blank.
If these rules are violated the program gi-
ves a corresponding error message.

. If one wants to generate the spectrum, e.g. for a behaviour value of 2.0, then after SFAC in-
stead of 0.5 the value 1.0 has to be input.

Fï20 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

F 2.4 Results of the Response Spectra Analyses

After specifying a response spectrum analysis according to the results tree of the
tabsheet Results, in the section F 2.2 the following results are available:

Tabular record of the 4

specified analyses

Diagrams of the spec- Positive section forces, dis-

tra used together with placements and reactions
the eigenmodes for all the specified analy-
ses, combinations and
maximum values

Diagrams of the spectra used:

For each response spectrum analysis a diagram of the spectrum used can also be reque-
sted. All eigenvalues considered can be plotted in this diagram.

F 2.4.1 Use of the Results

Direct Use

As direct results, for all analysis tasks and any specified combinations of them the displa-
cements, reactions and section forces in every point or in every results section of the
structure are available unsigned.

STATIKï5 Fï21
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 2 Response Spectra Analyses

Use of the Limit Value Specifications

The analysis results described above, together with the results of other actions, can also
be processed to obtain limit values. In the dialogue, to input the load superposition of
an action in the left table with the existing loads all specified results IDs of the response
spectra analyses are also listed. They can be included in the superposition. Here, of
course, we have optional ’Loads’, which can be introduced into the superposition only
with [plus if decisive], and if need be followed by [or].

The present solely positive response spectra results used to obtain the limit values are
investigated each time with positive and negative signs, i.e. both the maximum values
and the minimum values are added.

If response spectra results are present in a limit value specification, then for limit values
of a result component determined for that purpose no associated results of the other
components can be output.

Use in Reinforced Concrete Analyses

The section forces from the results of a response spectrum analysis can also be used
in a reinforced concrete analysis. More on this is to be found in the chapter G 2.6.

Fï22 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 3 Determination of Lateral Forces

F 3 Determination of Lateral Forces

F 3.1 Fundamental Theory

The lateral (i.e. equivalent static) force method is the simplest method of determining
the loading in a building for a seismic analysis. It is restricted to structural systems that
can be represented by two plane structural models and whose behaviour is not substan-
tially influenced by the contributions of the higher modes. Regarding the requirements
for using the method see the corresponding codes.

The total horizontal lateral force due to seismic action is determined as follows for each
principal direction:

F d + Sd(T 1)G totl

Sd : Ordinate of the design spectrum for the period T1 of the fundamental mode of
vibration
Gtot : Reduction factor of 0.85 to take into account the relationship of the modal mass
of the fundamental mode to the total mass in the case of buildings with at least
three horizontal moveable storeys and T1 < 2TC (provision for this not in all
codes, including SIA 261))
The distribution of the total lateral force over the individual storeys can either be perfor-
med on the basis of the mode shape of the fundamental mode or this mode shape can
be assumed to vary linearly with height. In the first case the formula is:

s iG i
F di + Fd
Ss jG j

Fdi : lateral force acting on storey i

Fd : total lateral force (see above)
si , sj : weighting factors, in this case the displacement of the i−th (j−th) storey in the
fundamental mode
Gi ,Gj : weight of storey (Gtot = sum of all Gi)

In the case of an assumed linear mode shape (e.g. SIA 261) the formula is

z iG i
F i + Fd
Sz jG j

zi : Here the storey nodes are the weighting factors

STATIKï5 Fï23
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 3 Determination of Lateral Forces

F 3.2 Specification of an Lateral Force Analysis

If the lateral forces are based on a natural vibrations analysis, then this must be specified
(see chapter F 1.2 ).

Specifications for the lateral force analysis are defined and managed in the tabsheet
’Analysis’ by selecting with the button ’Special Analyses’:

2
Define a new special
analysis with this but-
ton.
(Adjacent buttons to
modify or delete a se-
lected analysis row)

3
A dialogue to select the analysis
type; select ’Lateral Force Method’

If you have just defined a ’Special Analysis’ or

activated an existing one for the purpose of mo-
dification, the adjacent dialogue appears, in
which all relevant input is made.

Its contents are on the whole self−explanatory.

Additional explanations are given below.

Important remark: The program is unable to

find out if the requirements for the lateral force
method are fulfilled. If based on an eigenfre-
quency analysis, however, two conditions are
checked, and if they are violated the program
gives an error message and terminates:

1) If the fundamental modes are determined by

the program, the ratio of the modal mass in the
direction under consideration to that normal to
it must have at least the value required in the
dialogue (’required mass ratio’).

2) The modal masses of the fundamental mode

must make up at least 50% of the total mass.

Fï24 STATIKï5
Part F Dynamic Analysis F 3 Determination of Lateral Forces

Mass Distribution:

The mass distribution that has to be selected in the dialogue must be a mass combination
consisting of n mass distributions. Each of the n mass distributions consists of the mass
of one of the total of n storeys of a building.

The mass of the building is considered for each

storey with its own mass distribution.
The mass distribution specified in the specifi-
cation of the lateral force analysis must be an
Zi exact mass combination of these storey mas-
ses.
For storey nodes the program takes the Z−coor-
dinates of the centres of gravity of the storey
masses.

The mass reduction factor l included in most codes has to be input manually.

Periods:

They are needed to select the required

ordinate in the spectrum. They can be Sdmax
determined automatically by an eigenva-
lue analysis or input explicitly. For an
estimate on the safe side as a simplifica-
tion the maximum value of the spectrum Sd
can also be used. In this case no period
values are needed.

T1

F 3.3 Results of an Lateral Force Analysis

The main result is a table with the lateral forces in the two directions and all relevant
quantities needed in the analysis. In addition, there is a plot of the spectrum that inclu-
des the periods and the resulting Sd.

STATIKï5 Fï25
Part E Specialities E 1 Axis Points

Part ESpecialities
The parts of the program covered in this chapter are those included in the option Spe-
cialities" and are treated here together, although they do not have anything to do with
each other directly.

E 1 Axis Points
E 1.1 Definition

input axis point

cross section centre of gravity

Fig. Eï1 Axis point in a cross section

An axis point is a special point that can be introduced into a cross section (Program
FAGUS-5). The input of an axis point signifies:
S in FAGUS-5: The section forces for FAGUS-5 analyses refer to the axis point and not,
as otherwise, to the centre of gravity.
S in STATIK-5: The existence of an axis point in a cross section influences the position
of the cross section with reference to the member axis in STATIK-5. Without the axis
point the cross section lies with its centre of gravity on the member’s axis and with
an axis point the axis point lies on the member ’s axis. (The position of the member’s
axis has nothing to do with the cross section)
. When using axis points one must take into account that load, displacement and section force
results in STATIK-5 are defined with respect to member axes. At first sight some results may
seem to be paradoxical, as illustrated in the following example.
a) cross section without b) cross section
axis point with axis point

member’s
axis

System: cantilever built−in on the left

Loading: local force x distributed over whole member

Try to explain the following results:

1) Whereas for a) only horizontal displacements result, the cantilever exhibits bending b) also
vertically. a) and b) also have at the end of the cantilever different horizontal displacements.
2) b) has no moment, although the member is curved.

E 1.2 Application
S If a cross section changes from one construction state to another, this can only be
accomplished by means of an axis point, so that in each construction state it lies cor-

STATIKï5 Eï1
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

rectly, since the position of the member’s axis remains unchanged. This is important
above all if normal forces occur, which is always the case for example with pre-
stressed structures. For a more detailed description see E 4.1 .
S If one works with axis points, then one does not always need to adapt the geometry
of the member’s axis during the dimensioning process for changes of the cross sec-
tion.

E 2 Structure Lines

E 2.1 What is a Structure Line?

Since beam bridges are often not straight both in plan and in vertical section, the correct
geometrical definition of the structure, loads and possibly tendons can be quite de-
manding and requires a lot of effort. In order to simplify this task substantially, struc-
ture lines have been introduced in STATIK−5 .
Structure lines represent an alternative to inputting a series of members and also serve
as reference lines for loads and tendons. Above all they are suitable for modelling beam
bridges, but are not restricted to these structures.
In the case of a beam bridge, for example, one introduces a structure line along the car-
riageway axis or parllel to it resp.). Normally the carriageway axis is already fixed before
the structural analysis and the position of the cross section and the profile of any ten-
dons are defined with respect to it.

structure line as basis for

the geometrical definition
of the superstructure

structure line
points
column
(normal member)

eccentric
connection to section with
support nodes structure line

Fig. Eï2 Structure line

Properties of structure lines:

S In general a structure line is a curved polygon passing through a series of structure
line points. Geometrically the curve is defined by its path in the plan and side view
planes. As the plan view plane one can have an arbitrarily selected reference
plane and the side view plane is the developed elevation surface (=cylindrical sur-
face normal to the plan view plane through the structure line). How to input this
structure line is described later.
S With a structure line not only a reference line but at the same time a series of
members is defined automatically.
S Structure line section denotes a portion of structure line between two structure
line points. A structure line section is closely related to a member but with the main
difference that it can be curved. Otherwise it has largely the same attributes. This
applies also to possible cross section changes, which can be constant or linearly
changing over a structure line section. Therefore, in places where the cross section
changes a structure line point must be introduced. This is also the case for nodes
(supports), which cannot be defined within a structure line section.

Eï2 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

Structure line section | curved member

Local coordinate system:
x: tangnt to structure line
x
y: parallel to plan view plane z
(u,v)
z: projecion on w with same
direction as w (w = u x v) For analysis automatic subdivi-
y sion in straight member ele-
ments (number depends on cur-
Plan view plane (u,v): vature)
Property of structure line
can be defined by user

Fig. Eï3 Structure line section

S The structure line is at the same time the member’s axis. Thus the member’s axis has
the same significance as for members, but with the difference that it can change its
direction from point to point.
S In contrast to the usual member lines for structure line sections there are no eccentric
connections. Thus the structure line coincides with the path of the member’s axis.
The correct cross section positioning is achieved by means of the axis points (see
below).
S Structure line points, on the other hand, can be eccentrically connected to nodes (see
E−2).
S Structure lines cannot - in contrast to members - be automatically cut by other struc-
ture lines, members or nodes, i.e. they can only be connected to structure line points
in other parts of the structure.

Position of the Cross Sections with respect to the Structure Lines

Axis point
on structure line

Sfield
Scolumn

Fig. Eï1 Axis points and centres of gravity

The axis point of a cross section lies on the structure line. The axis point can be input
anywhere in the cross section. If none is defined then the centre of gravity is assumed
to be the axis point (see Fig. E−1).
In the case of structures with changing cross sections it is always necessary to work ex-
plicitly with input axis points, since otherwise the axes of the centre of gravity would
lie on the structure line and thus the carriageway would exhibit discontinuities (kinks
and jumps).
This method of positioning the cross section has the advantage that in the case of cross
sectional changes no changes in the structure input are necessary, providing the posi-
tion of the axis point with respect to the carriageway axis is not changed.
. Since the section forces are also defined with respect to the members’ axes and thus with re-
spect to the structure lines, it is recommended to input them not at the level of the carriageway
but at a constant distance beneath it, approximately at the average path of the axes of centre
of gravity and to define the axis points correspondingly.

E 2.2 Input of a Structure Line

To input structure lines one uses the button shown on the left in the structure tabsheet.
It calls the following Structure Line dialogue:

STATIKï5 Eï3
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

Each structure line has its own unique identifier (ID) and as a plan view plane an exist-
ing or a new definable working plane can be selected. The geometrical definition of
a structure line is done separately in plan and side view.
The curve in plan is the basis of the structure line. If with [Introduce] a new structure
line is defined, one automatically enters the input mode for the curve in plan view. After
leaving the plan view input by default the curve in side view is automatically defined
(level everywhere zero).
With the buttons [Plan View Curve] and [Side View Curve] the path of these curves can
be modified for an existing structure line at any time.

E 2.2.1 Input of the Curve in the Plan View

One gets to the dialogue ’Structure Line’ either via [Introduce] to introduce a new struc-
ture line or via [Modify Plan View Curve] to modify an existing structure line in the input
mode for Plan View Curve:

Calls the dialogue

’Structure Line Point’ Don’t show side and This row at the top
length handles boundary of the gra-
phics area denotes the
Make other structure input mode for the plan
lines invisible curve

Graphics Editor tool to input

the plan view curve

Plane coordinates u,v

(Plan plane)

The input of the curve in the plan view is done with the Graphics Editor tool in a first
step as for the input of a polygon, i.e. by inputting a series of points, the structure line
points. This produces a curve, which may not have the desired shape. This however
can be corrected in a second step. In inputting the points one should note that points
are defined everywhere where
S other members (e.g. columns) or structure lines have to be connected

Eï4 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

S nodes (supports) are to be introduced

S modifications of the cross section are foreseen
One is reminded that structure lines are not automatically intersected by members, other
structure lines or nodes, as one is used to with members. One can if necessary introduce
subsequently other structure line points. Those that are known in advance however are
best input at the beginning.
To insert new intermediate points select the curve and in the Context menu select ’Intro-
duce Point’.
The exact path of the individual structure line sections (=parts of the curve between two
structure line points) can be determined section−by−section by the direction and length
of the end tangents:

Variation of the tangent Variation of the tangent

Tangents end direction in A length in A

curve
section

A A
Tangent
handle

Fig. Eï4 Tangent parameters of the curve sections

This can be done by moving the tangent handles or via the Attributes dialogue for the
points of the curve :

D=0: u-direction,
positive anticlockwise

The dialogue allows one to work more subtly and modify independently tangent length
and direction.
Once the modification of the plan view curve has been completed, the input mode is
exited using the button [OK] in the header line.

E 2.2.2 Modification of the Curve in the Side View

As soon as a structure line has been introduced by inputting its plane curve, there is
already a default value for the side view curve, which can be modified at any time using
the button [Edit Side View Curve] in the Structure Line dialogue.
The modify mode for the side view curve corresponds to that for the plan view curve.
Instead of the plan view plane however one works in the side view plane:
To begin with the side view curve consists of a straight line with points at the start and
at the end of the developed curve, both with a height of v=0. These two points can be

STATIKï5 Eï5
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

Elevation area
Structure
line

Elevation plane as develop-

Trace of structure ment of the elevation area
line in plan plane

Fig. Eï5 Elevation area plane

moved in the v-direction. If the elevation curve is not straight, intermediate points can
be introduced. This is accomplished as with the plan view curve using the Context menu
with ’Introduce Point’.
Otherwise the curve is modified as with the plan curve, i.e. the points also have a Curve
Point dialogue, in which the tangent directions and lengths can be specified.
. Any introduced intermediate points in the side view curve are not structure line points, which
subdivide the structure lines into structure line sections. This function is only for the curve
points of the plan view curve.
Once the modification of the elevation curve has been completed, the input mode is
exited using the button [OK] in the header line.

E 2.2.3 Attributes of the Structure Line Sections

After inputting the structure line curve the attributes of the structure line sections (corre-
sponds to member attributes) and those of the structure line points (next chapter) still
have to be specified.
As always, if attributes have to be assigned, first the corresponding objects have to be
selected. Then the Attributes dialogue must be opened (if not already open) and ad-
justed, and the new settings are applied to the selected objects with [Apply].
To select a structure line section firstly the structure line is selected. On it the symbols
for its points and sections are shown, whereby the desired sections can be selected.
If several sections have to be modified, it is easier to use the button shown on the left.
Thereby the Attributes dialogue for the sections is shown and the button for direct selec-
tion of object points is switched on. Thus a two step selection is not now necessary,
and with <Ctrl>A e.g. all sections can be selected immediately.
Selecting individual structure line sections is done by clicking on the section symbols
(and not on the line):

Section symbol

Structure line with 2 sections

The Attributes dialogue corresponds to that for members, but the tabsheet for eccentri-
cities and orientations is missing, since the structure line sections do not have these
properties:

Eï6 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 2 Structure Lines

E 2.2.4 Attributes of the Structure Line Points

A structure line is normally connected at its structure line points to the ’Outside World’,
i.e. to support nodes or other members. These connection points can be provided with
an eccentricity (see E−2). The eccentricity is an attribute of the structure line point.

The Attributes dialogue for structure line points looks as follows:

The eccentricity vector to be input points from the structure line point to the correspon-
ding nodal point.

If an eccentricity has been specified for a structure line point, then nothing else can be
directly connected to it!

STATIKï5 Eï7
Part E Specialities E 3 Constraints

E 3 Constraints

E 3.1 Basics

Externally prescribed linear dependencies of displacement parameters are called con-

straints. Typical applications are rigid connections of a group of nodes or pin joints.
The constraints are of the form:
S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + factor3 * M3+ ...
(S=slave parameter, i.e. dependent displacement parameter, Mi=master parameter, i.e.
free displacement parameter)
In the formululation of constraints the following conditions must be observed:
S Slave parameters may not involve support conditions
S A displacement parameter can only be used once as a slave parameter
S A slave parameter may not be a master parameter simultaneously
In order to simplify the input in some practical cases the program, besides the general
form, also supports the input of the following special constraints:
S Degrees of freedom to be set equal for double nodes; suitable, e.g., for pin joints
like shear hinges (displacements are equal, but not the rotations).
S The same parameters (selection) in a list of master nodes and in a corresponding list
of slave nodes.
S Rigid connection of selected degrees of freedom of a group of slave nodes with a
master node; suitable, e.g, for a rigid floor plane, for which no relative displacements
and no relative rotation within the plane are desired. Although in this case not
necessarily all parameters of a slave node are actually slave parameters, in checking
the above mentioned conditions all are regarded as such.

E 3.2 Specification of Constraints

E 3.2.1 Preparations

Nodes and their IDs:

Nodes, for which one wants to specify constraints, have to be explicitly defined by the
user, which for unsupported nodes is not normally the case and is also not necessary,
since they are automatically generated by the program. Since master parameters in the
specification of constraints are identified by their IDs, this ID has to be paid special atten-
tion.
If you let the ID be automatically generated (see below the graphic of the tabsheet of
the Node dialogue), in some circumstances you must first let the structure be checked,
before the IDs can be generated.
However, we prefer to recommend the manual allocation of meaningful IDs, so that the
constraint specifications are more readable and can be checked and are sure to remain
in the case of structural changes.

To permit all existing nodes and also the corresponding IDs to be seen, you have to
activate the corresponding layer (see graphic on the left).

Eï8 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 3 Constraints

Dual Nodes:

Nodes with the activated control field ’Dual

Nodes’ are pairs of nodes. They consist of the
first node and a second node at the same loca-
tion, which may not be supported. Its ID (see
next section) is the same as that of the first node
with an added ’.2’ .

The use of Dual Nodes is necessary if certain members are connected to the first and
others to the second node, and if between the two nodes there are certain constraints.
An example of this is the pin joint (shear hinge) (see below).

If a member has to be connected to the second node, this is specified in the Attributes
dialogue of the member. There are control fields for this purpose in the tabsheet, where
also any eccentricities are input.

E 3.2.2 Input

If you have carried out the above preparations,

you can begin with the introduction of the con-
straints.

Constraints, as described above, are IDs

between a slave and one or more master para-
meters, which are always specified as a prop-
erty of the node belonging to the slave para-
meter.

The tabsheet of the Nodes dialogue is provided

to specify the constraints. As can be seen in the
dialogue, a node has either no connection to
any master node or it has some, which are
defined in one of the four methods of input that
can be specified and which are described
below.

. In the case of Dual Nodes all constraint properties relate to the second node. Thus the first
node cannot have any parameters described as slaves.

. In the following the simpler dialogues for plane frames are always presented. The 3D dia-
logues are extended by the corresponding parameters, but otherwise they function in the same
way.

STATIKï5 Eï9
Part E Specialities E 3 Constraints

General Constraint

For this purpose the general formula

S = factor1 * M1 + factor2 * M2 + ...

has to be considered. A node with the shown

dialogue settings has the two slave parameters
displacement DZ and rotation RY. The con-
straint of DZ reads as follows:
DZ is equal to 1.0 times the displacement X of
the node NC5 + 4.25 times the displacement Z
of the node NB12 .

Identical Parameters

This corresponds to a constraint of the type

Slave parameter = 1.0 * Master parameter .

The node can also have several parameters

identical to the master node.

The ID of the master node can also be set by

grabbing the corresponding node with the
mouse. Click for this purpose on the arrow.

. Often there are several nodes which should have the same parameters as a master node. Select
in this case all these nodes, make the settings in the corresponding dialogue and then click
on [Apply].

Identical Parameters for Dual Nodes

This constraint (only active in the case of Dual

Nodes) corresponds to the type ’Identical Para-
meters’ with the special feature that the master
node is not another node but the first node of
the double node pair and thus does not have
to be specified explicitly.

A11
A21

Double node
With the shown dialogue setting one can model, e.g., a pin joint, as shown on the left.
The ends of the members at the Dual Nodes of the one arm (A11+A12) are connected
A12
A22 at the first node and that of the other (A21+A22) at the second node.

Eï10 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 4 Construction Stages (CSS)

Rigid Connection
This involves connecting a node or its selected
displacement parameters rigidly to a master
node.
The program introduces for this purpose, for
each selected slave parameter, the constraint
relationships needed for a rigid connection to
a master node, which contain the terms with
displacement and rotation parameters of the
master node.
An example for the use of rigid connections could be a stiffening floor in a skeletal frame
structure. Here the displacement parameters DX and DY and the rotation RZ of a node
within a floor would be rigidly connected with a node of the floor defined as master
node.

E 4 Construction Stages (CSS)

E 4.1 Concept

If one wants to investigate a structure for different variants this can be done by success-
ive modification and analysis, or preferable, in general, by creating several analysis pro-
jects, so that the corresponding input data is not lost and at any time one can access
again the individual variants.
If, however, one wants to consider a structure in different states, e.g. construction stages
in which loads act, their effects can be cumulative and one needs the concept of con-
struction stages (=CSS) in STATIK-4. It permits the combination of results that can be
calculated in different construction stages of a structure, i.e. each load case can be
applied for a particular construction stage and its results can be combined at the end
with those of any other load cases acting in other construction stages or used to build
limit states.
For a combination of results to be meaningful, the different construction stages can
differ only with respect to certain properties:
Nodes: They can only be introduced or removed in the initial state. If in one particular
position you only need a support in the n-th construction stage, then you have to intro-
duce an unsupported node already in the initial state. The following nodal properties
may be changed in a construction stage:
S support conditions
S constraints
Members: They can only be introduced or removed in the initial state. If for example
you only need a member in the n-th construction stage, then you have to introduce a
member already in the initial state and make it inactive. The following member prop-
erties may be changed in a construction stage:
S Active status of members
S Hinges
S Member cross section variants
S Changing the cross section stiffnesses
S Consideration of shear deformation
Although the construction stages are defined in a particular sequence, this does not
necessarily define a time variation, in which the effects of structural changes and loading

STATIKï5 Eï11
Part E Specialities E 4 Construction Stages (CSS)

are automatically considered. For example, if in investigating a sequential variation in

any construction stage a support is removed, this has to be compensated by introducing
a reaction corresponding to the force. In STATIK-4 there is at present no analysis type
with which this is automatic. One only defines construction stages and each load case
introduced is instructed regarding which construction stage it acts in.

E 4.2 The Initial State of a Structure

Normally, i.e. without the use of construction stages, one always works in the Initial
state of a structure and the concept has no special significance.
However, as soon as one works with construction stages, the Initial state signifies:
− In the Initial state the structure defines all the unchanging properties from one con-
struction stage to another. If one has to make changes in such properties, this is only
possible in the Initial state.
− With respect to the analysis the Initial state has the same meaning as every other con-
struction stage, i.e. a load case can act in the Initial state or in any other construction
stage.

E 4.3 The Definition of Construction Stages

E 4.3.1 The Construction Stage Dialog

Click on the arrow button in the list field under ’construction stages’ (in the Structure
tabsheet), and the following dialogue also opens, with the help of which construction
stages (CSS) can be defined, deleted, changed in the ID and activated:

Structure
legend
Definition of new CSS;
change CSS−ID;
delete CSS; Not deletable
CSS-Legend Initial state

Selected CSS

Activate selected CSS

(also possible with
double click on CSS) Print entry for CSS
list

A newly introduced CSS, provided an CSS is selected in the list, is inserted directly after
it and otherwise added at the end of the list.
With this button, for all selected CSS in the list you obtain a tabular representation of
all changes with respect to the previous CSS in the list.

E 4.3.2 The Active Construction Stage

One CSS is always active (may be the Initial state). By active we mean that the represen-
tation of the structure corresponds to the properties of the active CSS, and that otherwise

Eï12 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 4 Construction Stages (CSS)

structural changes made belong to the definition of this CSS and do not apply to other
CSS.
A construction stage is activated in different ways:
S In the Structure tabsheet the active CSS is selected by the user using the CSS dialogue
or using the pair of arrow buttons via the CSS list field.
If the adjacent button (adjacent to the CSS list field) is active, the program high-
lights the changed nodes in the active CSS as compared to the previous CSS and
members by displaying them in another style.
This button in the Structure tabsheet provides a tabular output of the structural
data of the current CSS. If the above button to display the differences with respect
to the previous CSS is active, only these differences are output and otherwise all
the structural data.
S In the Loadcase tabsheet the CSS belonging to the specified load case is automatically
activated.
S In the Results tabsheet, after the command to execute, that CSS is automatically active
which belongs to the calculated result. This is not always unique. In the case of
results for load case combinations, for instance, from the participating CSS the one
with the highest number is activated.

E 4.4 Handling Construction Stages in the Different Tabsheets

An important question concerns the visibility of the inactive members in the different
CSS and tabsheets. This is managed in STATIK-4 as follows:
S In the tabsheets Structure, Surface (with 3D structures) and Loads the inactive
members are always visible. If need be one can make use of zooming or of suitable
subsystems.
S In the Results tabsheet the visibility of the inactive members can be switched off in
the active CSS using the button shown on the left.

E 4.4.1 CSS in the Structure Tabsheet

As mentioned above in the Structure tabsheet there is the CSS dialogue, in which you
can manage the CSS and select the active CSS.
In the active CSS (may be the Initial state) activate the required structural input for this
state. Here you also have the possibility of checking the active CSS and of fully docu-
menting it. In this you are supported as follows:
S If this button is active, all nodes and members that have been changed in relation
to the previous CSS are displayed in a different style. With it one can also control
the amount of tabular output of the structural data (see below).
S Using the adjacent button you obtain in the CSS dialogue a tabular summary of all
structural data that has changed with respect to the previous CSS. For this function,
in the CSS dialogue you can also select several CSS.
S Use this button in the Structure tabsheet (CSS dialogue has to be closed), to obtain
−with the active Differences Visible"button − a full tabular documentation of the
structure in the current CSS;
−with the active Differences Visible"button − a tabular display of the structural
data, which has changed with respect to the previous CSS.

E 4.4.2 CSS in the Surface Tabsheet

Surfaces have nothing to do directly with construction stages.

STATIKï5 Eï13
Part E Specialities E 5 Stability Analysis

. Each load case belongs to an CSS, which can include inactive members. Further, surface load
cases use surfaces to apply their loads. If surfaces possess load transfer members, which are
inactive in the load case, this is admissible and is handled by the program correctly. Inactive
members selected for load transfer in a surface, therefore, are not assigned any load.

E 4.4.3 CSS in the Loads Tabsheet

With the definition of a new load case, or in the attributes dialogue of a load case select
the CSS in which the load case should act. To each load case, therefore, an CSS is
assigned. If a load case acts in two CSS, it has to be input twice, since each load case
can only be assigned exactly to one CSS.
In the Loads tabsheet the program always automatically makes that CSS to be active,
which belongs to the active load case.
The CSS currently active in the Loads tabsheet also remains active when changing
tabsheets, until another CSS is activated in one of the ways described above.

E 4.4.4 Analysis Tabsheet

In this tabsheet it does not matter which CSS is active.

E 4.4.5 CSS in the Results Tabsheet

With the execution command in the Results tabsheet the desired results, if needed, are
calculated and then presented in the desired form.
Whereas in earlier program versions the user himself was responsible for ensuring that
an analysis was performed for the desired CSS, this is done automatically in STATIK-4.
This is possible because each load case (even mass load cases for dynamic analyses)
are assigned to an CSS.
Thus you can input a structure with several CSS, define a series of load cases for the
different CSS and then in the Results tabsheet, e.g., request directly limit state results
in which all load cases participate. The necessary calculations for the different CSS are
then automatically carried out.
When displaying the results the CSS, on the other hand, are important since often the
structure is placed under the graphical results. If, for example, one considers results in
an CSS, for which only a small part of the structure is active, then with the button shown
on the left the display of the inactive members is suppressed. After each calculation
(execution command), therefore, the program automatically makes that CSS active
which belongs to the requested Results load case. If, e.g. in the case of limit state values,
several load cases participate, then from all the CSS involved that with the highest
number is activated.
If despite this you want to activate a different CSS, you can do this in the Structure
tabsheet at any time. With each new analysis, however, the automatic procedure just
described applies again.

E 5 Stability Analysis
E 5.1 Basics
In the case of stability analyses the factor O is sought, by which a given load case has
to be increased, so that the loaded structure just becomes unstable. This leads to an
eigenvalue problem of the following form:

Eï14 STATIKï5
Part E Specialities E 5 Stability Analysis

buckling load = O load

K + Oi * KG (N) * Ii = 0
Oi : i−th eigenvalue
Ii : i−th mode shape
K : elastic stiffness matrix of the structure
KG (N) : geometrical stiffness matrix due to the load N
The load can also consist of a fixed part N0 and a variable part N. The buckling problem
is then formulated as follows:
buckling load = fixed load + O variable load
(K + KG (N0)) + Oi * KG (N) * Ii = 0
The mode shapes are normalised as follows:
IiT * K * Ii = 1
From the solution of the eigenvalue problem one obtains the load factors Oi and the
corresponding buckling shapes Ii. In the case of stability calculations usually only the
smallest value of the load factors is of interest. In the current program version only this
eigenvalue can be calculated.
It can happen that load factors Oi are negative. This is possible if there are structural
members exhibiting tensile forces.
For the subdivision of the members the same considerations apply as in the section
on calculations according to 2nd order theory (A 2.5.1). To illustrate this the buckling
loads of a prismatic pin−ended member having different subdivisions is compared with
the exact Euler solution:
L

No. of
members 1 2 3 4 5
EI

S2 EI O
OEu = OEu 1.2159 1.0076 1.0016 1.0006 1.0003
L2

. In the Attributes dialogue for members in the last tabsheet a possibility is provided for discre-
tising members into several member elements for the analysis.

E 5.2 Performing a Stability Analysis

Stability analyses are special analyses, which are defined in the tabsheet ’Analysis’ using
the button shown on the left. By clicking on this button the corresponding dialogue
appears for managing special analyses. Proceed as shown in the following figure:

E 5.3 Results of a Stability Analysis

In the first list field of the Results tabsheet besides the linear load cases, the load case
combinations and limit state values, the special analyses are also listed which were
defined in the Analysis tabsheet and are obtainable for the results:
Select the ID of the desired stability analysis. Under ’Output Size’ only the buckling
shape can be selected, which can be output graphically or numerically. In addition to
the buckling shape the load factor Ois also output, with which the variable load case

STATIKï5 Eï15
Part E Specialities E 5 Stability Analysis

Define with this button a

new special analysis.
(Adjacent buttons to
modify or delete a
selected analysis line)

2 3 A dialogue appears to select the

load case, for which the stability
load factor has to be found.
A dialogue appears to
select the type of analy-
sis;
Select ’Stability Eigen-
value Analysis ’

Control field for an

analysis with fixed
load case
Fixed
load case
ID, under which the
stability analyse
appears in the results
list

can be multiplied, until buckling occurs. The factor may also be less than 1.0 or even
negative.

Eï16 STATIKï5
Part D Nonlinearities D 1 General

Part DNonlinearities

D 1 General
The module ’Nonlinearities’, which is an optional extra, allows the treatment of non-
linear support components (only positive or negative reaction components are poss-
ible) as well as nonlinear truss members (pure tension or compression members).

A nonlinear analysis can be requested for individual load cases. It is performed itera-
tively, until in each case the prescribed conditions are fulfilled.

The nonlinear analysis can also be carried out according to 2nd order theory. Hereby,
the normal forces to determine the geometrical stiffness matrices during the iteration
always use the results of the last iteration step. Each iteration step is a normal analysis
of the structure according to 2nd order theory with the currently active support compo-
nents and truss members. For further details see Ch. A 2.5.1.

. Important Comment:
The superposition of the results of nonlinearly analysed load cases is not actually prevented
by the program, but in principle it is incorrect and would require special interpretation. Such
superpositions arise when nonlinearly analysed load cases occur in load case combinations
or in general limit state specifications.

If one wants to carry out a nonlinear analysis of a combination of existing load cases,
then for this case there are the combination load cases (see Ch. A 2.4.3).

A correct analysis of limit value results is possible if the limit state specification (see Ch.
LEERER MERKER) is restricted solely to the comparison of nonlinear load cases (includ-
ing combination load cases). The action specifications, therefore, may not contain any
load case superpositions and no action combinations may occur in the hazard scenarios.

D 2 Nonlinear Supports
For each support component − blocked or elastic spring − one can specify individually
whether it behaves linearly or whether the corresponding reaction force can take on
only positive or negative values.

In the following figure the supports are defined both linearly and nonlinearly. In the
nonlinear definition the Z reactions of all supports are only allowed to have positive
values, which is why the beam lifts off at its ends.

Linear support:

Z
Nonlinear support,
only positive X
Z reactions:

STATIKï5 Dï1
Part D Nonlinearities D 3 Tension or Compression Members

The definition of nonlinear support components is made in the following node dia-
logue.

Settings in the node dialogue for a

support with blocked X and Z com-
ponents, whereby the reactions for
the components DZ for nonlinearly
analysed load cases can only take
on positive values.
Positive DZ displacements, there-
fore, are not restrained in these
cases.

. Support nonlinearities are only defined for explicitly specified nonlinearly analysed load
cases (see below). They have no influence on the results of normal load cases.

D 3 Tension or Compression Members

If a member is defined as a ’nonlinear truss member’ (setting in the hinge−register of
the member dialog), for linear analysis it is treated just like a normal truss member. For
nonlinear analysis however pure tension members can only resist tensile forces and
pure compression members only compressive forces.

Example:
beam with two sets of crossed bracings

Linear analysis:

Nonlinear analysis:
Bracing defined as tension members
(the ’compression members’ are
omitted in the output of results
and are therefore not shown)

Nonlinear analysis:
Bracing defined as compression
members
(the ’tension members’are omitted in
the output of results
and are therefore not shown)

. Nonlinear truss members are never subdivided by the program, neither automatically nor by
touching nodes and members! Nonlinear truss members are always continous as they are in
the above example.

Dï2 STATIKï5
Part D Nonlinearities D 4 Setting up a Nonlinear Analysis

D 4 Setting up a Nonlinear Analysis

In order to analyse a load case nonlinearly, it has to be set up accordingly. This is done
in the tab sheet ’Analysis’ using the button on the left. By clicking on the button the
corresponding dialogue, which manages all special analyses, appears. Proceed as in the
following example:

Define a new special

analysis using this but-
ton.
(neighbouring buttons
to modify or delete a
chosen analysis)

A dialogue to select the

analysis type appears; A dialogue appears to select the
Select ’Nonlinear Analy- 3 load case to be analysed nonlin-
sis’ early.

Control field for 2nd

order analysis

Identifier, under
which the nonlin-
ear load case
appears in results
list

D 5 Results of Nonlinear Analyses

In the first list field of the ’Results’ tab sheet, besides the linearly analysed load cases,
load case combinations and limit state values, the special analyses are also listed that
were defined in the ’Analysis’ tab sheet, and for which results are available:

All active input load

cases

Nonlinear load cases

The quantity of results output for nonlinear load cases corresponds to that of normal
load cases.

STATIKï5 Dï3
Part D Nonlinearities D 5 Results of Nonlinear Analyses

. The analysis is carried out for the first result requested for a nonlinear load case. This can take
some time as the solution is obtained iteratively.

Dï4 STATIKï5